MASTER 
 NEGA TIVE 
 
 NO. 92-80720 
 
MICROFILMED 1993 
 COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES/NEW YORK 
 
 as part of the 
 "Foundations of Western Civilization Preservation Project" 
 
 Funded by the 
 NATIONAL ENDOWMENT FOR THE HUMANITIES 
 
 Reproductions may not be made without permission from 
 
 Columbia University Library 
 
COPYRIGHT STATEMENT 
 
 The copyright law of the United States - Title 17, United 
 States Code - concerns the making of photocopies or 
 other reproductions of copyrighted material. 
 
 Under certain conditions specified in the law, libraries and 
 archives are authorized to furnish a photocopy or other 
 reproduction. One of these specified conditions is that the 
 photocopy or other reproduction is not to be "used for any 
 purpose other than private study, scholarship, or 
 research." If a user makes a request for, or later uses, a 
 photocopy or reproduction for purposes in excess of "fair 
 use," that user may be liable for copyright infringement. 
 
 This institution reserves the right to refuse to accept a 
 copy order if, in its judgement, fulfillment of the order 
 would involve violation of the copyright law. 
 
AUTHOR: 
 
 ARNOLD, THOMAS 
 KERCHEVER 
 
 TITLE: 
 
 A PRACTICAL 
 INTRODUCTION TO 
 
 PLACE: 
 
 NEW YORK 
 
 DA TE : 
 
 1866 
 
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES 
 PRESERVATION DEPARTMENT 
 
 BIBLIOGRAPHIC MICROFORM TARGET 
 
 Master Negative # 
 
 Original Material as Filmed - Existing Bibliographic Record 
 
 887.82 
 Ar63 
 
 mri^^mrm' 
 
 II ■ ■ ■ I Ulllj i I i m^p^i^tp^i i i p w I ii I II j nyw^pypf ^^ I liiipip 
 
 A practical introduction to Greek prose composition. 
 By Thomas Kerchever Arnold . . . Carefully rev. and cor. 
 by Rev. J. A. Spencer, a. m. From the 5th London ed. 
 New- York, D. Appleton & co. ; Philadelphia, G. S. Apple- 
 ton, 1647. 18G6. 
 
 2 p. 1., iviii-x, {llj-237 p. 20~ 
 
 Another copy in Plimpton Library, 1848. 
 
 1. Qrcck language — Composition and exercises. 
 Ames, 1816-1898, ed. ' 
 
 417731 .' O "' f 
 
 Library of Congress j..^^ .^r PA258.A75' 1847 
 
 I. Spencer, Jesse 
 
 10-193101; 
 
 Restrictions on Use: 
 
 TECHNICAL MICROFORM DATA 
 
 FILM SIZE:____2.5_ilrn_ REDUCTION RATIO: 
 
 IMAGE PLACEMENT: lA ^I^ IB IID 
 
 M 7^ 
 
 DATE FILMED: 
 
 'l'\^-'>^ 
 
 INITIALS ____^y. 
 
 nLMEDBY: RESEARCH PUBLICATIONS. INC WOODDRIDGE. CT ' 
 
uatbMMMM^BaMftaaBMMiaaMaNki 
 
 tmmmitM 
 
 BiBLlOGllAl'lUC IKKIiG U LAlU'llliS " "IS- ^07^- 
 
 imRY-.JjAjh 
 
 7 
 
 IjiQWL 
 
 l/JiA. 
 
 CH - ~ 
 
 BMiQRraphic Irrepntar^JP s in the Orig inal Hnrl^impnt 
 
 List volumes and pages affected; include name of insUtution if filming borrowed text. 
 
 _^^:^Page(8) missing /not available: ■__ 
 
 ^Volumes(s) missing/not available: 
 
 ^>r 
 
 Jllegible and/or damaged page(s): q<^ U-^\ p UoW^.. p ...^. ^ 
 
 — Page(s) or volumes(s) mlsnumbered: 
 
 _Bound out of sequence:. 
 
 f^ioc . 
 
 _Page(s) or iliustration(s) fiimed from copy borrowed from: /\ f-^ i(Hlf. 0. £ci 
 
 1/1 
 
 Other: T./^ 5|7.W ^, ^p ^IL , |7^ ,,, y^(<; 
 
FILMED IN WHOLE 
 
 OR PART FROM A 
 COPY BORROWED 
 
 FROM NEW YORK 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 LIBRARIES 
 
r 
 
 Association for information and Image iWanagement 
 
 1 1 00 Wayne Avenue. Suite 1 1 00 
 Silver Spring. Maryland 20910 
 
 301/587-8202 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 /. 
 
 Centimeter 
 
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 
 
 I ILL 
 
 iiMliiiiliiiiliiiiliMiliiiiliiiiliiiilmiljiiilmil | iii^^ 
 
 Inches 
 
 1.0 
 
 1.25 
 
 I I I I I I I 
 
 3 4 
 
 
 ■ 63 
 
 ■ 71 
 1*0 
 
 I.I I 
 
 1 4.0 
 
 m to lui 
 
 1.4 
 
 2.5 
 
 2.2 
 
 2.0 
 
 1.8 
 
 1.6 
 
 15 mm 
 
 m 
 
 MflNUFRCTURED TO fillM STflNDflRDS 
 BY APPLIED IMAGE, INC. 
 

 vN ,>\ iV V 
 
 
 standard Classical "Works, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 ( 
 
 ) 
 1 
 
 • 
 • 
 
 
 
 (Hiilumbia Itmurnntu 
 ICtbrani 
 
 i^riini ICuttiuuitnn abnmaii 
 
 BORN 1835-DIED 1903 
 
 FUR THIRTY YEARS CHIEF TRANSLATOR 
 
 DEPARTMENT OF STATE. WASHINGTON. D. C 
 
 LOVER OF LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 
 
 HIS LIBRARY WAS GIVEN AS A MEMORIAL 
 
 BY HIS SON WILLIAM S. THOMAS. M. D. 
 
 TO COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY 
 
 A. 0. 1905 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 < 
 < 
 
 291 pages. 
 
 llaDsar'w €oininontarioM on tlio Gallic War. 
 
 English Notes, Critical and Explanatory: a Lexicon, Gcoj^ra] 
 and Historical Indexes, and a Map of Gaul. By J. A. Spe 
 D.D. 12mo. 40d pages. 
 
 :7icero's Select Orationn. "With Notes for tho nso of S< 
 
 and (\)Uej;es. By E. A. 'Johnson, Trofc^sor of Latin in th«: 
 versity of New York. 12mo. 40'J pages. 
 
 i-^mo. 
 
 • 
 
 With 
 >hlcal 
 
 .NCKB, 
 
 'hools 
 > Unl- 
 
 
 9 "• 
 
 /^. Q 
 
 /^/. ^. /^/^Jv^/^. 
 
 
 standard Classical "Works. 
 
 Cicero dc Offlcli«. 
 
 Zump and Bonnell. 
 12ajo. 194 pages. 
 
 With English Notes, mostly translated from 
 By TnoMAs A. Tuacuek, of Yalo College. 
 
 Horace, The Work* off. With English Notes, for the 
 use of dchools and Colleges. By J. L. Lincoln, Prof, of Latin Lan- 
 guage and Literature in Brown Univ'y. 12mo. 5T5 pages. 
 
 I.lvy. Selections from tho first five books, together with the 
 twenty-first and twenty-second books entire. With a Plan of 
 Eouie, and a Map of the Passage of Hannibal, and English Notes 
 for tho Uso of Schools. By J. L. Lincoln, Prof, of the Latin Lan 
 guage and Literature in Brown Univ'y. 12mo. 329 pages. 
 
 ^"f"*"f <^'"-""»: Life and Exploits of Alexander the Great. 
 Edited and Illustrated with English Notes, by Wiluam Henet 
 Ckosbt. 12mo. 885 pages. 
 
 Sallust's Juffurtba and Catiline.* With Notes and a 
 \ocabulary. By Butleb and Stfrgas. 12mo. 397 pages 
 
 toft^^P^IIS/i'U^^Jj:;!^^ fbund superior to any edition here- 
 
 The HiMorles of Tacifnii. With Notes for Colleges. By 
 W. S. Ttlek, Professor of Latin and Greek in Amherst Colleeo 
 12mo. 453 pages. ^ * 
 
 Tacitus' Germania and Agricola. With Notes for Col- 
 leges. ByW. 8. Ttler. 12mo. 193 pages. 
 
 VIrKll's JEneld.* With Explanatory Notes. By Henet 
 Feieze, Professor of Latin in the State University of Michigan. 
 (Kecently published.) 12mo. 698 pages. 
 
 -♦♦♦- 
 
 Greek Text-Books. 
 
 A rir»t Creek Book* and Introductory Reader. 
 
 «7 A. Harkness, Ph. D., author of " Arnold's First Latin Book " 
 -Second Latin Book," &c. (Recently published.) l2mo. ' 
 276 pages. 
 
 lr> .SPE END OP THIS VOLUME. 
 

 ■/^l( 
 
 ( 
 
 'ill I 
 
 fii 
 
 i 
 
 f 
 
 'JC 
 
 K 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 \ 
 
 •:•'*. 
 
* 
 
 ^ 
 
 A* 
 
 i 
 
 rMCXICAL INTKODUCTION 
 
 TO 
 
 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 
 
 BY 
 
 THOMAS KERCIIEVER ARNOLD, M. A., 
 
 RECTOR OF LYNDON, 
 AND LATE FELLOW OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAW BRIDGE. 
 
 (:, 
 
 iH 
 
 CAREFULLY REVISED AND CORRECTED 
 
 BY 
 
 REV. J. A. SPENCER, A. M. 
 
 PROM THE FIFTH LONDON EDITlOlf. 
 
 NEW YORK : 
 
 D. APriETON & CO., 443 & 445 BPwOADWAY 
 
 18G6. 
 
\ 
 
 VSk 
 
 Enteueo, according to Act of Congress, In tbo year 1S4^ by 
 D. APPLETON & CO., 
 In Iho Clerk's Office of tUo District Court of the United States for the Southern 
 
 Di. trict of New York. 
 
 
 ^. ^, 
 
 y 
 
 t ' / 
 
 
 
 C>l 
 
 \ 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 The plan and object of the present volume are so fully 
 and so satisfactorily stated by Mr. Arnold in his Preface, 
 that it is quite superfluous for the American Editor to add 
 any thing to what he has there said. It is simply incum- 
 bent on him to state, that he has bestowed much care and 
 attention upon the volume in order to perfect its arrans^.e- 
 ment and render it uniform with the other works of the 
 series, and also to ensure, as far as possible, correctness, 
 neatness, and even elegance of typography. While he can 
 hardly dare to promise himself that there is an entire 
 absence of errors of this kind, he ventures to express the 
 hope that nothing of consequence has escaped attention, and 
 that the Practical Introduction to Greek Prose Composition 
 will be found equally acceptable and equally valuable with 
 , any of its predecessors in the Arnold Series of Classical 
 Books for Schools and Colleges. 
 
 J. A. S. 
 New York, Nov. 20th, 1846. 
 
 390036 
 
 M 
 
z.^mimmmmtmmit0mmmstmm 
 
 \ 
 
 <^i^-iC^. / <S^ 'y 
 
 
 
 'O. / 
 
 
 ? 
 
 / 
 
 y 
 
 y ^ 
 
 J <- 
 
 ^^^> 
 
 
 I 
 
 rHEFACE 
 
 TO THR 
 
 ENGLISH EDITION. 
 
 The plan of this Introduction requires some ex- 
 planation. Its object is to enable the student, as soon 
 as he can decUne and conjugate with tolerable facility, 
 to translate simple sentences after given examples and 
 with given words ; the principles trusted to being those 
 of imitation and very frequent repetition. It is at 
 once a Syntax, a Vocabulary, and an Exercise-book ; 
 the Syntax being in substance that of Duttmann's ex- 
 cellent School Grammar. 
 
 One object I have steadily kept in view, that of 
 making the general construction of sentences of more 
 importance than the mere government of cases ^ which 
 is nearly all that most Exercise-books pretend to teach. 
 The Exercises are adapted for viva voce practice ; but 
 if the book is so used, they should by all means be 
 written down afterwards. The Vocabularies, if possi- 
 ble, but at all events the Examples, should be com- 
 mitted to memory and carefully kept up. 
 
 It is due to Mr. Ollendorff, whose Introduction to 
 German has appeared in English, to state that the pub- 
 lication of a work like the present was suggested to me 
 
VUl 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 by the advantage I myself derived from the use of his 
 book. I had originally drawn it up exactly on his 
 plan ; but the probable expense of publication deterred 
 me, for some time, from publishing it in that shape.* 
 The present work differs therefore from his, in requir- 
 ing from the pupil a general acquaintance with the 
 Accidence. 
 
 For the convenience of those who may wish to use 
 the Syntax as such, I have added a complete set of 
 Questions to the work. 
 
 T. K. A. 
 Lyndon, 1841. 
 
 • The very great success of this work, and the similar one on 
 " Latin Prose Composition!' — which are now used at all, or nearly all, 
 our public schools, — has encouraged the author to send to press the 
 more elementary Exercises here alluded to, under the title of a " Prac- 
 tical Introduction to Greek Accidence.** [This volume forms the 
 " First Greek Lessons," carefully revised and improved by the Ameri- 
 Editor.] 
 
 4 
 
 > 
 
 ' 
 
 '• 
 
 J^ .C. ' u^i^^o 
 
 
 ^ '' ^d ( / 
 
 / 
 
 ■/ 
 
 ' /^/r^<^ >n3^ 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 •BCTIOJV PAfll 
 
 1. On the Tenses- The Article . 11 
 
 2. The Article continued . 13 
 
 3. The Article continued 16 
 
 4. The Article continued 18 
 
 5. The Article continued 20 
 
 6. The Article continued 22 
 
 7. The Article as demonstrative Pronoun — Pronouns , . .24 
 
 8. Pronouns continued 27 
 
 9. Pronouns continued . , 29 
 
 10. Of the Neuter Adjective 31 
 
 11. Subject and Predicate [Words with which the copula is often 
 
 omitted], 33 
 
 12. On the Moods • . . 36 
 
 13. The Moods continued [s*, av, Ac] 38 
 
 14. The Moods continued ,,,..... 40 
 
 15. The Moods continued 43 
 
 16. The Moods continued 46 
 
 17. The Moods continued .47 
 
 19. The Moods continued 49 
 
 19. ov and ^i\ 50 
 
 20. Verbals in rioi 53 
 
 21. Double Accusative ; 55 
 
 22. The Accusative after Passive and Neuter Verbs ... 67 
 
 23. The Accusative continued 60 
 
 24. The Genitive • . 63 
 
 25. The Genitive continued 65 
 
 2G. The Genitive continued [Voc. of Verbs governing the gtn\ . 69 
 
 27. The Genitive continued [Voc. of Verbs governing the ^«n.] . 71 
 
 28. The Genitive continued 73 
 
 29. Comparison 75 
 
 30. Comparison continued 78 
 
 31. The Dative [Voc. of Verbs governing the c/o/.] ... 80 
 
 32. The Middle Voice [Voc. of mtrfrf/tfVerbsl .... 84 
 
 33. Middle Voice contmued [Voc. of njtcW/e Verbs] . . .87 
 
 34. On the Perfect 2. [Voc. of second Per/edd .... 89 
 
 35. Additional Remarks on some of the Moods and Tenses . . 91 
 
 36. On the Infinitive , .94 
 
 37 The Infinitive continued [Voc. of •£*] '97 
 
 38 The Infinitive continued 101 
 
 39. The Participle [Voc. on the use of some Participles'] . . . 103 
 10. The Participle coritinued [Voc. of Verbs that take the Pmtidplt] 135 
 
t 
 
 Z CONTENTS. 
 
 41. The Participle continued : Tvyxovfi>} Xavddvojf <j>6avo) [Voc. on *Air4 
 
 andn(D<5], IW 
 
 42 The Genitive Absolute, &c. [Voc. of Words used in Nam, Absol.] 110 
 
 43. The Relative [Voc. on 'Ev, 'Avd, Eij] 113 
 
 44. The Relative continued [Voc. on Ata.] • .... 117 
 
 45. b olos av dvfip [Voc. on Kara] .«••..«• 120 
 
 46. orJiij offris ov .... 123 
 
 i7' oioSfdita, neWco [Voc. on* Afiipifllepi] , . . • , ,125 
 
 48. ojTcjj, oinfi [Voc. on 'Eni] • . • • ^ t • 128 
 
 49. i^a, nn oq"Voc. on McraJ 130 
 
 50. /ij? with Relatives, Infin., Ac. [Voc. on Ilapa ] . . . 133 
 
 51. Some Adverbs of Time, &c 136 
 
 52. On interrogative Sentences [Voc. on ITprfj] . , . .139 
 53 Indirect Single Questions [Voc. on *Y7r<5] 143 
 
 54. Double Questions .... ^^ ... . 145 
 
 55. Observations on d, lav , . , . . ,> . , .146 
 
 56. Condensed Questions - t •..••.. 148 
 
 57. Various Constructions 150 
 
 58. Various constructions continued ..*... 152 
 69. List of Particles, &c 154 
 
 tTables of Prepositions in Composition] .... 168 
 ►le of Differences of Idiom 169 
 
 Questions on the Syntax 181 
 
 Index I. (English) 197 
 
 Index II. (Greek Phrases explained) 231 
 
 Index III. (Irregular Nouns and Verbs) 235 
 
 EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS, &c. 
 
 B., K., M., R., T., denote respectively the Greek Grammars ol Butt' 
 mann, Kuhnery MatthiH, Rostj and Thiersch. Kr. stands for Kriiger. 
 
 E. refers to the Eton Greek Grammar. 
 
 R., after a declinable word, stands for root. Thus, ydvr, R. ydi^ar, 
 means, that the regular terminations are to be added to y^far. 
 
 V. refers to Vomel's Synonymisches Wdrterbuch. 
 
 A Greek letter added after a verb, shows that the timpler root (a« H 
 appearii, for ioBtancc, in Mr. 2 ) ends in that letter. 
 
 t 
 
 A 
 
 PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION 
 
 /^ 
 
 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION. 
 
 n 
 
 Gu^-^K 
 
 ^ 1. On the Tenses. — The Article. 
 
 1. It is taken for granted that the student knows: — 
 
 (1) That the verb agrees with its nominative case in number 
 and person.* 
 
 (2) That every adjective word— whether adjective, participle, pro- 
 noun, or article — must agree with its substantive in gender, num- 
 ber, and case. 
 
 (3) That the transitive verb is followed by the accusative. 
 
 (4) That one substantive depending upon another is put in thf 
 genitive case. 
 
 (5) That any verb may have the same case after it as before it, 
 when both words refer to the same person or thing. 
 
 2. The Imperfect, besides the usual meaning of 
 that tense,t is used to express continued or rejieated 
 actions^ taking place in past time. 
 
 3. The Aorists express actions completed in past 
 time.t 
 
 • But a dunl nominative is often joined with a plural verb ; and a 
 neuter plural generally takes a singular verb. 
 
 t The Imperfect expresses 1) an action continuing during another 
 «ction which is past ; 2) an action continued by being frequently re- 
 peated ; and (occasionally) 3) an action begun or intended, but not 
 completed, (See Self's Greek Gram. Vol. II. p. 53.) — Am. Ed. 
 
 I The Aorists mark actions simply past, without reference to other 
 actions, at the same or a different time ; as eypaipa rhv im<TTo\nv, ** I 
 wrote the letter (without specifying time or circumstance). Hence, the 
 aorists referring to time past indefinitely , are used to denote momentary 
 acts, and also actions repeatedly done in past time. In this latter case 
 it may be rendered by the present or by the phrase " to be wont, or ac- 
 tuBtomed," Sec (See Jelfa Greek Gram. Vol. II. p. 57 )— Am. En. 
 
12 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 15 
 
 Hence the Aorist is used of momenlary and siugle act.ons ) th« 
 Imperfect, of continued and repeated ones. 
 The dog bit him (aor.) : the dog howled all night {imperf.) 
 Obs. The Imperfect (of habitual actions) is often rendered by 
 X * used to,' &c. 
 
 4. The Perfect expresses actions continued or re- 
 maining in their effects up to the present time. 
 
 a) Ilence the aor. is nearly our perfect indefinite 
 (the perf. formed by inflection) : the j^erf. our j^^rfect 
 definite (or perfect with ^have^). 
 
 h) But when the connection of the past with the 
 present is obvious from the context, the aorist may be 
 used for the perfect ; or, in a narrative, for the pluper- 
 fect. 
 
 c) It is only when a particular stress is to be laid on 
 the time of the occurrence, that the perfect or phiperf. 
 must be used. All this is, hcv/cver, greatly influenced 
 by euphony. 
 
 5. A governed genitive is often placed between an 
 article and its noun. 
 
 6. TO iTig ccQiitJjg -AalXogj the beauty of virtue. 
 
 6 T« 77;g noXecog nQuy^cnci ttqui tojVj he who trans- 
 acts {or manages) the affairs of the state. 
 
 In this way two and even three articles stand together. 
 
 7. TiQarrmy {the person doing =) he who does. 
 
 Hence the artic. with a participle is equivalent to a personal oi 
 demonstrative pronoun with a relative sentence. 
 
 Thus, 
 
 h npaTTov, equivalent to UeTvos 5j iroiTTci, he ttho docs. 
 ToU irpaTTovToSf of him who does. 
 &c. 
 
 PI. ol npaTTovTss^ equivalent to ckeivoi oi jrp.irroucri, those who do. 
 
 Tuv rrpoTTdvTioVj of those wIlO do 
 
 &c. 
 
 8. Vocabulary 1 
 Virtue, 
 Beauty, 
 City, 
 Thing or affair. 
 
 auXlogf £04,', to. 
 Tzohgf sojgy »/. 
 TTQuy^Kty'^ uzog^ to. 
 
 To do, transact, manage, 
 Wonder, or am surprised 
 
 at, admire. 
 Well, 
 111, 
 
 Often, frequently. 
 Citizen, 
 Judge, 
 
 fTQaTTtO, 
 
 &avfid^<x) (with fut, mid^ 
 but aor. 1 act,). 
 
 1 
 
 itaxmg. 
 TToXXdaig. 
 TioXiTrjg,^ ov, 6. 
 XQiTtjg, oVf 6, 
 
 irpnrro), do, has also the intransit. meaning of our to be doing weJ\ 
 or ill : i. e. to be prosperous or unfortunate. In this sense it has 
 the perf. 2. rtinpaya. The a is long throughout. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 9. I admire the beauty of the city. The citizens are 
 doing well. I have often admired the beauty of the 
 cities. The judge often admired the beauty of virtue. 
 I admire those who transact (7) the affairs of the state. 
 He transacts the affairs of the state ill. The citizens 
 are doing ill. I have often admired the virtue of thr 
 citizen. The citizens admire the virtue of the judge. 
 
 • Nouns in n<i from verbs, generally denote the thing produced by ths 
 net They may be compared with the pass. pSrticipIe (rd vcvpayuctoy^ 
 
 ^ 2. The Article continued. 
 
 10. (a) Proper names often take the article, if they 
 are the names of persons well known. 
 
 Hence the names of Deities, Heroes, &c., generally take the arti- 
 cle ; and the names of persons recently mentioned. 
 
 11. {b) But if the proper name is followed by a de- 
 scription which has the article, the proper name is 
 v/ithout the article, unless it is to be expressed em- 
 
 * Nouns in -??? of the first dccl. from verbs, denote the male doer oj 
 the action : those from substantives denote a person standing in any 
 mar relation to what is denoted by the substantive : as noMTris from 
 M\t(. Those in irrii from svbst., have the i long. KpTrfjs is from koIpo 
 
14 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 u 
 
 ^1 
 
 yhatically, as being well-known^ or as having been 
 previouslj/ mentioned^ 
 
 12. (c) The Greek has no indefinite article (our *a ). 
 {d) Our *a' should be translated by t«V, when a 
 
 particular person or thing is meant, though not 
 named : in other words, wherever we might substitute 
 ' a certain ' for • a '. 
 
 13. (e) The subject^' generally has the article, the 
 predicate not. 
 
 14. (a) 6 2:(oxQ(iTTjg, Socrates; aVAOJivai, Athens, 
 
 (b) 2:(axQUTrig 6 (filoaoqjog, Socrates the Philoso- 
 
 pher, 
 
 (c) Innog hexs Xaycov, a mare brought forth a 
 
 hare, 
 
 (d) yvvri jig oqhv uxiv, a icoman (or, a certain 
 
 woman) had a hen. 
 
 (e) ri xoQTj iytvBTo dirxog/ the girl became (or, teas 
 
 turned into) a leather bottle, 
 
 15. Vocabulary 2. 
 
 Socrates, 
 Athens, 
 Philosopher, 
 Horse, mare. 
 
 Hare, 
 
 Woman, 
 
 Hen, 
 
 Water, 
 
 2!<0'AndTfjg/ otv, 6, 
 u4\>7^vatj coy, at, 
 qiloaoqogy oi*, 6. 
 iTtnogy ovy et tj. 
 
 SXuyoog, w, 6 {ace, XaycHv or 
 
 yvvrj, yvvai'Aog, 7) [voc. yvtai), 
 oQt'tg^f oQnOog, 6 et 1), 
 vd(on^ vduTog, to. 
 
 • Kr. who quotes Bacch. 1314: viv U Sdficjy iniios iKpcpXfiaojtai I h 
 
 * That is, the nmninative before the verb. The predicate is what ii 
 affirmed or said of the subject. (See note •). 
 
 • Or, dtTKdi iycvero h Kopr,. So, Ocog rj > o ASyoi, the Word was God. 
 This arises from the nature of a proposition. We usually assert of a 
 particular thing that it is included, as an individual, in a particular 
 class ; not that it is the whole of that class. 
 
 * S'..»fOur»jj, G. ovi, D. ct, &C. A. Eaj<rpJr»> (Plato), ^^Kpirnv (Xcno- 
 phon), V. Ho'xrprtrcf. 
 
 f • Bird; but in Att generally cock, hen ; just a? we use Jowl G. 
 ipvWoi, &c. A. a and v. Flur. reg., but also ooveti, G. ipvtuiv, D. op^i 
 t<(f) 0.1I), Ace. opvui fJ^vU). 
 
 Wine, 
 
 Boy, son. 
 
 To have, 
 
 To bring fortii, or (of birds) 
 
 to lay, 
 Damsel, maiden, 
 Leather-bottle, 
 Become, 
 An Qg^, 
 Three, 
 
 olvogy^' oVf 6. 
 naig, naidog, 0. 
 
 1 1X7(0^ {t6x). 
 
 daxogj or, 0. 
 yiyvofiai^ (jev), 
 
 WOVf OVf TO. 
 
 tgeig, ZQelg, rgta. 
 
 Exercise 2, 
 
 16. I admire the beauty of the hen. A (14. {d) boy 
 had a hare. The water was turned into (= became) wine 
 (14. (e). The hen laid three eggs. A certain damsel 
 had three hens. I admire the virtue of the maiden. 
 The hare was turned into (= became) a horse. The 
 boy admires the beauty of Athens. The citizens ad- 
 mire the beauty of the woman. I admire those who 
 transact^* the affairs of Athens. I have often admired 
 the virtue of Socrates. I admire Socrates the philoso- 
 pher. The woman shall have a hen. The water has 
 been turned into ( = become) wine. A certain judge 
 has three hens. 
 
 ^ o7vos, with the digamma FoTvoi^ mmim. So (!^6v.f djFuv, ovum. 
 
 t;^<.), f^o) and (r;^/|o-tj, £<r;^f If a, Impcrf. £?;^oi/ : aor. tax"*'* ^"X^^'^*' 
 [«<^Xo»'» <^X^s {^X^ *^ compounds), cxoirjv, ^x^* <^X^^''* '^X^*']- 
 tUtu), (ri^oj) Te^Ojiai, tctoko, ercKov, iTeKdjirji'. 
 
 yiyvouatf ycviiaonatf yeytvrjfiai and yiyova, iycvo^trtv. All inirans. foi 
 «m born ; become, iycvd^nv and ytyova also serve for preterites of the 
 verb " to be.'* When yiyova may be construed ' / am; it means, • / am 
 by birth; * have become.* (B.) — yeivofiat^ am born, poet.: aor. iycivdiiriv 
 begot, bore (in prose as well as poetry). 
 
 • Numerals like this at the top of the line refer to the Table (f DH 
 ferences of Idiom at the close of tlie volume. 
 
16 
 
 THE ARTICLB. 
 
 THE ARTICLS. 
 
 17 
 
 I 
 
 
 ^ 3. Article continued. 
 
 17. (a) When the my, thy, hh, their, 6cc. are em 
 phatic they are to be translated by possessive prononns 
 with the article. 
 
 18. (i) Aly, your, his, &c. are to be translated by 
 the article, when it is quite obvious ichose the thing in 
 question is. 
 
 Whenever there is any opposition (as, when nine is opposed to 
 yours or any other person's) the pronouns must be used. 
 
 19. (c) When an adj. without the article stands be- 
 fore the article of the substantive, the thing spoken of 
 IS not distinguished from any thing else, but from 
 itself under other circumstances."' 
 
 {d) When a noun which has just preceded, is to be 
 
 repeated again, the article belonging to it stands alone. 
 
 19*. (a) 6 cTOtf dovXog, thy or your slave (emphatic 
 
 and precise) ; but cog dovXog, a slave of 
 
 yours (indefinite). 
 
 (6) aXyoJ rtjv xfqr«;iij»- (I am pained as to the 
 
 head= ) / have a pain in my head. 
 (c) jfdeto im nlovaiotg zoTg noXiTiagy he rejoiced 
 (or was glad), when the citizens were 
 ivealthy, (or, 07i account of, the citizeJii 
 who icere icealthy). 
 yl) 6 ffiog nair^Q xaJ 6 tov qllov^ my fathei and 
 my friends, (literally, my father and 
 * ' the of my friend). 
 
 20. Vocabulary 3. 
 
 Slave, ^ovXogi or, 6. 
 
 To feel or suffer pain : to ^ ,, / 
 
 be pained at, 
 Head, 
 
 s 
 
 xfqpaT.//, rig^ fj. 
 
 ■ Thus in the example following it ia not, ' rich citizens,' as op 
 posed to other citizens ; but * he rejoice 1 in their being rich ; or in tht 
 toealth of . . * Slc. 
 
 To rcjoice, be glad, or to ^donai (with dative). 
 take pleasure in, 
 
 Wealthy, rich, 
 
 Father, 
 
 Friend, 
 
 Thine, thy. 
 
 Mine, my, 
 
 Jaw, 
 
 Tooth, 
 
 Ear, 
 
 Foot, 
 
 Hand, 
 
 Knee, 
 Brothei, 
 Daughter, 
 Mother, 
 Wi^e, cleve 
 Happy, 
 To love. 
 To be vex 
 
 Beautiful, 
 Bad, 
 
 nXovaiogy^ a, ov. 
 TiatTJQ," sQog {Qog)f o. 
 qiXogy ov, o. 
 
 GOg, GTl, GOV. 
 
 ifiog, ?}, ov. 
 yvdOog, ov, rj. 
 odovg, ovtog, o. 
 ovg, mzog, to. 
 novg, Txodog, 6. 
 
 G. D. dual and D. plur.) 
 yovVf yovaTog, to (R. yovat), 
 udeXqjog, ov, 6. 
 OvydtriQ,'' egog ((?o?), ^. 
 iJirittjQ,'* egog {gog), rj. 
 cocpog, jj, ov. 
 evdatfiojv, (OV, ov, 
 
 dx^oiiai, taoiiai, i]xOs<s&fiv 
 
 {dative). 
 naXog, ri, ov. 
 ncLmg, jj, ov. 
 
 Obs. 1. ^iteOai and Slx^eaOat are more commonly followed by thi 
 dat.f (without a prepos.) except in the construction explained in 19. c 
 
 Obs. 2. 'TVio/,' when it stands for a subst. before expressed, is tc 
 be translated by the article. (See 19*. d.) - 
 
 Exercise 3. -^ 
 
 21. The mother of the beautiful daughter has a pain 
 in her jaws. I am glad that my brothers are happy .« 
 
 • Adjectives in to? denote what helongs to, concerns, or comes froif- 
 what the root expresses. They are formed from substantives, and some- 
 times from other adjectives in a. When the root ends in r it is some- 
 times changed into o : TrXoSroj, wealth, iT\ovaios. j t-» ■ a 
 
 • Ilarfip, fiVTiip, evyirrip, yaarfip, throw away e in G. and D. sing, and 
 D. pi. Tliey have V. cp, and insert d before at in D. pi. 
 
 P 'AxQofiat, and in the poets ^%a«, are also followed by the ace., 
 specially rf neut. pronouna. 
 
IS 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 1<I 
 
 I 
 
 The father rejoiced in his son's being wise (c). Mj 
 friend and my brother's (d). I often have a pain in my 
 foot. My mother was suffering from a pain in hei 
 hands (6). I am vexed that the bad are weahhy (c). 
 The daughter loves her mother. My slave loves my 
 brother's. I admire your virtue and that of your 
 friend. The beautiful damsel shall be turned into a 
 horse. I am pleased with those who transact^ the 
 affairs of the state. He was vexed that the citizens 
 were rich. I take pleasure in my daughter's being 
 beautiful (c). 
 
 § 4. Article continued, 
 
 22. a) The Greeks often place the genitives between 
 
 the noun governing and the article ; or they 
 repeat the article after the noun. 
 b) A noun or participle is often understood, so 
 that the article stands alone. 
 
 23. a) ri 70V noiTjTov <Toqp/a,'' or ij aoq:ia ^ tov noirjTou, 
 
 the wisdom (cleverness 6cc.) of the poet, fj 
 nalrj xsqaXTjj or rj aecpaXrj ij yiaXtj^ trjg xoQt^g, 
 the beautiful head of the maiden. 
 b) ^AXb%avbQog 6 QitXinnovy Jilexander the son of 
 Philip (vioi,%50w, understood). 6 I^coq^Qoriaxov, 
 the son of Sophroniscus. elg ztjv flhlinnov, 
 into Philiji^s country (xa)(>«i', country un- 
 derstood). TO. ttjg 7t6lE(ogy the affairs of the 
 state [nQaynara understood), ta fftd, my 
 affairs, my property, oi iv aorsi, the people 
 in the city, those in the city, oi ovv to) 
 ^aailsTy those with the king. 
 
 ^ Substantives in i'.i are derived from adj., and express the abstract 
 notion of the adj. — The other positions of the gen. are frequently mot 
 
 with : ^Iriieirii t»> ipirayriv. (Herod. i. 3.) h dvaxt^pnats rwi» 'AOrjvaiojk. 
 jThuc. i. 12.) For a partitive gen. these are the only correct positions. 
 ' The lr.*.ter poa'tirn gives emphasis to ih-^ adjective or dependent 
 genitive. 
 
 noiritiig^ ov, c 
 GoqiUf ag, i), 
 'AXt^atbqogj ov, o, 
 fbiXmnog, or, 6. 
 2!G}q)Qoriaxog^ ot\ 6, 
 viog, oVf 6. 
 Xoj^a, ag, fj. 
 ijfiSTtQog, a, ov. 
 viiitEQog, «, ov. 
 
 24. Vocabulary 4. 
 
 Poet, 
 
 Wisdom, cleverness, 
 Alexander, 
 Philip, 
 
 Sophroniscus, 
 Son, 
 
 Country, 
 Our, 
 Your, 
 
 March an army (when ,, , 
 spoken of its general), ^^«^''^-' 
 
 March (of the army, and » / -.u 
 
 of a person undertaking roeeyo^«t(withaor i ^^ass., 
 an expedition) also jou?- *^* J"'"' ""Scunst a per. 
 ney, set out, <fcc., ^^"^* 
 
 Persian, IliQarig, ov, 6, 
 
 Scythian, ^xv^/y?, ov, 6, 
 
 Cyrus, KvQog, ov, 6, 
 
 King, ^aoiXevg, tag, 6, 
 
 Madness, fiavia^' ag, ?}. 
 
 People, d'fjfiog, ov, 6. 
 
 Army, nTQarevna,'' atog, to. 
 
 Geometer, yemfisTQTjg, ov, 6, 
 
 With, avv {dative). 
 
 City, town, aarv,^ eog, to, 
 
 ( 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 25. I admire the wisdom of the geometer. The peo- 
 
 • IXavvdf iXdao) (a), eXftXcuca, eXfiXafiat, jjXoO/jv. Att. fut. tXw, as, 5, &C., 
 mfin. iXav. It is trans, {drive, urge on), but used as intrans. (march, 
 ride), by omission of ace. 
 
 • This word wm formed from an adj. fiav6i, mad, which is quoted 
 by Suldas. 
 
 • arparSs, ffrpart'i, army ,' oTparcia, expedition. arpATtvua has both 
 meanings ; the latter often in Herodotus. 
 
 ' aarv never means the Btate, as rSXts does. It is often used of an 
 old or sacred part of a n6Xii, m Londoners speak of * the City/ as a part 
 of London. 
 
 I! 
 
If 
 
 lilii! 
 
 2& 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 \ 
 
 nil 
 
 pie in the city admire the beautiful mother of the dam 
 sel. The people iu the city admire the very beautifu. 
 daughter of the very beautiful mother. The king 
 marches into the country of the Scythians. The army 
 of the Persians marches into the country of the Scythi- 
 ans. Cyrus marches against the king of the Persians. 
 ^""^The son of Sophroniscus is astonished at the madness 
 of the people. The poet admires those who manage^ 
 the affairs of the state. I rejoice in the king's being 
 wealthy.* I am vexed when the bad are wealthy. The 
 people in the city {d) admire the son of Philip. The 
 king has the toothache (i. e. suffers pain in his teeth*). 
 The clever geometer has a pain in his knees. A certain 
 poet had a very beautiful horse. Those with the king 
 will march against the son of Philip, 
 
 § 5. Article continued, 
 
 26. An adverb with the Article is equivalent to an 
 adjective. 
 
 27. 01 TTaXatf" ihe long ago men =the men of old. 
 
 6 fxEta^v XQovoi, the between time = the intermediate 
 time. 
 
 ij avQiovy adv. {r^fitQu, day^ understood), the morroWt 
 ihe next day. 
 
 28. Vocabulary 5. 
 
 » 
 
 Long ago. 
 
 ndXai. 
 
 Man, 
 
 dvOQOinog ov, 6 (~Ao//to). 
 
 Between, 
 
 fisza^v. 
 
 To-morrow, 
 
 avQiov {adv.) 
 
 Time, 
 
 XQovog, ov, 0. 
 
 Near, 
 
 ntXag: nlriaiof. 
 
 One's neighbour, 
 
 6 nXtiGiov. 
 
 Then, 
 
 jofs. 
 
 NoWj 
 
 Here, 
 
 There, 
 
 Up, upwards. 
 
 Down, downwards, 
 
 Move, 
 
 Crocodile, 
 
 Both, 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 fVV. 
 
 iv^dde. 
 exei. 
 dv<o.* 
 ndzoi. 
 
 91 
 
 Life, 
 This, 
 
 mvtat. 
 
 i<Qox68eiXo^'t ovj 6. 
 
 dfiq)(o: dficpoTfQog: (the lat- 
 ter often in the plur.: 
 dfiqiOTenn ra (wra, hotJihis 
 ears. Xen.) 
 
 ^[Ogy OVy 6. 
 
 oJxoff, avttji xovTOy Ccc. 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 
 ft^In doing the exercise, consider which of the adverbs cornea 
 tuarest to the meaning of the adjective or equivalent phrase. 
 
 29. The men of old did this. They did this the next 
 day (dat.) The crocodile moves its upper i^^w. Tlie 
 son of Sophroniscus has a pain* in both his ears. 1 am 
 surprised at the madness of the Persians of old times. 
 I wonder at the men of the present day.^ I admire ihe 
 wise men of old. Tliey love the present life. We won- 
 der at the madness of our neighbours. The people there' 
 are astonished at the madness of those with the king. 
 I am astonished at the cleverness of those who manage 
 my affairs. 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 
 30. He had a pain (imperf) in both his knees. The 
 people here admire the son of Sophroniscns. The cro- 
 codile was turned into a hare (14. e). The people here 
 
 So in English, ' the then Mayor.' 
 
 ■ Of countries, ivu, is used of marching into the interior; xuro), of 
 marching down to the coast. 
 
 f The now men. 
 
 ■ Veople = persons must not be translated by ini^oi The pcop'^ 
 
 there, ol Uei. 
 
22 
 
 THE 4RTICLE. 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 U3 
 
 I 
 
 H 
 
 admire my daughter and my brother's. The peob.e 
 there are doing well. I have often wondered at the wis- 
 dom of our present geometers. The crocodile lays eggs 
 1 he king of the Scythians has a pain in- his /o Jerjaw 
 
 $ 6. Article continued. 
 
 31. a) To express that a person 'has a very beau- 
 
 tiful head,' tlie Greeks said : ' lias the head 
 very beaut if uU» 
 
 32. b) th xalop, is: Uhc beautiful,'^ Hhe honorable; 
 
 m the abstract; beauty, ra aaXd, are: 
 beautiful (or honorable) things; whatever 
 things are beautiful; what is beautiful, 
 or simply, beautiful things. 
 
 pre* »ubj.\s used in exhortations; and from ^34* d thit J \» 
 used with it for 'not* (See 107*. 1.) ^ " ^' ^' '"' '* 
 
 33. d) The infinitive with the article becomes a 
 
 substantive declinable throughout, and an- 
 swenng to the English ' participial sub^ 
 stantive in — ing. 
 
 34. e) Abstract nouns, and the names of materials 
 
 generally take the article. When a whole 
 class, or any individual of that class, is 
 meant, the noun, whether singular or plural 
 takes the article. 
 34*. a) 6 QipoxsQojg 7^1' doQuv laxvQotdTr^v txsi, the rhi- 
 noceros has a very strong hide. 
 b) (psvytofievTa aiayQci ' 8i(6x(ouep la xaXd, let us -fly 
 
 ' T^he article must not be used, unless it is assumed that the thina 
 m question has the property, the object being only to describe of S 
 Zt wJf; 1 ^^'^'' """'"' "^''^''^ ^" '■">'"'« "« ^hat the rhinoceros Aa./ a 
 K;«f K '^"Jr^?'"^'''""''^ ^«*'^« ^°"^J ^ot use the article 
 Thus of the crocodile: I^u 6i .al o..^a, .aprcpov,^ it also has 8tro„| 
 
 * Thus in English, " Burke on the Sublime and Beautiful.** 
 
 from what is base; let 21s pursue what is 
 honorable. 
 
 c) fitj dioixatfiev 7 a aloxQu, let us not pursue what 
 
 is base. 
 
 d) JoraxvlaXHv,\di\km^fast; zovzaxv XahiVyOj 
 
 talking fast, <fec. ; z6 ndviag xaxmg Ityetp, 
 ^ the speaking ill of every body, 
 
 e) 1} o^fTjf, virtiie; 6 XQv<y6^\ gold ; ol dyaOoi] the 
 
 good ; oi dsTOij eagles. 
 f) to TiUvTuTov^at last; ib utto loldtj^ henceforth. 
 
 35. Vocabulary 6. 
 
 Rhinoceros, 
 Nose, 
 
 Horn, 
 
 Hide, 
 
 Strong, 
 
 To fly from, 
 
 Base, disgraceful, 
 
 To pursue, 
 Fast, quick, 
 
 Talk, 
 
 Speak, say. 
 
 Speak ill of. 
 
 Speak well of, 
 
 Treat ill, behave ill to, 
 
 Treat well, do kind oflices 
 
 to, confer benefits on, 
 Elephant, 
 Stag, 
 Gold, 
 
 QlVOXtQCOgj (OTO^'y 6. 
 
 (WV, Qivog, ?j {plur. '-nos- 
 
 ^trils"). 
 xi-Qag, arog (aogy (og), to. 
 doQic,^ dgj 1). 
 ioyvQogy «, or. 
 qievyco. 
 aiaxQog, «, 6p : aiaxioiv. ata- 
 
 XKyrog. 
 
 raxvg, the, v (iicut. adj. — 
 adv.) f. 
 
 Xtyoo. 
 
 xax^g Xtytip [ace.) 
 tl Xtyeip [ace.) 
 xaxojg 7T0IHP [acc.) 
 
 ev TioiHP [ace.) 
 
 f Atgpaj?, aPTog, 6. 
 Aagpotf, 01;, 6. 
 
 X(»i?(T0V, 01', 6. 
 
 * Literally, * <Ae /rom this* (lime). 
 
 * Nouns in a and n, from verbal roots, are generally oxytone ITie 
 abstract notion predominates in them (B.) ; the vowel of the roct is 
 olien changed into «, as in perf 2, (mid.) fi.oio. flay; S^pa. 
 
 * The fui^id. is the more common in Attic Greek. 
 
 i 
 
H;'r 
 
 24 
 
 Good, 
 Ragle, 
 
 Pt^^'ouNs. 
 
 rog. 
 asiog, oVf 6, 
 
 iiuiKtiv 18 also, to prosecute; tpnytiv, to he prosecuted: iiuxtiv r(^i 
 jjtfi/ov, to pro$ecute a man on a diarge oj murder; ipcvyety fh6vov (un- 
 derstand iUnv^ cause, trial), to be tried for murder 
 
 Exercise 7. 
 
 36. The elephant has a strong hide. The maiden 
 has very beautiful hands. The stag has very beautiful 
 hor.ns.'2 The Persian's boys pursue what is honorable, 
 Let us fly from those who pursue^ %chat is disgrace- 
 fill. Do not let us fly from what is honorable. Let us 
 avoid (^y/rom) talking fast. Let us fly from the mad- 
 ness of speaking ill of every body. Let us do kind 
 oflices to our friends. The citizens prosecute Philip 
 on a charge of murder.'' Sophroniscus was tried for 
 7nurder.'' Let us henceforth pursue the honorable. 
 Let us not treat our (18) slaves ill. He took pleasure 
 m domg kmd oflices to the good {Obs. 1. p. 17). The 
 Scythians admire the beauty of gold, l^he boy won- 
 ders at the horn of the rhinoceros. 
 
 ^ 7. Article as a demonstrative pronoun. Pronoun 
 
 37. a) ofispS dsy this^that ; the one— the other, 
 
 &c. oi fAiv — ol df, these — those ; some — 
 others. (More than one 6 de may follow.) 
 
 38. b) In a narrative 6 ds stands (once) in reference 
 
 //iv, indeed;— 6i, hut. Often, however, there is no considerable 
 opposition between words so connected, the useof^/iv being principally 
 tc prepare us for a coming 6c. It need not be translated, except when 
 the context plainly requires an indeed.— In translating from English 
 jitc Greek, whenever the second of two connected clauses has a but 
 -he First should have a nlv. 
 
 PEONOims. 
 
 20 
 
 to an object already named. So xaJ Zg, when the refer 
 once IS to a person. 
 
 39. d. 1) avTogis 'self when it stands in the nom. 
 
 without a substantive, or, in any case 
 vnth one. 
 
 2) aj^6g is him, her, it, &c. in an oblique 
 
 case witnout a substantive. 
 
 3) avtog is * the same J 
 
 4) avTog standing alone in an oblique case, 
 
 IS never ' self except when it is the 
 
 » -^^^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^^® sentence. 
 
 40. a) ta avza rovg pip Xvnu, tovg de Tsgnet, the 
 
 same things pain some persons, but de- 
 light others. 
 
 b) XvHog afipop idimxep ' 6 de etg poop icatecp^ys^t a 
 wolf was pursuing a lamb ; and (or but^) 
 It ^edfor refuge into a temple. 
 
 C) xat og i^aTTattj&eig dioixei dva xgdrog, and he, 
 being deceived, pursues at full speed (lit- 
 erally, ' at or with force or strength'). 
 
 d) avtog fcptj, he himself said (it), althg 6 dovlog, 
 or, dovXog avtog, the slave himself: 6 avtog 
 OovXog, the same slave. fiaXXop tovto qio^ov^ 
 ^pat jy top 'dupatop avtop, I fear this more 
 than death itself. Sdcoxsp avtoXg to nlo, 
 he gave them the fire, avthp yl,Q eldop, 
 for I saw the inan himself: eldop yao av- 
 T p, for I saw him. 
 
 4L Vocabulary 7> 
 
 Same, 
 
 Some — otkej;0j^ 
 To pain, annoy, 
 Delight, 
 
 oi pip — ol de. 
 Xvneoa. 
 
 teQTTOO. 
 
 • icaTa(i>eCY(o. (2. aor.) 
 
 •rh,!!»*^n^«r' ''"'^- *,"'.' **"* *^^ «"^' *°^ in Homer for. It is used 
 Zi^M f ^^" ^^'''''^^ ^ required, to avoid having a proposition in Jhe 
 middle of a discourse unconnected with what goef before It^ nftlT 
 therefore, omitted in translating into English ^°* 
 
 2 
 
f 
 
 h 
 
 If"' 
 
 hi 
 
 t 
 
 26 
 
 Wol^ 
 
 Lamb, 
 
 Fly for refuge, 
 
 Temple, 
 
 More — than, 
 
 To fear, 
 
 Death, 
 
 Fire, 
 
 Say, 
 
 Give, 
 
 Sheep, 
 
 Dog, 
 
 House, 
 Deceive, 
 
 At full speed. 
 Force, strength, 
 Ride, 
 
 K.ONOUin. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 21 
 
 XvHog, ov, i. 
 
 « f 
 
 For, 
 
 fC^ Can yap begin 
 {No.) 
 
 afifog, ov, c. 
 xataq)Svy(o. 
 faog,^ ov, 6. 
 ficiXXop — 5* 
 q)oBEOf£aiK 
 ^ayarog, or, o. 
 fiVQ, nvQog, to, 
 
 didoifil. 
 
 oi'g, olgJ 
 
 nvoov, Kvpog, 6 et rj (m. it 
 the sex is not to be spec- 
 ified. R. xvv, V. xvov). 
 
 ohog^ ov, 0. 
 
 anazdco, i^anardfa (the lat- 
 ter being stronger, to de- 
 ceive thoroughly), 
 
 ava xQcitog {at force). 
 
 ytgdrog, sog (ovg), to. 
 
 iknvvsir {to drive on, hnop 
 understood). 
 
 ydq. 
 
 the sentence? (AV) CunHI {No.) Can^l 
 
 Exercise 8. 
 
 42. A dog was pursuing a sheep, and it fied-for-re- 
 fuge into a house. Some admire the mother ; others the 
 daughter. Cyrus rides at full speed. I™ myself say it 
 I admire the mother more than the daughter herself 
 They will give him the gold. I will give the gold to 
 ;the man) himself (39. 4). I deceived the slave himself. 
 
 • vcojf, AZt. 
 
 * In act. frighten. It has /. mid. and pass. ; aor. pass. 
 
 » The forma in Attic Greek are ; S. o?j, oWj, olt, oiv,—D. o7t, oioj„. 
 
 P. oi€i, ojui', oiaif 9ias and o7j. (It is m. and /. 
 "■ The nora. of the personal pron. is not to be expressed. 
 
 And they {AO c), being deceived, fly-for-refuge into a 
 temple. And he, riding at full speed, flies from those 
 who> are pursuing him.- The wolves fly at full speed 
 Let us pursue the wolves at full speed. The same do2s 
 are pursuing the hares. Let us pursue them- ourselves 
 Let us not deceive our neighbour. The Persians of 
 those cfay^" pursued honorable things.^^ Speak well 
 01 those who» have done you kind offices. »• 
 
 5 8. Pronouns continued, 
 
 takes the article; the pronoun standing before the arti- 
 cle, or after the noun. 
 
 44. nag in the sing.^ without the article (= kaarog), 
 
 45. a) ot;jo^ 6 dv{iq, or^ b dv^iQ oltog [not 6 oltog dvi^g] 
 
 this man. txehog 6 dv^g, or 6 dprig ixedog 
 that man, avrog o paaiUvg, or 6 ^aadsvg av- 
 tog, the king himself 
 h)na(ja nohg, every city; ndaa ^ nohg, the whole 
 ^ city, all the city, 
 
 c) aXXot others ; ol dXXoi, the others ; ot higoi, the 
 
 others (with a stronger opposition), the other 
 
 d) ri aXXtj xoiga, the rest of the country, 
 
 e) noXXoi, many; ot noXXoi, the many, the mul- 
 
 titude, most people, 
 
 46. Vocabulary 8. 
 
 Others, 
 The others, 
 
 aXXot, 
 ol dXXoi. 
 
 meam'^i'quUe oSviot."'"'" " '^^^'"^ ^^^"^^^ "^^^ '^' P™» 
 
 »ar',/«zIr^.K- "'; '"'"u *""^' ^V^ ^^^ ^^^'^^^^ ^^«n t^ere is reference tc 
 Varacular objects : when not, the usage is variable. 
 
38 
 
 'J 
 
 1. 1' 
 
 TBONOUNa. 
 
 The other party, 
 The rest of, 
 
 Many, much. 
 
 Great, 
 
 The many, the muhitude. 
 
 Most people, 
 
 Every, each. 
 
 04 SJSQOl 
 
 \ 
 
 6 aXXos (agreeing with ita 
 subst,) 
 
 noXvg,^ TioXXi^j TToXv, 
 l^iyag, ftsydXtjy fjuyiz, 
 
 ol TToXXoi, 
 
 nag (in the sing, without 
 the art.) 
 
 nag 6, or 6 nag (in the sing. 
 F\,ndrTeg: see note on 44.) 
 
 ovtog: ode, 
 
 ixelvog, rj, o, 
 
 avriQf dgog : ap^gtonog, or, 6. 
 
 re/ivojf'i (of a country to rav- 
 age or lay waste by cut- 
 ting down its trees, crops, 
 <kc.) 
 
 oi noXtfiioi (adj.) 
 
 Ob8. dvHp ' (rir), man as opposed to tcoman^ and used in a good 
 sense. ivOpunros {homo)^ man as a human being, opposed to other 
 animals ; and often used, like homo, when contempt is to be ex- 
 pressed. 
 
 The whole, all, 
 
 This, 
 That, 
 Man, 
 To cut, 
 
 The enemy. 
 
 Exercise 9. 
 
 r^-OBs. With 'Aw,' 'that,' the order is, 
 
 Pron. An. Noun, 
 
 (or,) Art. Noun, Pron. 
 
 47. The enemy laid waste the whole country. The 
 other party are laying waste the rest of the country. 
 My brother is pursuing the same Persians. I admire this 
 city. I often admired that city. The many do not (ov) 
 admire the beauty of wisdom. The king himself is lay- 
 ing waste the rest of the country. A certain man wa> 
 pursuing his slave ; but he fled for refuge into the upper' ' 
 
 f TiiXtif, ffoXXij, iroH, 
 
 iroXXoS, jroAXijf, iroXXov, &.C. 
 i T(fiv<i)^ Ttuw, TCTpiKa, Ircfiovf iruifiriv. (Rootfl : rtu, ru«.) 
 
 « See Jelpa Greek Gram., Vol. I. p. 81, 97. 
 
 PRONOXrNS. 
 
 29 
 
 City. The others were turned into eagles. I will give 
 the whole egg to my brother. He gave all the water to 
 his (18) horses. I feel pain* in every part of my head 
 {in my whole head). Most people rejoice when* their 
 friends are wealthy. The other party manage the 
 affairs of the city. 
 
 § 9. Pronouns continued. 
 
 ^ 48. a) In the reflexive pronouns {inaviov, &c.)- the 
 avtog IS not emphatic. To express 'self emphatkallv, 
 avtog must precede the pronoun, avtov ci, <fec. 
 
 49. b) ' Own' is translated by the gen. of the wflex- 
 ive pronoun (iarror). ^^TiV by the ^ew. of «^toV. (So 
 ^ their* hy gen, plur,) 
 
 60. c) «at;rotJ is often used (like sui) in a dependent 
 sentence, or m a clause having ace. and injin,, for the 
 subject of the principal sentence.* 
 
 ^But the simple ^m, is often used, or l (oi, oj, &c. a^peU, cpas, 
 
 oi is never *imp/y reflexive in Attic prose, but is confined to 
 f^^feind of reflexive meaning. (B.)« The forms oi, I, occur in 
 J^lato, but not in the other great Attic prose-writers. (Kr.) 
 
 61. a) s&i^e (Tavrov, accustom yourself. 
 
 b) eqi)j ndvrag tovg at&Qmnovg taiavrmp ayanav, 
 he said that all men loved" their own things. 
 
 ' G. ijiavrov, iftavrfji, 
 
 A. eftavT6Vf ifinvrfiv. 
 
 « Of course only when it cannot be mistaken for the subject of the 
 infin. or dependent verb. 
 
 " 'This PMf *ge ^ misconstrued, and so made incorrect, by the Ens 
 Translator of Buttmann, p. 325. **' 
 
 7 It is an idiom of our language to use a past tense in a sentence 
 beginning with WW (and other dependent sentences), when the verb 
 on which they depend is m a past tense. The pres. infin. must be used 
 »n (,reek whenever the action to be expressed by it did not precede the 
 nme spoken of 
 
 I 
 
I ii 
 
 
 aO PRONOUNS. 
 
 c) vofiil^si rovg noXliag vtitiqeteXv iavr^fhc thinks 
 
 that the citizens serve him. 
 
 d) aTQarrjyog^ ^v ^evoxXsidr^gf nsfintog avtog, 
 
 Xenoclides was their general (himself the 
 fifth = ) with four others. 
 
 52. Vocabulary 9. 
 
 NEUTER ADJECTIVE. 
 
 81 
 
 Accustom, 
 
 I am accustomed, 
 
 Love, like, am fond of, 
 
 Think, am of opinion, 
 
 Serve, perform service, 
 
 General, 
 
 To command (an army), 
 
 Third, 
 
 Fourth, 
 
 Every body, 
 
 I am present, here, &c.. 
 
 EiOiofxai or EimO^a (a perf. 2. 
 from «^oo : xata to sioo&og, 
 neut. part. accg. to my^ 
 hisj dec. custom ; as my^ 
 his, (fee. custom was.) 
 
 dyando) : also, with ace. or 
 dat. "I am contented 
 with." 
 
 VOfil^OO, 
 Vni]QSttO!)J 
 
 GTQaTTjyog, ov, 6. 
 
 GtQairiyioo. 
 
 tQirog, tjf ov. 
 
 tetaQZog, rj, ov. 
 
 nag tig. 
 
 TxaQ-etfii. (ta naqovta preS" 
 ent things, circunV' 
 stances, or condition.) 
 
 To 'perform this service^ virrtpertTv tovto. 
 these services, vv^fxrciv ravra 
 
 u 
 
 Exercise 10. 
 
 53. Accustom yourself to confer benefits upon'* the 
 good. Every body loves his own things. I accustom 
 myself to serve the state. Cyrus, as his custom was, 
 was riding at full speed. I will give the gold to you 
 
 • From arpards artny, ayuy lead. 
 ■ Augment, i, clBii^ov, eidtaftat. It is used in pass. 
 J vir6, ipirns, Tovoer, properlj, to row for a person, or at his com* 
 mand. 
 
 rourself (48). Philip was their general with two others. 
 He thinks that the citizens have conferred benefits upon 
 him. Accustom yourself to be contented with your (18) 
 present condition. Let us not treat those ill who* have 
 done good to us. He accustomed himself (imperf) to 
 perform these services for the good. I will perform this 
 service for you. He has a" large head. I am accus- 
 tomed to perform you these services. 
 
 ^ 10. Of the Neuter Adjective. 
 
 54. a) In Greek, as in Latin, the neut. plur. of an 
 adjective is used without a substantive, where we 
 should rather use the singular. 
 
 55. b) The neut. article with a gen. case, is used 
 in an indefinite way for any thing that relates to, or 
 proceeds from, what the gen. expresses. 
 
 56. c) Neuter adjectives are used adverbially ; and 
 generally. 
 
 The neut. sing, of the comp. ) serve also for camp. 
 The neut. plural of the sup. \ and sup. of the adv. 
 
 57. d) When an adjective is the predicate, it is often 
 in the neut. singular, when that is not the gender, or 
 even number, of the subject. 
 
 This can only be, when the assertion is made of a class or gener- 
 al notion ; not of a particular thing. It may be supposed to agree 
 with thing understood. 
 
 58. e) noXvg (aktoov or nXdrnv, nkiiatog), superlatives, 
 and the adj. jjfuavg* stand in the gender of the gen. that 
 follows them, when we might have rather expected the 
 neut. adj. (Not to tioIv tl^g yrjg, but i) txoXXi^.) 
 
 59. a) elns taut a, he said this. 
 
 ■ Ace. plur. (Ff and tag. G. ovs in later writers. 
 
W NEUTER ADJECTIVES. 
 
 b) ra tmp ^emp cpigm de$, we should bear whal 
 
 comes from the gods. 
 e) aoqfmtsQOp noutg, you act more wisely. 
 
 aicxicta dtstsXeaev, he lived in a most 
 
 disgraceful way. 
 
 d) ^ aQETTi iaup iTiatvsrop, virtue is praise- 
 
 worthy. 
 
 e) rj noXXri ^5^ X^Qf^^* the greater part of the 
 
 country, 6 ^i*tavg tov XQorov, half the 
 time, 
 
 60. Vocabulary 10. 
 
 We ought, should or must, ^^r* (oportet). 
 To bear, ' - ' 
 
 Said, 
 To Uve, 
 
 Praiseworthy, 
 To praise. 
 To act. 
 Forwardness, zeal, 
 
 Peloponnesus, 
 
 dnopJ" 
 
 dia-tBXi(a, iaon (properly^n- 
 wA, go through ; §iop or 
 ^ XQovop understood). 
 inatverog, ly, op, 
 
 TTOUm. 
 
 to TTQoOvfiov (adj, for ^ nQih 
 TleXoTroppjjaog, ov, ^. 
 
 Exercise 11. 
 
 61. The others laid waste half the country. The 
 other party«» act more wisely. The rest ••of the 
 Scythians act more wisely. He spent half his life in a 
 most disgraceful way. The others are doing better.- 
 1 ne rest of the citizens are doing very well.* The 
 king of the Persians has ravaged the greater part of the 
 
 • iti (— <Jcoi, Set,, itiv, iiov), ieffcci. Imperf. iSci, 
 
 Jcpo,, oUu, iv^,oxa : aar. 1. fj.eyKa, Fast. ivtxQn<xo,iai and olaef,,,^ 
 
 • *^7 ("T^ &c.) an aor. 2. Also r^a aor. 1., of which itwan ,t. 
 rar^, and also ttVaj , are used by Attic writers. ' 
 
 • R^7r^^!1'1''^ generally i^o^a,,) H.eaa, ^t.a, ^.10^.: but ^„,ai. 
 
 • B7 56 the eompar, and tuptrl of good must here be uaed. 
 
 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 
 
 da 
 
 Peloponnesus. Wisdom is praiseworthy (57. d\ The 
 son of Sophroniscus* said this (54. a). Let us bear 
 what comes from the gods. The son of Philip will 
 command (the army) with three others.^' Accustom 
 yourself to bear what comes from the gods. One ought 
 to like one's own things. A certain man had a hen 
 Eagles '5 have a»« very beautiful head. 
 
 ^11. Subject and Predicate, 
 
 62. a) The nom. neut.plur. generally has the verb 
 m the singular; but often not b) when persons or liv- 
 ing creatures are spoken of 
 
 63. c) The verb 'to be' is often omitted. 
 
 ^ 64 a)^ ra fwa rgsxei, the animals run. rap Sptoop 
 ra fitv tat IV c^ jj^r^, ra 5' ovk icf 7)fuv, of existing 
 thmgs some are in our power, and others are not in 
 our power. 
 
 b) roadSe b&p^ iaiQaTsvop, so many nations went 
 on the expedition. 
 
 c) ra Twf (flXoQP yoivd, the property of friends is 
 sotnTnofi, 
 
 65. Vocabulary 11. 
 
 Animal, 
 
 Run, 
 
 In a person's power. 
 
 So many, 
 
 Nation, 
 
 Go on an expedition. 
 
 fwof, or, TO. , 
 
 tQero}^ (Sgafi). 
 
 im with the dat. of the per- 
 son (in ifioif in my pow- 
 er ; ifi iiiov, in my time , 
 int TOV TiUTQog, i?i my fa 
 therms time). 
 
 Toaog, joaoadtf tocfovrog. 
 
 e&pog, eogf to. 
 
 atgatevn. 
 
 ' ^f^X'^* <^P«/'o«^«||.<JcJpa//.7ifa, iSfMuov. 
 
 09ft ^ 
 
 2f* 
 
d4 
 
 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 
 
 OM THE MOODS. 
 
 l-jil' i 
 
 ( « 
 
 Existing things, things, rdSfta (part from eiui. tm 
 
 that are, or (54, a) what is, 6vu,in reality, really.) 
 
 To go away, an-eifit.s 
 
 Now (= already, at once, 
 
 without waiting any yd^. 
 longer), 
 
 (Words after which the omission of the copula (' w' *are' &c "» ia 
 very common.) ^ •» •" 
 
 Ready, 
 
 Disappeared, vanished, 
 
 (It is) time, 
 
 Easy, 
 
 Hard, difficult, 
 
 Worthy, 
 
 Possible, 
 
 Impossible, 
 
 Necessity, 
 
 Lawful, 
 
 (fee. (fcc. 
 
 ezotfiog,^ t]y or, 
 
 qiQovdogfi jy, or. 
 
 coQa. 
 
 Qadiov (neut. of Qfidtos), 
 
 XaXsTTOv (neut. otxa^STZo*;). 
 
 u^togy «, Of. 
 
 dvvarog, j/, or, 
 
 adi'vuTog, og ov. 
 
 dvdyxt] {=it is necessary), 
 
 Offiig, Oifudog, ^ {=fas) 
 
 Exercise 12. 
 
 66. These things were not in my power. These 
 things took place in our fathers' times. This (plur.) is 
 good. It is now time to go away. They are ready to 
 do this. \The judge is worthy of death (gen.) \ The 
 boy^ have disappeared;" the father has disappeared 
 Many nations will go on the expedition. It is easy to 
 the wise, to bear what comes from the gods,^^ It is ne- 
 cessary to bear what comes from the gods. Let us so 
 away at once. Socrates, the son» of Sophroniscus, was 
 really wise. For it is not lawful to speak ill of the gods. 
 It IS hard to deceive the wise. 
 
 » clfii has a fut. meaning, and is more common in this sense than 
 iXtv^of,ai, fut. of cpxofiai. In the moods it is used as pres. or fuL (B ) 
 ■ Afterwards eroi/iof. •' ^ ' 
 
 * From npo, h^ds : only found in nom. of all numbers. 
 Begin with a(V. Have, has, are not to be translated. 
 
 § 12. On the Moods. 
 
 67. a. 1) The moods of the aorist do not refer to 
 
 past timcj and are therefore rendered by 
 the present in English. 
 
 2) The moods of the aorist express moment- 
 
 ary^ actions ; those of the present, ton 
 tinned ones. 
 
 3) But the participle of the aorist does refer 
 
 to past time, ntofavj having fallen, 
 
 68. a) fiij when it forbids, takes the imperative of 
 tne present, the subjunctive of the aorist." 
 
 [In doing the exercises, consider (1) whether a single 
 definite action is spoken of; or a continued action, or 
 habit. Having thus determined whether the aorist 
 should be used, or the present, (2) if you use the present, 
 you must alsA use the imperative ; if the aorist, the sub- 
 jitnctive.] 
 
 Of cours* the suhj. of the present must be used for the first person 
 (when the present is to be used), as the imperat. has no first person. 
 
 69. S3^ 2%e optative is the regular attendant of the 
 historical tenses. Hence, 
 
 70. 6) The relatives and particles (except the com- 
 pounds of ar; see 77,89), which take the subjtinctive, 
 after the present and future, take the optative after the 
 histcriccU" tenses. 
 
 Th'* ftf^ative is thus, in fact, the subjunctive of the historical tenses, 
 answering to the imperfect and pluperfect of the Latin subjunctive. 
 
 71. c) So the particles and pronouns, which go with 
 the indicative in direct, ° take the optative in oblique* 
 narration. 
 
 I Momentary is here used in a somewhat loose way, to express »m- 
 gle definite actions, not contemplated as continuing. 
 
 ■ /!<} with imperative present tells a man to leave off what he has 
 already begun : fifi with aor. suhj., tells him not to begin the action. (H.) 
 This is a consequence of the distinction pointed out, not a new dht* 
 >inction. 
 
 • i. e. Imperf., aorists, and pluperf. 
 
 • Oblique narration (sermo obliquus) is when the opiniona aaser* 
 
II I 
 
 ON THE HOODS. 
 
 ^ "^ ''^auT' '^° ""' ^'^"^ ^^°^^^^^ stealing gettfK 
 
 M Mps do not steal (forbids stealing in a 
 particular instance). 
 6) S nuQiiiti, Ua 'dm, /am here to see 
 ' »«??»', &-« '9 01^,, /was there to see.- 
 ovH ,x<o (or ow, olSa), 5noi? rgdnrnfiat, / don't 
 Know which way to turn myself. 
 
 Tf f'"' ^""Vh ^*"'')' »'»<»'" 'e«»o,>,,, / did 
 ^ not know which way to turn myself, 
 c) w«To, « owTOff $xo\he asked if it were so. 
 
 «i«l« (to,, o« , o«off gi.'eo. tls T^, „6h,, ?r«n 
 oQvrirM told me that the road led to tht 
 city which I saw. 
 73. Vocabulary 12. 
 Steal, , , 
 
 Theft, *]""?': . 
 
 Know, "^f"'' '^' '• 
 
 Whither, 2".Vin^ A 
 
 ' not; (in dependent ques- 
 
 tions onot.) 
 
 (>ermo rectu,). ' ' '*'"*' *"=" """''l l" " *>«« narration 
 
 / t0M. Hueeuons, as . 9,pu»Ta fit rig «rj,v, he asked me wh 
 
 -^^«P. «. jJciv, i«. ^J, (from j^ea). 
 
 J«^if, commonly $Sti<rea, Att. ^in^a. 
 JJ«, ^«. 5J«^, anrf V.7. 
 
 ON THE MOODS. 
 
 37 
 
 Tum, 
 
 To ask, 
 
 Road, 
 
 Lead (of a road), 
 
 See, 
 
 To be so, 
 
 To be found or brought m 
 
 guilty, 
 Battle, 
 Fight, 
 
 That, in order that, 
 That, after verbs oUelling 
 
 &c., forLatin accus, with 
 
 infinitive, 
 
 tQEfio) (Miu. turn mi/self), 
 
 riQonriVy aor. 2 : {igmTdm used 
 
 for the other tenses.) 
 odog, ovy Tj, 
 
 (ffQO}. 
 
 oQamJ 
 
 ovTcog exeiv (to have them' 
 selves so.) 
 
 aXmai* (with gen,) 
 
 ^dxofiai, saofiat, ovfiai, tjfiat. 
 
 ha (= ut.) 
 
 on, (with indie, unless the 
 optative is required by 
 71. The ace, with infin, 
 also occurs. See 91. b.) 
 
 me vertam. ) What are strengthening particles, and with wLi 
 words are they often used? {yt, at leae%\ r^/Tn^ They 
 are frequently used with relatives.) ^ ' ^ 
 
 Exercise 13. 
 
 74. I am here /o^ce the battle. I was here to set the 
 battle. Do not pursue what is disgraceful.'' The 
 road leads to Athens. The boy says that the road leads 
 ^ Athens. The boy told me that the road ledt to Athens 
 Do not deceive your father (of a particular instance of 
 deceit) The Persian was found guilty of murder. J 
 asked him what he was doing. He asked me who 1 
 was. Whoareyou(p/wr.)? I asked them who they 
 were. He told me that Xenoclides commanded them 
 
 . ' The tenaes supplied from the roots Off, et-J: hpioi, SiLoua; luios^a ;- 
 I'J'^wj;, dXoinp iXw (a)f, &C.), a\Civai^ iUvf. 
 
 Sel note fn*5l**6 ^^^^^'^^^^^ »^''' ^ ^^^ unaugmenicd forms. 
 
88 
 
 ON THE MOODS. 
 
 
 \ 
 
 with two others.*^ Do not steal these things. Do not 
 accustom yourself to deceive your mother. I was there 
 to fight. He asked me whether (ci^ these things were 
 
 so. 
 
 § 13. The Moods continued. 
 On el and uv. Conditional Propositions, 
 Introductory remarks on uv. 
 
 75. This particle (of which Hermann considers the 
 real meaning to be br/ chance^ perhaps ; but Hartung, 
 else, otherwise) gives an expression ol contingency and 
 mere possibility to the assertion. 
 
 76. Its principal use is in the conclusion of a hypo- 
 thetical sentence ; and when it stands in other sentences, 
 it often refers to an implied condition. 
 
 77. It coalesces with several particles, so as to form 
 one word with them. 
 
 ore, 
 
 9 
 
 ineidij 
 
 Thus with et, 
 
 it forms idv, Jy, av, oraVf 
 
 78. The av = idvj d dv, regularly begins the sen 
 tence, and is thus aistinguished from the simple 
 which must have some words before it 
 
 ar. 
 
 79. «i (like our *(/"') has the two meanings oft/** and 
 whether : it goes with the indie, or optative ; but not, in 
 good writers, with the subjunctive. — (See example in 
 72. c.) 
 
 80. a) Possibility without any expression of uncer" 
 
 tainty ; « with indie, in both clauses. 
 
 • Sec 334. 
 
 yl 
 
 ON THE MOODS. 
 
 80 
 
 6) Uncertainty with ihe prospect of decision, 
 idp with subjunctive in the conditional, and 
 the indie, (generally the future) in the con- 
 sequent clause. 
 
 c) Uncertainty without any such accessary no- 
 tion : d with the optative in the conditional 
 clause, and dv with the optative in the con- 
 sequent clause. 
 d) Impossibility, or belief that the thing is not 
 so : H with imperfect or aorist indie, in the 
 conditional clause ; dv with imperf or aor- 
 ist indie, in the consequent clause. 
 
 1) The imperfect is used for 'present time, or when the time U 
 quite indefinite. 
 
 2) If both condition and consequence refer to past time, the oot' 
 ist must be used, at least in the consequent clause ; unless the con- 
 sequence is to be represented as continuing. 
 
 3) The condition may refer to past, and the consequence to pre#- 
 ent time. 
 
 ci ineiaOriv, ovk av fippuxiTovv^if Ihod (then) been persuaded, I should 
 not (now) be out of heaWi. 
 
 81. a) ^ el (^QovTTjae xai ijaTQaxpev, if it has thuTider- 
 ed it has also lightened. 
 
 el tiexeig.do g, if you have any thing, give 
 it, 
 
 b)tdv u ex<^f^sv, daaonev, if we have any 
 thing, we will give it, 
 
 c) eitig ravza Ttgdrroi, fieya fi av (ocpsX^asis, 
 
 if any one should do this, he would do me a 
 great service, 
 
 d) elrieJxev, ididov dv, if he had any thing,"" he 
 
 would give it, 
 9t 71 eay^v, eSmxsp dv, if he had had any 
 thing, he would have given it. 
 
 82. Vocabulary 13. 
 
 To benefit, to do a service, wg>d«c». 
 Hurt, injure, ^Xdntm. 
 
 Kill, put to death, a/ro-xmVo). 
 
 ■ It ia implied, that he has not any thing. 
 
ON THE MOODS. 
 
 Speak the tnith, 
 
 Mina, 
 
 Talent," 
 
 Not only — but also 
 
 Even, 
 
 Not even, 
 
 dXij&evm, 
 
 Hva, fivag, ij. 
 
 tdXavtov, ov, TO, 
 
 ovx otr — dXXa xaL 
 
 xai, 
 
 ovds. 
 
 & Oas. u}(pc\eiv^ 0\airreiv, &c. take besides ace. of person, an sdj 
 m the ace. neut. plw., where we should use adverbs ; rery, more. <fte 
 
 V 
 
 r 
 
 I 
 
 Exercise 14. 
 
 83. If I have any thing," I will give it. If you 
 were to do this, you would confer the greatest benefit 
 upon me (c). If any one should do this, he would 
 greatly injure me. If I had a mina, I would give it to 
 the slave. If he had had even three talents, he would 
 have given them to his brother. If any one were to do 
 (c) this, he would do the greatest" injury to the state. 
 If you speak the truth (i. e. if what you say should 
 prove true), 1 will give you three talents. If the wise 
 were to manage the affairs of the state, they would con- 
 fer a great benefit*' upon all the citizens. If this be 
 so,*^ I will go away at once. If you were really wise, 
 you would admire the beauty of virtue. I am here to 
 see not only the city, hut also the whole'" country. If 
 the citizens were wise, they would have killed not only 
 9^ Xenoclides, but also Philip. If you should be found 
 guilty*^ of murder, the citizens will put you to death. 
 
 r. ' I 
 
 V 
 
 ^ 14. The Moods continued, 
 
 84. a) The optative with dv is equivalent to oui 
 Yiay, mighty would, should, &c. 
 
 * Such a verb m*I do not say* ia understood : I saw, not that my 
 jDn, hut also &c.=I nw (/ do not say) that (/ saw) my •on, but 
 tlso, d&c. 
 
 / 
 
 ON THE MOODb. 
 
 41 
 
 TiL^nFf^*^n\^^f^ (as our trou/d, Ac.) to a condition supposed. 
 ThUBlnm* a) 'Iwouldghdlysee t/,' t/it were possible; in(8i5*.6) 
 one could nat* &c. if one were to look. 
 
 85. h) The optative with dv is often translated by 
 the future, 
 
 A "^t.^r^"**^* ^®/® peculiarly fond of expressing themselves in a 
 doubtful way; of avoiding all posUivenesa in their assertions; and 
 hence the optative with 5v is used of the most positive assertions. 
 
 86. c. d. e,) dp gives to the infinitive and the partu 
 ciple the same force that it gives to the optative. 
 
 Thus (as in 86*. d) the infin. gets the force 01 an injin. future.^ 
 This 18 the common way of expressing the future after verbs of 
 hoping thinking, trusting, praying, knowing, confessing, &c.. when 
 It IS dependent on a condition expressed or implied. 
 Of aposUive un^ondUional expectation, &c. the infinitive without 
 J :J° ^^ "u®^ • the future, if future time is to be stjongly mark- 
 ed ; if not, the oor. or present, according as the action is nummtarg 
 or continued. (K.) in fi cr ^ 
 
 DO . a) tjdfcog av Oeaaai^rjv r avr a, I would gladly 
 see this, or, / should like to see this, dv- 
 •&Q(onov dvaidearegov ovx dv rig evgoi, a 
 man, or, one could not find a more shame- 
 less fellow, 
 h) ovH dv (pevjoig, you will not escape. 
 
 c) noaov dv ohi evgeiv zd ad xTi/jftaza nrnXov- 
 fisva ; how much do you think your pos- 
 sessions would fetch (literally, find) if 
 they were sold 7 
 
 d) ovxeativ era dvdga dv dvyrj&^vai note dnavta 
 ravTangd^ai, it is not possible that one man 
 should ever be able to do all this, 
 
 e) xuXXa^ aioanoi, nol): dv %<»y eiTtsTv, I hold my 
 tongue about the rest, though /should have 
 much to say. ahsi fiia&hv, cog fiegtyevofie^ 
 
 S 
 
 Q 
 
 ^ Ypd(pttv av=^scripturum esse. 
 ^ ytypa<pevai av^=zscripturum fuisse. 
 
 Ypdipat aj/=(a) scripturum fuisse, or 
 
 as pres. (b) scripturum esse, 
 ypdxpeiv &v=scripturum fore. (K.) 
 y^tu i^ is proved, I think, to be correct by Hartung, againat For* 
 •on, Hermann, dec. KHhner and Rost both agree with Hartune 
 For ra &X\a, *' 
 
I 
 
 '■I'i 
 
 M 
 
 ON THE MOODS. 
 
 9oqav\ rav noXefiiatv, he asks for pat/ an 
 the plea thai he could then conquer hU 
 enemies. 
 
 87. Vocabulary 14 
 
 * Would {or shoiJld) like ^a/co.y gladlt/. (r.d,ai & 
 to . . (how trans- / sho^dd like ex- 
 
 lated ?) 
 
 tremely ; fjdTov ap 
 
 ?, I would rather than.) 
 
 See, behold^ 
 Shameless, 
 
 Sharnelessness,impudence, ZZ'dna'^ag^ 'k 
 t ind; (of things sold) fetch, €{,q{cx(o.'^ 
 Possession, 
 Acquire, get, 
 
 "^y 
 
 '• x» 
 
 Sell, 
 
 Can, am able. 
 
 How is ^it is possible^ 
 
 sometimes expressed 1 
 One, 
 
 Hold my tongue about. 
 Ask for: in mid. ask for 
 
 myself, 
 Pay, 
 
 Conquer, get the better of. 
 
 xrtjfia,^ atog, to. . 
 XTuofiai, (pei^ xfHri^fiui == i 
 
 possess.) 
 ntoXm. ^* 
 
 dvvafiat.* '. .••* 
 
 by lativ. ^ 
 
 *&, ^/a, kv. G. ivog'^fiag, <fcc, 
 GKaTrdo), (with fut. mid.) 
 
 aiTtm. 
 
 * / 
 
 fAiaOog, ov, 6. 
 
 n£QiyiyvofAai,{\vi{hffen. See 
 15, note I.) m * 
 
 \_ t Literally * as thus heing-likely-to-conquer ' 
 
 rnn^ w ^^''^ '^'''''- Adverbs in a>j are formed by adding cf to the 
 root ; ^\.6, Ka)u, . rax-vf , ra;t^-«f, ruxi-cos. ^ ^ ^' 
 
 Ihe terminauon la becomes e<a when derived from adiertivA- in 
 .. by contmction with the s of the root ; d.a.s'Zla'^i-Z d^^^^^^^ 
 a 18 then shortened, and the accent thrown back to the / J/ it/iw. >. ! 
 ieneraX ^at^bT^ Particle meaning ' nor inlm^td^^^^^^^^^^ 1 
 
 ^•^^£vp.a.a,, eip,Va,, cv^^.a. ««p,/.a«. r^Tp,,, .^p^^,,^ ^^^^^^ y^^^ ^^ 
 •> Sec 8. note a. 
 
 Escape from, 
 
 Black, 
 
 Flatterer, 
 
 Flatter, 
 
 Ever, at any lime, 
 
 Just, 
 
 Faithful, 
 
 How much, 
 
 Think, 
 
 Hone, 
 
 ON THE MOODS. 
 
 qitvyto^ {ace. fut. rftiil.) 
 fitlag, aifa, av. 
 v.6XoL^y aKog, 6. 
 xoXaxsvm. 
 7107 e,'^ 
 
 dixaiog^ a, or. 
 niatog, ?/, 6v. 
 noaov, (neut.) 
 oiofiat.' 
 
 Exercise 15. 
 
 41 
 
 88. One cannot find a more shameless flatterer. One 
 cannot find a blacker dog. TgiTLwill not escape from 
 those who are pursuing you. W I possessed a talent, I 
 would not ask you' for pay. It is not possible that you, 
 being a man, should be able to deceive the gods. You 
 will not deceive God, the judge of all. I should like to 
 find these things. I should like to see the old geome^rs. 
 Let us fly from the shamelessness of wicked men. You 
 will not find a juster judge. Do not steal the poet's gold. 
 Do not flatter. If you do this, you will conquer your 
 enemies. How much do you think the eagle will fetch, 
 if offered for sale? I asked him how much (72, note) 
 his possessions would fetch, if sold? I will ask for 
 three talents, on the plea that I shall then cojiouer 
 (86*. e) all my enemies. I hope that you will be able to 
 io all this (86*. d). 
 
 ^ 15. The Moods continued. 
 89. a) The compo unds of dv (sdv, orav, tnBi^df, &c. 
 
 ' v6t€ ; interrog. when ? 
 
 • ohitai and t"" ai (2 sing, orei), oifjaofiat, olndnv. Imperf. fijduqy, ^m, 
 f 9^ J09 d 124. a. M- J r » iri 
 
i If 
 
 44 
 
 ON THE MOODS. 
 
 ON THB MOODff. 
 
 45 
 
 I 
 
 77) regularly take the subjunctive. The 
 
 same rule applies to relatives with av, 
 
 90. b) When they come into connection with past 
 
 time or the oblique narration, they either remain 
 
 unchanged, or the simple words («', hs, i7reid^-5g,iaus, 
 
 9aog, 6cc.) take their place with the optative (69). 
 
 90*. c,d. e) When these compounds of ay, and rela- 
 
 lives with tif, go with the subjunctive of the aorist, they 
 
 answer to the Latin /w^wrc perfect {futurum exactum), 
 
 yi. a) Tzagsaofiai idv u dsj^s (60,»), / will come to you 
 
 ^ (of) 6e with you\ if lam wanted. 
 
 o) ecpjj nagsasa&ai, si u dsot or de^aoi, he said 
 
 that he would come, if he were wanted. 
 
 e) TOTS d/j,^ otav a xgh ' ftoiisg, evivxeig, then only 
 
 are you prosperous, when you do what you 
 
 ought, tots d/j, otav a XQV nonqaxig, evrvxijaetg, 
 
 then only will you be prosperous, when you 
 
 have done ^ what you ought (turn demum, 
 
 ^ quura officia tua expleveris, felix eris). 
 
 a) iTzeidap afzavza axovat^re, xgivate, when (or 
 
 after) you have heard all, decide. 
 e) diacp&egeiOyU av Xd^ij, he will destroy whatever 
 he takes or lays hold of {ceperit). 
 92. Vocabulary 15. 
 
 t/, (neut. of?4). 
 
 XOi. 
 
 tav tt dtrj, or Bin Seol 
 
 evtvxem. 
 
 At all, 
 
 Also, 
 
 One ought, 
 
 If there is any need, or oc- 
 casion. 
 
 Am prosperous, or fortun- 
 ate; prosper, 
 
 f Ti^at all lav Ti Sirj, if it should be at all necetaary. 
 » TAen frti/y (and not before)=Mc7i on/y. 
 
 iXPnv or xpHv {not, IxP^) : jut. xpn<ru. ^^ ""pc". 
 
 .Minn tT^f -^^^ 'toAen you shall have done.-' but in English a futur% 
 WUon that 18 to precede another future action, is generally pat i^ SI 
 Resent or perfect tense We do not, that is, mark that il TnZ S! 
 
 Su; Cpei^g!' ""'' " '^"^""^^^ ^^ '^^ ' "'*'"'' &c. to the timt 
 
 Foriune, 
 
 Hear, 
 
 Judge, decide, 
 
 When, 
 
 Then, 
 
 When ? 
 
 Destroy, 
 
 Take, 
 
 Whosoever, whatsoever, 
 When, after, 
 
 dxovm.^ 
 ygivat. 
 
 tore. 
 
 mie ; 
 
 diaq)&£tgoi).'* 
 
 Xa}i8dv<o,'> 
 
 oaitg.^ 
 
 ineid/f, or with av, mtiidv. 
 
 (iro^rvai, to be present (here or there) ^ is often used of being present 
 to assist; where we should use ' come to you^^ or ' be with you.') 
 
 Exercise 16. 
 
 J^* When the consequent verb is in the/u/., how is • if* transla- 
 ted 1 with what mood 7— 81. 6. 
 
 93. He says that he will come, if he is wanted (91. b). 
 If we do what we ought, we shall be happy. If the 
 citizens were to do^* what they ought, they would be 
 prosperous. If the citizens had done what they ought 
 (imperf), they would be prosperous (now). When I 
 have any thing, I will give it. When they see this, 
 they will fear. When you have managed the affairs of 
 the state well, you shall manage mine also. He hopes 
 that he shall (thus) be able to deceive the gods also. I 
 am glad that the enemy are destroyed." If the enemy 
 had done this, they would have been destroyed. The 
 judge said, that he would come, if he were wanted. 
 
 JFut. Aimivofiat (but aor. 1. fiKovaa)^ aKftKoa^ fiKOWftau 
 
 ■ Srav when the subj. should be used with iv. 
 
 ■ iKKpdctpo), ita<pQtpCi^ iu<pdapKa. 
 
 • \auj3d¥0i, Hxf^fiatf eiXrifa. Ikaffov. 
 
 F The neut. of Earn has sometimes a mark like a comma (called 
 HmttoU or hypodiastole) after the o, to distinguishit from 5ri, that. (5,n.^ 
 
46 
 
 ON THE MOODS. 
 
 
 '\ 1! 
 
 I 
 
 § 16. The Moods continued. 
 
 94. a) The optative is used of what happened often, 
 when the time spoken o{ is past. 
 
 1) For pre». or future time^ the relatives with av and compound! 
 of av could be used. 
 
 2) To relatives av gives in this way the force of our ever. Sg ip 
 (= quicumquc, siquis) whoever^ any man who; in plur. all who. 
 
 %. a) vnsQMOv'i eJxsv onot iv affnt' diatQi8ot,* ike 
 had an tipper chamber whenever he stayed 
 in town. 
 
 b) enQUTiev a do^eitv avrcj), he did what (in each 
 case) seemed good to him. 
 
 6) ovg (f^ev) id 1 evraHtrng not atmn^ iorrag, in'^fet,^ 
 he used to praise those whom (at any time) 
 he saw inarching in good order and in si- 
 lence. 
 96. Vocabulary 16. 
 
 Upper chamber, vrnq^ovy ov, to. 
 
 Whenever, onSte. 
 
 Stay (in a town), diaTgi^co. 
 
 It seems good, ^oxct" (-= videtur^ videntur, 
 
 a doxH lAOi, what seems 
 good to me^what Ipleasi 
 or choose to do), 
 evtdxioog. 
 
 In good order, 
 Rank, 
 
 ^ ^-irepcJov, adj. understand oiKTfjta. vvepcjiost w>s from inip^ u wa 
 
 rpuXos, (Mi from naTTJP' (P-) 
 
 ' aarv Is used of Athens as we use * town ' of London. 
 
 • itarpilScivt to rub (or wear) away, xP"^*"*"? '^*<'»' {conierere tempos 
 terere vitam). Without ace. to linger, stay, &,c. 
 
 * The imperfect of an habitual action ; translated by *u8ed to,* &c 
 8ee 2. Obs. 
 
 ■ SoK£(a {seem and also think), Sd^u, iiloynai {visua sum), aor. 1. 
 \ioia. (The 3 sing. Jo«r, imperf. cJ(J«(, Jrf^ci, iSo(t{v), iUoKrai). 
 
 " riavu, real root ray. Hence Tay-<rif«sru|if. Nouns in ffif, ffio, 
 
 ON THE MOODS. 
 
 47 
 
 Order, arrange, 
 
 Dining-rocm, 
 
 March (of a single soldier), elfiil 
 
 tdaam, |a>. 
 dvcayewPj'' cif to. 
 
 Silence, 
 Horse-soldier, 
 
 To charge an enemy, 
 
 ai(07ijj, 7jg, ij, 
 
 Innevg, ecog, 6 {plur. caval- 
 
 eXavvetv elg (with ace, some> 
 times, infj. 
 
 Exercise 17. 
 What is tne/u/. of ^jraivcu 7— 60, note d. 
 
 97. He had a dining-room whenever he stayed in 
 town. The judge had an upper chamber whenever he 
 stayed hi town. I praise all whom I see (94. 1) acting 
 well. The judge praised all whom he saw acting well 
 1 will do whatever (94. 1) I please.33 Whenever he 
 took any city, he used to kill all the citizens. When I 
 have taken^« the city, I will kill all the citizens. When 
 you have taken the city, do not kill the citizens. I praise 
 those who march in silence. If you march in good or- 
 der, I will praise you. Who would not admire cavalry 
 marching (riding) in order? The cavalry of the Per- 
 sians charge the ranks of the enemy. / should like to 
 9ee^^ cavalry charging the enemy. 
 
 % 17. On the Moods. 
 
 98. The subjunctive is used in doubting questions 
 either alone, or after ^ovXei, ^iletg {do you wish ?). 
 
 So also afte r oiK ixto (or ol6a : 72. 6), and dnopui (ceo) Jam at a lost, 
 
 60m verbs, denote regularly the abstract notion of the verb Hence 
 r»^«j«the putting in order; but also, order, a place assigned, &c. 
 
 • ^dwioyaAov from apUf y'^^^'^t earth, ground. 
 
 « $ln', ibo, (not to be confounded with <c><, sum). 
 
 ^ 
 
 .fY 
 
SI 
 
 '\ 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 1-1 
 
 ^8 ON THE MOODS. 
 
 fc^^'A^""^ *"* ^'''" ^^'") •***• (Optat. after the historical tenset 
 72. 6.) 
 
 99. a) /Jor'Afty ovv axonmfiev ; do you, wish then, thai 
 
 we should consider (the question)? 
 h) no&sv ^ovXei aQ^mfiai; what do you wish me 
 to begin with ? 
 
 c) u noia ; what shall I do 7 what am I to do ? 
 
 not iQunrnfiai ; whither shall I turn myself? 
 
 d) einco ovv aoi to aiuovj shall I then tell you 
 
 the cause ? 
 
 e) fvr aHovffm' avOig^; shall I now hear 
 
 again — 7 
 
 100. Vocabulary 17. 
 Wish, 
 
 Consider, examine, 
 Whence. 
 Begin, 
 Cause, 
 Again, 
 
 Then {of infer ence\ 
 Am at a loss, 
 Seek, 
 
 ^ovXoftaif ^eX(a or iOikto. 
 
 caonim, 
 
 noOtv. 
 
 agiofiai, 
 
 aitiov,^ ov, TO. 
 
 ovv. 
 anogm,* 
 
 {df' ifioii. drrd aoi, &c. dp^ditcvogi (having begun tnih you «=) and 
 you among tfu first ; and you aa muck as any body.) 
 
 t / ?■ ^"^^' ®^^''^'^°/'«'» which with Sirro/iai and oiouai always make <i 
 iu 2. sflng. pres. (%«, oUi). r j ^'^^ 
 
 • The subjunctive used in this way (subjunctivus dubitaiivu9 or de 
 liberaitvus) must not be mistaken for the future. 
 
 • iOiXto (the most general expression for teishing) denotes particu- 
 larly that kind of wish in which there Ues a purpose or design .-conse- 
 quently the desire of something, the execution of which is, or appears 
 to be,inones own power. 0ov\oiiai, on the other hand, is confined to 
 that kind o{ willingness or wUhing, in which the wish and inclination 
 towards a thmg are either the only thing contained in the expression, 
 or are at least intended to be marked particularly. Hence it expresses 
 a readiness und. willingness to submit to what does not exactly depend 
 ■pon oneself —(5u«. Lexilogus, Eng. Trans. 194.) 
 
 • Properly a^. 
 
 • From a, notf nSpoi, passage, outlet. ^ 
 
 • The dpiifityof must be in the case of whatever it refen to. 
 
 ON THE MOODS 
 
 Exercise 18. 
 
 49 
 
 ie^osl^^''"^^' *'"^' "^"«' ^^^^'- be used in dependent .e«- 
 
 we t^go^ Xi Xt^s'haT "^'^ f'?i (^^^^) 
 wish, then, fhat w^'shouKl jtiL Taus^e Do ^'" 
 
 hear. I am at a loss what (72 note n^ tn Tl^ ^k ' 
 
 know "J'J.''^'^ -ay to turi .hSvVs" The^dld no! 
 know which way to turn themselves. ^ 
 
 '■' y 
 
 § 18. The Moods continued. 
 
 102. a) ilri Ij^oiior /^«). .'g-v «<»'«„.. ; ^ 
 
 0) ei ritxot, iqit] tovvat at. ' '^ompare ex- 
 
 t^ "I'il'^h^'.mtovratccK ( amplesinSl. 
 
 I pendent on another verb, the consequent 
 
 clause IS in the infinitive. "*«?«««« 
 
 ^ Iwl' w ""f^If',"^'^" '^'«''^« ^i(h „'. (in 
 
 Instead o7fh!' ''T '^^ ^■"-^«- ""''^ «'- 
 ^w °l^^^^''^P^'fect or aorist with 5, (81. 
 
 5i^ li! '^ave Ihepmm^oraom/ ».>. 
 
 104. «) I„stead"of the mrfjp. /„,„,, (g,. j) ^e shall 
 
 have the tnfin. future ; and «' i,7A opf«. 
 
 • on wifh ^"^ "f r ""'■''* *«'^-''' 'f '" «=°n»«^' 
 
 [ I 
 
'h 
 
 mmii 
 
 m 
 
 ii 
 
 III 
 
 1; i' 
 
 OV AND fif/. 
 
 105. Thus where we should have had in the cons^ 
 quent clause^ 
 
 , k noioTfi av, J noii^aatfi civ, ^ nsnotrjxoifi af^ 
 
 ftoiTjam, ^ i„o{oyp oLf, \ inoiriaa civ, ( inenoiijxeiv ar, 
 
 we shall have, • * , 
 
 noi^asiv, noieiv civ, noil^aai av, nenoitjitsvai av 
 
 Exercise 19. 
 
 106. He said that, if you were to do this, you would 
 do him the greatest service.^^ I said that, if any one 
 should do this, he would greatly injure me. He said 
 that, if he had a mina, he would give it to the slave. 
 He said that, if any one were to do this, he would do the 
 •Greatest injury*' to the state. He said that he was there 
 To see the battle. How much do you think that your 
 horses would fetch, if they were sold (86*. c)l Who 
 would not wonder at the shamelessness of this basest 
 flatterer ? He told me, that his daughter had very beau- 
 tiful hands.*' I should extremely like to see^* the wise 
 men of old,^ * If the Persians of the 'present day ' * were 
 wise they would be doing better. I should wish to be 
 contented with what comes from the gods.*^ 
 
 § 19, OV and fitj. 
 
 107. 1) OV denies independently and directly. 
 
 2) fAq does not deny independently and directly, 
 but in reference to something else ; to some 
 supposed case, condition or purpose ; or in 
 the expression of some /ear, solicitude, 01 
 care. 
 107' I) iifi is used in all prohibitions (see 32. Ohs.) 
 2) With all conditional particles, «i, idv (r/f, av\ 
 
 OV AND ^/J. 
 
 51 
 
 orav, hetddv, &c., and with Ste, 67160. 
 
 3) Wifh Tli 1^ ?"f '''"'' '' '"^^^''^ (111- ^)- 
 a) With all particles expressing intention or 
 
 purpose; ha, 5na>g, cog, (fee. 
 hen:et^i:^^^^^^ ^^^ compounds of ,,' will 
 
 iW ^L?"J 'i'' "'^^ '^^^^ ^''' "^^ (^^«0 ' and also with 
 
 h,vf, he cannot either speak well of Ms 
 /nends, or treat them well. ^ 
 
 A^y'^T T'' ""^ "^^"^^'^ to go hi 
 
 (Here a condition is implied: if he was no 
 at leisure at that time.) 
 112. Vocabulary 18. 
 
 No^t'f single person, 'S^^^f ''" 
 
 »«n': m!!'lti:^.r'"''*''»^'*"' f°™" - 'h^ common p™. 
 
 I H 
 
 
Te —=-- 
 
 \ 
 
 52 
 
 OV AMD ftrj. 
 
 I 
 
 t 
 
 ii 
 
 No longer, 
 
 Not even, 
 
 Neither, nor, 
 
 Neither, nor yet, 
 
 Both, and. 
 
 Unices, 
 
 Go into, 
 
 Go away, 
 
 Company (= intercourse 
 
 with). 
 Bid, order. 
 
 One is allowed {licet). 
 To be at leisure, 
 Leisure, 
 
 ovxtri, firjaitiJ 
 
 oide, lAti^L 
 
 ovjt — ovTc: fATit^ — V^i^^* 
 
 ovTC — ov5«: fijjifi — nrfit, 
 
 nai — xa/, or t« — xaL 
 
 It f/jj. 
 eiaBQxofiai. 
 
 ofiiXia, as, 17. 
 xeXevoo. 
 
 axoXd^oa, 
 
 (tXoJIjJ {oxoXi, dcwly : with 
 
 a verb »= am slow to do a 
 
 thing, &c.) 
 
 Obs, ri — Kai is very often used, where tr« should only use * tmd,* 
 —The notions are thus brought into closer connection, and the tI 
 prepares us for the coming icau 
 
 Exercise 20. 
 When should ^h Kki-rrt be used 1 when nh «>iV'!»s '^ 72. 
 
 113. I will go away (65, note g), that I may not see 
 the battle. Let us no longer pursue what is disgrace' 
 fuV^ He told me, that the road did not lead to Athens 
 J08). Do not think, that the citizens serve you. If you 
 Jo not do what you ought (91. c), you will not prosper. 
 No longer accustom yourself to deceive your father. I 
 will not take it, unless you bid (me). Let no one steal 
 this. Let not a single person go away. He says that 
 the boys do not wish to go away. Let us not fly-from 
 the company of the good. He said that, unless the citi- 
 zens performed him this service", he would lay waste 
 the rest'* of the countrv. I shall be slow to do that."* 
 
 f in is yet, still; with negatives, rniy longer. 
 
 fc ipx°l^'^h i'V'ffOf'a'i iM>'Vdu, {nXvOov) ^Xdof. See C5. note g. 
 
 VERBALS IN TfiOff. 53 
 
 § 20. Verbals in rsog, 
 
 114 These verbals are formed both from traris. and 
 intrans. verbs : and also from mid. {deponent) verbs, 
 smce they are sometimes used in a passive meaning. 
 
 115. a) They ^re passive, and take the agent in the 
 dative ; but they also govern the object in the same case 
 as the verbs from which they come. 
 
 116. a) When used in the neuter (with the agent in 
 the dat. omitted), they are equivalent to the participle in 
 dus used in the same way, and express : * one must, 
 ought,' (fcc. ; 'we, you, (fcc. must, ought' &c. ; or, 'is to 
 be/ (fee. 
 
 117. b) When formed from transitive verbs, they may 
 also be used in agreement with the object, the agent 
 bemg still m the dative. Here, too, they exactly a^ree 
 with the participle in dus. 
 
 118. Two peculiarides in Attic Greek deserve notice: 
 1. The neuL plur. is used as well as the neut. 
 
 sing. 
 
 2. The age?it is sometimes put in the accus. 
 as well as the object. 
 ..J^^' ^) ^^^^ a verb has two constructions with 
 diflerent meanmgs, the verbal adjective sometimes has 
 both : thus micxiop with accus. has the meaning oi per- 
 suade {nei&eL0 zwd)] with the dot. that of to obey 
 {nsi&eaaai^ tik), ^ 
 
 120. a) G. in*<^vftrjr80p earj rjjg dger^g, we, you, 
 ^ &c. should desire virtue. 
 D. inixBiqritiop iazl t(p CQy(f^^wc,you,&,c, 
 
 should set about the work. 
 A. HoXaan^ip ifyz^ rov 7Tai8a, we, you, &,c. 
 should pivush the boy. 
 
 b) daxrjie'ov lari aotthpaQfrn r, ) ^^" . ^^"^^^ 
 
 ^ ' ) tue. 
 
 * Perf. 2. (or mid:) irhoida, T trust, or ful tv^t • / am persuaded. 
 
64 
 
 VERBALS IN ttog* 
 
 c) nsiarsov iazlv avtovj we must persuade him. 
 nsiaTeov iauv avr^, we must obey him, 
 N. B. These examples may all be translated passive 
 ly. Virtue should he cultivated^ <fcc. 
 
 |i 
 
 121. Vocabulary 19. 
 To practise, exercise, culti- 
 vate. 
 Desire 
 
 Set about, take in hand, 
 
 Work, task, production, 
 
 Parent, 
 
 Attempt, endeavour, try, 
 
 Permit, suffer, 
 
 Restrain by punishment, 
 
 punish, chastise. 
 Run or fly to the assistance 
 
 of, assist in the defence of. 
 
 iTH-^vfim {gen. from im\ 
 
 on, ^vfiog, m^ind J passion), 
 
 im-x^i^^fOf {dat, from cV*, 
 
 BQyOV^ OVy to. 
 
 yovivg, io>g, o. 
 
 neigdofiai, (verb. adj. nsiQa- 
 
 riog). 
 idoD^ (verb. adj. eariog). 
 
 ^oij&ioii {dat.) 
 
 Ob9. These verbals should be formed from aor. 1 pass.™ by reject 
 ing the augment, turning Onv into riog^ and therefore the preceding 
 aspirate (if there is one) into its mvte (t. e. wr, »r, for ^a, x0). 
 
 5;^- Form verbals, from ii<^Ki^ pursue, <pciy(^ fiy from, w^cXtw 
 henejit. 
 
 Exercise 21. 
 
 122. The great work must be set about. We must 
 not shun the labour. All the citizens should confer 
 benefits on the state. He said that all the citizens 
 ought to confer benefits on their country {state), when 
 there is any occasion. We must fly-to-the-assistance of 
 
 * Augment i. 
 
 * From /3oij cry, Bii^ run. *. r u 
 ■ For if the aor. 1. has a different vowel, &c. from perj. pass., tht 
 
 rerbal adj. foliowa it, and not the perf. 
 
 M 
 
 X 1 
 
 DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 65 
 
 our country. We must set about the task of chastising'* 
 the boy. If the slave had done this, it would^' be ne- 
 cessary to punish him. If the boy should do this, it 
 would be necessary to punish him. He told us, that if 
 this were so," we ought to set about the task. We must 
 punish not only^^ my boy, hut also my brother's.* Pa- 
 rents" and poets" love their own productions. He said 
 that virtue should be cultivated by all. Whoever {oang 
 ap, 94. 2) ts" caught, shall be punished. We must not 
 he slow*^ to obey our parents. 
 
 ^ 21. Double Accusative. 
 
 123. Verbs of taking away from, teaching, conceal- 
 ing, asking, putting on or q^, take two accusatives. 
 
 124. a) Qjjpaiovg xQVf*^^^° ^Triaav,^ they asked 
 
 the Thebansfor m>oney. 
 h) ov oe aTToxQvxpa) ravta, I will not hide this 
 from you, 
 
 c) rovg noXefiiovg rtjv vavv dfreazeQi^xafjiev, 
 
 we have deprived the enemy of their ship. 
 
 d) Ifiddaxovai rovg naidag aoacpgoavvt^v, they teach 
 
 the boys modesty {moderation or self-re- 
 straint.) 
 
 e) tov naida i^t'dvas tov ^i'^mfa, he stript the boy 
 
 of his tunic. 
 
 125. Vocabulary 20. 
 Thebans, Qrj§aToi, ol 
 
 Money, XQni^(^ta, td (pi. ofxQrma). 
 
 ■ The art. must be repeated before * poets! or the meaning would 
 be * those who are parents and poets f in other words, hith attributes 
 would be spoken of the same subject. 
 
 • From xP^'^f^'^^ (^^ S» 'lote a). It is only in the plur. that it 
 means money, etc. Properly, a thing used. 
 
 f airctaBai in the mid. {sibi aliquid expetere) does not take two ac- 
 eiimti\e8, but one ace. ard irapa, or one noun and an ir^n. (Poppo.) 
 
^ 
 
 56 
 
 DOUBLE ACCUSATITE# 
 
 !■! 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 Hide, 
 
 Ship, 
 
 Deprive of, 
 
 Take away from, 
 
 Teach, 
 
 Modesty, moderation, self- 
 restraint, 
 
 To be wise, (i. e. prudent), 
 or in one's right mind, 
 
 To be mad. 
 
 Die, 
 
 Mortal, 
 
 Immortal, 
 
 Strip, or take off, 
 
 Put on, 
 
 Tunic, 
 
 Misfortune, 
 
 anoateQEoo. 
 aoicpQoavvti,^ rig, ij. 
 
 v>y)/axo),' dnoOvi^oxot. 
 
 ■&v7]T6g, rj, or. 
 
 dOdvarog, og ov, 
 
 ixdvcoy^ ) in mid. " on or off 
 
 ivdvoi,' ) myself." 
 
 ;fiT(»>', ' oovogy 0, 
 
 dvanqayla, ag^ jJ. 
 
 But for, 
 All but, 
 
 Phrases. 
 
 el firj did (ace.) 
 
 V n. e. just as much 
 lot). 
 
 oaov ov 
 as not' 
 
 ^ In aor. 2. this verb has /? for charact. 
 
 ' yavi, vecHs, vm, vaSv, — »/^«f , vcajf, vawri, vavi. These are the formi 
 as used in Attic Greek. 
 
 • alpita (rVw, &.C.), tlXoVf rjptOriv. 
 
 ' 6i8aaKu}, J( Jd|a), 'Ofiai, 6tSiSaj(a. Act. / teach Mid. / have (them 
 
 • TiUi^poavvrfv .... quam soleo cquidem quum iemperantiam turn 
 moderationem appellare, nonnunquam etiam modestiam. (Cic.) — oivrit 
 abstract nouns from adj. in uiv (especially) and others, auxpptav (from 
 odi salvus, <ppfiv mens), moderate^ temperate, — prudent. 
 
 ' Itaivonat, fiavovitai^ ftiftwa (with meaning of prc».)» t^OT. iitdyriy. 
 
 • dyfiffKb)^ OavoHnai^ HOvrixaj idavov. The perf. and aor. = I am dead. 
 « Svo)f go into, and also make to go into, — sink, enclose. Act. fut. 
 
 and aor. with the trans, meaning. Mid. iuofiat^ (Swoftat, iSvaaftrjy) en* 
 close myself=put on (a garment). ISw {ivBi — dCvoi, Jwj) has also thii 
 meaning. Hence iv6i<,i, put on : USvu), put off, strip (with fut. and 
 aor.) ; both of another : mid. of myself. 
 
 ' And under-garment with sleeves, over which a mantle was worn 
 tBt of doors. 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE AFTER PASSIV^, d^C.^ERBS. 
 
 Outside, without, 
 
 External, 
 Within, 
 
 ''^ 
 
 51 
 
 outward things. 
 ofX27). (f /^^ 
 spSov (also, in doors, at 
 
 home; hdov xaraXa^etw^ 
 
 to find a man in, or at 
 
 home). 
 
 Exercise 22. 
 t^ What is the lUeral English of ei fifi 6ia 1 
 
 126. I will put on my tunic. Do not hide your mis- 
 fortunes froni me. We will teach our daughters mod- 
 esty. C mother, do not teach youi daughter impudence 
 We wi I take away this from the woman. Let us not 
 teach these most disgraceful things to our boys. The 
 rest of the Thebans were there to see the battle. He 
 would have died^^ but for the dog. Let us not fly from 
 the all but present war, I will put his tunic on the 
 boy. II the enemy do this,^' we will deprive them of 
 their sln|) I should have died^^ but for my faithful 
 slave. This man has stript me of my tunic. If you do 
 not perfcDrm me this service," I will deprive you of your 
 
 P.r^ u. ^"^ ^^^ ^^ ^°"^®» we will kill him. He 
 killed all who were within. Let us love the company 
 01 the temperate. Let us not fear external evils 
 
 ^ 22. 77ic Accusative after Passive and Neuter Verbs 
 
 127. The accus. of the active becomes the nom. of 
 the pass, 
 
 J28. a) If the verb governs two accusatives, that of 
 the person becomes the nominative; that of the thhw 
 continues to be the object of the passive verb, as in Latin 
 Hut also, 
 
 129. 6) The dat, of the active sometimes becomes 
 
 3» 
 
R f? 
 
 1 
 
 >) 
 
 
 58 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE AFTER PASSIVE, &C. VEBBS. 
 
 the jiom. of the passive ; the object of the active coir 
 tinning to be the object of the passive in the accusative 
 [imiQinEiv, marevsiv zm ii). 
 
 130. d) Intransitive verbs take an ace. of a noun of 
 kindred meaning ; and (as in qeXv yaXa) of one that 
 restricts the general notion of the verb to a particular 
 instance. 
 
 e) Here the ordinary accus. of the object is found together with 
 this limiting accusative. 
 
 131. a) acpaiQS&sig* trjv aqxriv, haying had his 
 
 government taken from him, 
 h) £o)XQdtTjg imjQSTiSTai r^y diattav, Socra* 
 tes is entrusted with the arbitration; 
 Ttsmarsvfiai*^ tovzo, this is entrusted to me, 
 or lam entrusted with this. 
 
 c) ixxoTisis Tovg 6q)0^aXfiovgj having had his 
 
 eyes knocked out, 
 
 d) QHv ydXtty to flow with milk ; l^\]v^ ^lov, to live 
 
 a life ; xnSvvsveiv xitdvvov, to brave a dan- 
 ger ; noXffiov fioXsfieiv, to wage a war, 
 vnvov xotiACLG&aiy to sleep a sleep. 
 c) ivixrjGETOvg ^UQ^aQOvg trjv ip MagaOMVi 
 ndiriv^he conquered the barbarians in 
 the battle of Marathon, 
 
 132. Vocabulary 21. 
 Tu commit, confide, or en- 
 trust to, 
 
 Eritrust to, 
 
 Arbitialion, 
 Faith, 
 
 Disbelieve, disobey (a pei- 
 son or law), 
 
 matevcot (also with dat, 
 
 only, to trust a person), 
 Siaitay rjgf tj. 
 niatig, eosg, fj. 
 
 dmaTtm {dat.) 
 
 ■ 125, Tjote B. , »• J 
 
 • iyo) wtarevofiai (uir<J rivoj)* ^ «»'» trusted, conjided in, or beheved. 
 
 * <(iw, XP^^f"'* ^eivdu), ^n//aw (live, use, hunger, thirst), contract at 
 UttA n (ne' a), ^w, Cjf. ^-c- 
 
 t Fo7 the distinction between these words, sec ludei nnder'rFi- 
 
 tr«<l to 
 
 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE AFTER PASSIVE, <fec. VERBS. 
 
 Law, 
 
 Cut out, knock out, 
 Cut to pieces, 
 Government, magistracy, 
 
 Danger, 
 
 Brave, incur, expose one- 
 self to a danger. 
 
 Eye, 
 
 To sleep, 
 
 Sleep, 
 
 Fountain, 
 
 Flow, 
 
 Flows with a full or strong 
 stream, 
 
 Honey, 
 
 Conquer, 
 
 Victory, 
 
 Barbarian, (i. e. one who is 
 
 not a Greek), 
 To hold a magistracy or 
 
 office. 
 Milk, 
 
 River, 
 
 vofiog, oVf 6, 
 
 ix-xcntot), 
 
 xara-xontm, 
 
 «OT» ?^» n (also, begin- 
 ning: acq. a^i^r, or Ttjp 
 d^^v, used adverbially 
 for at all, or ever, after 
 negatives, when an ac- 
 tion is spoken of). 
 
 xivdvvos', ov, 6, 
 
 xtvdvveveiv xivdvvop. 
 
 ocpOaX/iog, ov, 6. 
 xotfidofiai (aor, -O^rip). 
 vnpog, ov, 6, 
 nriy^, tig, ^. 
 
 noXvg QeT, (the adj. bemg in 
 the case and gender of 
 its noun). 
 
 fitXi^ itog, TO. 
 
 nxdm. 
 
 nxTi, rig, ^. 
 
 pd^OQOg, ov, 6. 
 
 ydXa, ydXaxTog, to (R. ycf 
 
 Xaxt), 
 noTafiog, ov, 6, 
 
 Exercise 23. 
 
 133. I have had the arbitration entrusted to me. He 
 said, that he had had the arbitration entrusted to him (72. 
 c). The eagle has had its eyes knocked out. The foun* 
 
 • ^ta, ^vfiaojiat, IffiiriKa ', Mr. i/J/Jii/i' {fiowed) ; (ipUtca and icCaouai, 
 not Attic). 
 
 XI 
 
Ill 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 THE ACCDSATIVE. 
 
 terns flow wi h mi k and honey. If the fountains flow 
 both With milk and lioney, we shall become rich.»» If the 
 rivers had flowed with wine, the citizens would have be- 
 
 r. J .K '^^ *''"^^,'?^ "® ™^«1 («"'••). they will put you 
 to death. You will not be ab e (86*. b) to disbelieve 
 your mother. The rivers are flowing wUh a strong 
 lT.T^;■uV'' "^'1^ ^""^ «" *«''° been done. I shou"d 
 fci. J ^°"' *"' /"'■" y""-^ father. Sophroniscus 
 had his government taken away from him. He has had 
 his government taken away from him. Hares have 
 
 l„S %7 w ^' "' '"y ^° ^" "'^"^ comes from the 
 gods."' We must try« to bear what fortune sends» 
 
 twT'^"r^,f " ^"^Tl"^ '" '^' l'^"'« 'hat took p£e 
 there (m the there battle). 1 will not expose myself to 
 this danger The people outside were cut to pieces 1 
 asked the boy himself, whether (72. c) the fiver was 
 
 whrt'if J- '.'' "■ Tu^^f^"""- I asked Sophroniscul 
 What magistracy he held. 
 
 § 23. The Accusative continued. 
 
 134. a) The accus. is used after nouns and adjectives 
 where nata, as to, might be supposed understood. 
 
 BtlLt&c!''^^' *^' P''''^^"S ^^'•^ '^ ^ particular part, drcum- 
 
 135. 6) The accus. of a neut. pronoun or any gener- 
 al expression, is often used in this way after verbs that 
 would govern a ^i^/an^iz;e in another case. 
 
 Wb. c) The accusative is used to express duration 
 
 •/ time, and the distance of one place from another. 
 
 liJ/. a xaAo? w (xw/m, beautiful in person, 2'o)xoa. 
 
 Tjff tovvoftct,^ Socrates by na7ne. nXiJTrouat 
 
 ttiv xe^aXt^t, lam struck on the head, nav^ 
 
 ^ *« «v^ai/40i'£r, he is happy in all respects. 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 €1 
 
 &) uxQ^fiai avt^y; what use shall I make of iff 
 what am h to do with it ? ovx olda o,ti aot 
 XQco/Auiy I don't know what use to make of 
 you ; I don't know what to do with you. 
 
 c) noXvv XQovov, a long time, rgeig oXovg fi^vag 
 three whole months, ra noXXd, mostly, (for) 
 most of his time, dnexei 8txa azadiovg, it is 
 ten stadia off. 
 
 d. jovvavuop,' on the contrary, tb Xsyofievov, as 
 the saying is. 
 
 138. Vocabulary 22. 
 
 Whole, y 
 Body, person^ 
 Month, 
 Name, 
 To strike. 
 
 Unjust, 
 
 Do injustice to, injure, 
 
 Injustice, 
 
 Staff, 
 Insult, 
 
 Insult, insolence, 
 Reverence, 
 
 Run away from. 
 
 oXog, 1], or. ~ 
 GmfAa, azogy to. 
 fiJ^Vy fitjvogy 6. 
 ovofiay utog, to. 
 nXriaaoi (Att. nXyTTOi) : used 
 by the Attics only in 
 perf act. and in the 
 pass. For other tenses 
 Tzaxdoacay Jw, is used.) 
 adtxog, og or. 
 
 ddixm {ace. of person and 
 ^ also of thing.) 
 ddmuy agy Ij (ddixeiv ddixiavy 
 
 to commit an injury). 
 Qupoog, or, ly. 
 
 v§QiXa> {ace. : v^giXeiv eig ti- 
 va, to act insolently to- 
 wards). 
 v^Qif, eoagyjj. 
 aidsofiaiy taofiaiy et aor. 1 
 
 pass.: {ace.) 
 aTTodidgdaxo)^ {ace.) 
 
 • The subj. used as in 99. c. expresses more doubt as to what is tr 
 he done than the fut. 
 
 asrd ivatfTtov. * 
 
 /a. ' jjx'"^""' «Jf«<ro/.ai, iiipiKa. Upav (SpaOi, ipairjv, SpQ (yf, Slc.) ipSh 
 
THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 63 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 U 
 
 h 
 
 To have no fear of, to be 
 
 without fear of, 
 Mild, gentle, 
 Disposition, 
 To be distant from. 
 
 Use, do with, * 
 
 Stadium, 
 
 ^a^Qt(o (ace) 
 
 TtQaog^^ ngasTaf nqaof, 
 
 Tidog, eos, TO. 
 
 dnfx<o (mid. abstain from: 
 
 gen.) 
 XQoiofiai {dat,) 
 GTcidiog or atddiov. 
 
 Exercise 24. 
 ^^ Why is oarii used in 137. b 7 72, note p. 
 
 139. The boy is of a mild disposition. He told mo 
 that his daughter was of a mild disposition. If any one 
 of your slaves should run away from you, and you 
 should take him, what would you do with him?^* A 
 certain philosopher, Socrates by name, was there, to see 
 the man. Accustom yourself to have-no-fear-of death. 
 I am not without fear of the king of the Persians. I 
 have been struck on my head.^ ' He struck the boy with 
 a staff. Accustom yourself to reverence your parents, 
 insult nobody. The injury (nom.) which they commit- 
 ted against you. We ought to do^* what is just,*^ and 
 abstain^ from what is unjust. The city is three stadia 
 oflf. Let us avoid insolence, we must pursue what is 
 just. Let us insult nobody. Let us no longer act inso- 
 lently towards those who' manage the affairs of the 
 state. 
 
 * irp^of B. (irpao$ P. R. K.) takes all fern, and neut. plur. as if 
 
 from irpais, wpatiot n. pi. npaia. Plur. mas. np^oi, wpacis '. G. irpatuy : D. 
 npJiois, irpacat(v) I A. irp^ovg, irpaeTf. 
 
 * The verbal adj. from dirixttrQat is d<p€KTcos^ a word not found in 
 Passow's Lexicon, but used by Xenophon. It, of courw, governs the 
 
 gen 
 
 § 24. The Genitive. 
 
 Obs. The fundamental notion of the genitive Is separationfnxrru 
 pnccedmgjromi I e. the notion of the prepositions /row, out of 
 (B.) 
 
 140. a) Partitives, numerals, superlatives, &c. gov- 
 ern the genitive. 
 
 14L 6) The genitive is used with adverbs of time 
 and place. 
 
 142. d) The genitive also expresses Jie material 
 out of which any thing is made ; and generally such 
 properties, circumstances, (fcc. as we should express by 
 ^of: 
 
 Obs. 1. b) Our indef. art. must be translated by the Greek {def.) 
 art. in expressions like *once a day,' Ac., where 'a' is equivalent to 
 ' each.' 
 
 Obs. 2. e) The gtn. stands after possessive pronouns in a kind of 
 opposition to the personal pronoun implied. It may often be trans- 
 lated as an exclamation. The gen. is also used alone, or after inter- 
 jections, as an exclamation. 
 
 143. a) ol cpQOfifiot Twy dp{^Q(o7Toiiv, sensible per* 
 
 sons, ohdtig 'Elli^vav, none of the Greeks, 
 . rj fteyiarrj t w y voamvy the greatest of dis- 
 eases. 
 
 b) tgig ttjgrjfitQag, three times a day, nov yrjg, 
 
 in what part of the world 7 noQQO} rTJgrjXi- 
 xia g,far advanced in years, 
 
 c) edoaxd aoir oiv xQ^if^drajv, I gave you (some) 
 
 of my money, nmiv vdarog, to drink 
 some water. iaOieip xQeap, to eat some 
 meat (of a particular time: with the accus- 
 ative the meaning would be to do it habitu- 
 
 a) ffTscfavog vaxiv<y(ov, a crowfi of hyacinths, 
 dtfdQov noXXmv fTWf, a tree many years 
 old. tjv yccQ d^Koftazog fisydlov, for he 
 was of great consideration, 
 
 e) dtagnd^nvai rd f)u« rov xaxodaifiovog, they arc 
 
54 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 '1 
 
 piunderifig my property, wretched man 
 that I am ! t^*; dratdetag, what impudence I 
 
 144. Vocabulary 23. 
 
 Sensible, prudent, 
 
 Greek, 
 
 Greece, 
 
 To what place? whither? 
 
 Where ? 
 
 Far, far on, 
 
 A person^s age, 
 
 To drink, 
 
 To eat, 
 
 Flesh, meat, 
 
 Crown, 
 
 Tree, 
 
 Year, 
 
 Consideration, reputation, 
 
 Violet, 
 
 Lily, , 
 
 Golden, 
 
 Place on. 
 
 Worthless, despicable, 
 
 Arrive, 
 
 To be given. 
 
 Plunder, 
 
 Wretched, unfortunate, 
 Alas, 
 
 q^Qovifiog, og or. 
 EXXrjVf rivog, 6. 
 EXXdg, ddog, ij. 
 TtoT; 
 nov ; 
 noQQfa. 
 riXtniay ag, ij. 
 
 XQsag'^ to. 
 Gticfavogj ov, 6. 
 
 dsvdQOVf^ OVf TO. 
 
 tTog, sog (ovg), to, 
 
 d^ioDfia, uTog, to'. 
 
 lov {Fiov) ov, to. 
 
 nQivov, ov, ro. 
 
 XQ^o^og, xQvaovg.^ 
 
 im-tiOtjfii (dat,) 
 
 (favXog, Tj, or, 
 
 dgj-ixytofiai.'^ 
 
 dotiog (from ido&rjv, didoiifu,j 
 
 diaQTzd^m (fut. mid.) 
 
 naxodaifioav, <ov, ov. 
 
 (psv: oiifioi. 
 
 ayoi 
 
 • irhto, (irreg. fut.) nioftai, iriiTUiKa, nsirofiat. Intov, U6Bfiv, 
 
 iaeiu> (from iSoi), (irreg. fut.) iSofiat, iif,8oKa, iSfiSeauai. U 
 (from root ^ay\ ftSitrdnv. 
 ■ G. aog, 6»5, &,c. 
 
 • SivSpoy, D. plur. Sip8pe<Ti (also plur. Jic^Spea, Scviplon from another 
 lomc form). 
 
 • npivov Yob in plur. a collateral form icpivia^ D. icplvtei^ as if from 
 < ixvioiiai, 'i^oiiat, iy,.ai, iVtf^jjir. 
 
 THE GENITIVB. 
 
 Phrases. 
 
 AS 
 
 Till late in the day, 
 Willingly at least, 
 So to say, to speak gener- 
 ally, 
 
 / »« 
 
 fifXQt noQQoa trig W^QO^S- 
 
 ix(X)v slvat '' 
 
 tag inog einsTv ' (showing 
 that a general assertion is 
 not absolutely true.) 
 
 Exercise 25. 
 
 145. I will place a crown of violets on the boy's head 
 The mother placed a crown of lilies on her daughter's 
 head. Let us imitate sensible persons. Let us not imi- 
 tate worthless persons.'' I will be with you three times 
 
 ^r'^Hu'- .^^*'^ '""^^ "^^ («/>er5o^0o^great consider- 
 ation,3» the citizens wolld have put him to death At 
 
 what part of the earth am I arrived? I will give each 
 
 of them a golden crown. He told me that we oiicrht to 
 
 give to each of them a golden crown (71). If he had 
 
 not been advanced in years, he would not have died. 
 
 rhey slept {used to sleep) till late in the day. Let us 
 
 hear whatever the gods please^' (90*). All men, so to 
 
 say^^dmire rich men. No Grecian will do this, at least 
 
 willmgly, I will not drink any of the wine, at least 
 
 vvillingly. I will give some of the flesh to this eaffle 
 
 My property was plundered, wretched man that I am i 
 
 Alas, what injustice ! Alas for my possessions ! Lot is 
 
 ay from the greatest of diseases, shamelessness. 
 
 ^ 25. The Genitive continued, 
 146. a) Verbal adjectives with a transitive meaning 
 
 3 
 
 IdJi^T^ ^"""^ >P^'^^' ^^'\ *^' *'^"- ^'•^ ^"^^^^ i^ *•« sentence: 
 Wiv Hi ifovoa tiva' «vc aito\tiitcTai h i^v^n. See 151. a 
 
 .It- 
 
 ill 
 
6a 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 67 
 
 ;i 
 
 
 Il': 
 I 
 
 govern the genitive. That is, the object of the vern 
 stands in the gen, after the verbal adjective. 
 
 146*. b) Words relating to plenty^ wanty valucj &€., 
 govern the genitive. 
 
 147. c) Verbs relating to the senses, except sight 
 govern the genitive. 
 
 Obs. dKoveiv, hear, generally takes a ^en. of the sound, and an aee. 
 of the person producing it : but in neither case without exception. 
 
 148. e. f) The genitive is often used where we may 
 supply * in respect to ' in English. 
 
 In this way, the gen. restricts a general expression to a particu- 
 lar meaning ; to some particular circumstance, object, &c. 
 
 The genitive so used may often be supposed governed by Ivcica, 
 on account of. It is very frequently used in this way after words' 
 compounded with a privative. 
 
 149. a) jTQaxuxog roov xaXav, apt to perform (or, in 
 
 the habit of performing) honorable ac- 
 tions. 
 
 h) faarov iaii to ^p qigovzideay, life is full of 
 cares. al^iog'niAiiig, worthy of honour, dele 
 Oai xqriiidKovy to want money ; also dnaOai 
 tivog (gen. of perso7i), to beseech a person. 
 
 e) o^etv fiVQoov, to smell of perfumes, anrecj&ai 
 vexQov, to touch a corpse, axoveiv natdiov 
 itXaiovTogj to hear a child crying, 
 tovg dovXovg eysvae rljg iXevOegiag, he allowed 
 
 his slaves to taste of liberty, 
 ayevarog Ttjg iXevOsgiagy one who has never 
 tasted of liberty. 
 
 d) txsG&ai tivog, to cling to, or be next to. am- 
 
 rrjQiag sx^a&at, to provide (carefully and 
 anxiously) /or one's safety. 
 
 e) anaig u^qspcop naidtop, without male offspring, 
 
 lyyvjaia avt^ eifii yspovg, I am very near- 
 ly related to him (literally, very near to 
 him with respect to birth), daavg dtp^Qiov, 
 thick with trees ; thickly planted with 
 trees, 
 f) eviaifiopiX(o asTovTQOTtoVf I think you hap* 
 
 py in your disposition, oixreigto 58 tov 
 fidOovg, I pity you on account of your 
 affliction. 
 
 160. Vocabulary 24. 
 Apt to do or perform ; in 
 
 the habit of doing or per- TiQaxnxog, ' », 6p. 
 forming. 
 
 Apt, or fit to govern, 
 To govern, 
 
 To smell of, (i. e. emit a 
 smell). 
 
 ag^ixog, i^, op. 
 
 Ointment, perfume. 
 
 Touch, 
 
 Corpse, 
 
 Free, 
 
 Freedom, liberty. 
 
 Hear, 
 
 Child, 
 
 Cry, 
 
 Give to taste, allow to 
 
 taste, 
 One who has not tasted, 
 '^yhildless, 
 
 Male, 
 
 Near, 
 
 Race, family, birth, ' 
 
 Thick, crowded. 
 
 Think or pronounce hap- ,, " J 
 py^ evoaifioi%(o. 
 
 fiVQOP, OV, TO, 
 
 amofjiai. 
 
 PEXQog, ovy 6 (adj. " dead"). 
 
 iXev&€Qogj a, op. 
 
 iXev&egia, ag, rj. 
 
 dxovo). " 
 
 natdiopf'' OV, 70. 
 
 xXaim. * 
 
 yeioi). 
 
 aysvffTog, og op. 
 
 anong (one termin. G. dnai- 
 
 ^ dog). 
 
 oiQQfjv, ' ^r, EP, 
 
 iyyvg [gen.) 
 
 yipog, €og, to. 
 
 daavg, eia, v. 
 
 • i«r<Jf, appended to verbal roots, denotes fitness to do what the verfc 
 expresses. Appended to the root of substantives, it has the same lati- 
 tude ot meaning as loj (20, note n.) 
 
 • o^fi, J^/jffw, SScjSa (with meaning ofpres.) 
 
 • ttJtoCw, dKovaoftai, d/r»Koa, fiKovafiat, FjKOvoa. 
 
 "^ —toy the principal termination of diminutives: TraU, nai6io> 
 llKwe that lorm a dactyl are paroxytone ; the rest proparoxy tone. 
 ^ KXaioy{KXav<Tojxmt, KXavoovfiai) ; but aor. tKXavca. Att. kUo^ (d). 
 
 • In old Att. Sfaf,v, ^ 
 
 r t 
 
II 
 
 a. 
 
 I 
 
 68 
 
 Disposition, 
 
 Pity, 
 
 Suffering, affliction, 
 
 Worthy, 
 
 Honour, 
 
 Want, beseech, 
 
 Full of, 
 
 Life, 
 
 Cares, 
 
 Not at all. 
 
 Who in the world? 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 jQonog^^ ov, 6, 
 
 oUteigm, 
 
 nd&ogy eog (ovg) to {plur 
 
 " the passions"). 
 a^iog, a, ov, 
 
 dtofiai {'Tiaofiaiy -ii&rii), 
 ueatog, i^, ov, 
 
 TO ^'^V. 
 
 (fQOvudeg, ai (pi. c(q}Qovzigi) 
 ovdsv, ^//5«V, often followed 
 by Tt : ovdtv n, <fec. 
 
 Jig 710T8 /■ 
 
 What is the yerbal adj. in reos from sviaifiovi^ia 7 evSatfiovurlos, 
 What is the meanino^ of ^jf^taOat with gen. 7 149. d. 
 
 Exercise 26. 
 
 151. I asked whether (72. c) the children of the judge 
 were in the habit of performing just actions. If you are 
 in the habit of performing just actions, you will be hap- 
 py. I will make the boy fit to govern men. I am not 
 at all in want of money. I would not touch a corpse, at 
 least willingly. If the physician had been present, my 
 child would not have died. Let us ask^he next (sub- 
 jects) to these. I think you happy on account of youi 
 virtue. They pitied the mother on account of her afflic- 
 tion. The boy is nearly related to Socrates (149. e). 
 He told me that the boy was very nearly related to So- 
 crates. We ought to think the temperate happy. I would 
 not willingly/ touch a corpse.' I asked the boy whethei 
 he thought life full of cares. What in the world am 1 
 to do with him (137. 6)? 
 
 f rpSitoi from Tpenoy to turn ; as we say, a man's turn of mind. 
 N. B. Nouns in oj, from verbal roots, generally change c of the roc! 
 into 0. 
 
 ■ itori (enclitic), at any time ; used with interrogatives, it expresaei 
 furprise. 
 
 • Udw ilvai is confined to negatiye sentencet. 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 Exercise 27. 
 
 60 
 
 152. Who in the world admires these thinss ? Who 
 m the world is this ? If these things are so, let us care- 
 fully provide for our safety. Let us speak what' comes 
 
 iwl ^T^ t^'^!!"''' What inthe wo^TdareJoi adm" 
 g? I asked the judge, what in the world the citizens 
 were admiring. The boy is nearly related to Sophronis- 
 cus. Xenochdeswillbegeneralwiththree others 2 » Let 
 us rule over our passions. We must set about" the task 
 of ruling over our passions. He told me that he was 
 one-who-had-never-tasted-of liberty. Let uscling toour 
 liberty He told me that the whole««' country was thickly 
 
 fctl7/f ''""% u^^1 J"^^.' ^^ ^"^^ ^^^^^^y «^ honour, 
 wnat in the world shall we do with the boy ? 
 
 § 26. The Genitive continued, 
 
 153. a) Most verbs that express such notions as/ree- 
 
 tngfrom, keeping off from, ceasing from, 
 deviating or departing from, ^o,. govern 
 the gen, 
 
 h) Most verbs that express remembering ox for- 
 getting ; caring for or despising ; spar- 
 ing; aiming at or desirifig ; ruling over 
 or excelling ; accusing of or condemning, 
 <fcc. govern the genitive; birt not without 
 many exceptions. 
 
 154. Vocabulary 25. 
 
 (Verbs governing the gtniiivt: the transitive ones with accnu 
 
 also, of course.) 
 
 Tofieefrom, «;r«Uazra, (y) ' also, '*to 
 
 come out of an affair," 
 '^^come off" ^^ get off" fx, 
 itno. Mid. " take oneself 
 off." Aor. 2. pass, with 
 mid. meaning. 
 
70 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 71 
 
 Exclude from, 
 Make to cease, 
 Leave off, desist from, 
 Miss, err, 
 
 Differ, 
 
 Way, 
 
 Chase, hunting, 
 
 Sea, 
 
 Disease, 
 
 Physician, 
 
 With impunity 
 
 Toil, labour. 
 Market-place, 
 Heavy-armed soldier, Hop- 
 
 navo) {mid, " cease*^. 
 
 a^aQTCLvca ' (also to sin, tig 
 or nsQi with accua 
 against.) 
 
 diacptgoa (60, note b). 
 
 odog, ov, fj. 
 
 Oi^Qtty ag, rj. 
 
 '&a).aaaa, rig, f{. 
 
 foaog, ov, rj. 
 
 'aTQog, ov, 6, 
 
 XaiQuv {part, literally re* 
 joicmg"). 
 
 novog, ov, 6 (also " trouble"). 
 
 ayoQci, ag^ tj. 
 
 onXitrjg, ov, 6. 
 
 The boy is desisting from the chase. If I had knowp 
 tliis, I would not have tried at aW* to persuade him. 
 
 Exercise 28. 
 
 • 
 
 155. Death will free us from all our toils. They 
 will exclude the Persians from the sea. He told me, 
 that the Athenians were excluding the Persians from 
 the sea. They are here to exclude (72. h) the Grecian * 
 Hoplites from the market-place. Speaking" fast is a 
 different thing {differs) from speaking well. A good 
 king does not at allt differ from a good father. The 
 physician was there, that he might free the boy from 
 his disease. He told me, that the physician had 
 missed his way. If the judge had been there, you would 
 not have escaped with impunity. If the king is there, 
 they will not escape with impunity. They who have 
 Binned' against the state, will not escape with impunity. 
 
 * In Attic Greek, ctpyo) is exclude, eipyw includo. (B.) 
 
 * d/iapriifo), anapTTi<roiiai, ii^a^Ti\Ka. riftdprov. 
 
 * Of the Greeks. 
 
 * oUiv Ti, not dpxfi" ' for ' at all* do^s not here refer to an actiom 
 
 \: 
 
 § 27. The Genitive contiiiued, 
 156. Vocabulary 26. 
 
 Verbs governing the genitive. 
 
 Remember, 
 
 Forget, 
 
 Care for, have any regard 
 
 for. 
 Hold cheap. 
 Despise, 
 Spare, 
 Desire, 
 Desire, 
 Aim at. 
 Master, 
 Overcome, 
 
 Get the better of, surpass, 
 Accuse, charge, 
 
 Condemn, 
 Impiety, 
 
 fitfiptjfiai.* 
 iniXav&dvofiatJ 
 
 oXiycoQso). 
 qieidofiai, 
 
 atoxd^Ofiai. 
 
 xgazta). 
 
 TTeQiyiyvofiat. 
 
 nattjyoQBo} {pass. •* to be 
 laid to the charge of"). 
 
 xatayiyvcoaxo).^ 
 
 aat^siat ag, ij {impious^ 
 dae^fjg. 87, note z). 
 
 • The third (paulo post) fut. is the fut. used for verbs that have a 
 pcrf. of the pass, form witii the meaning of a present : as fiijivrjiiat, ften- 
 
 Xavdavu, Xfiaojf XiXtjOa. i\adov. M.id. \avOavo^at, Xfiaonaif VAijff^ae. 
 iXaOdfiriv. 
 
 C YtY^f^Ko), yvdxxQuai^ eypojKa^ iyvtiia^un. Aor. iyvcjv. (cyvuVf yrdiflt, 
 yvoittv, yvw, yviavai^ yvaii). 
 
 Obs Karriyopco} may havc acc. of the charge or crime, gen. of the per- 
 •on : or, if no crime is mentioned, gen. of person. Karayiyvb>aK(>i has ac" 
 CVS of the charge^ or punishment ; gen. of person. In the pass, th* 
 ace. will of coiirse become the worn., and the gen. of the person remain. 
 
72 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 THE CHNITIVE. 
 
 78 
 
 , 1 
 
 'it 
 
 4 
 
 
 Piety, 
 
 Banishment, 
 
 Former, 
 
 Folly, 
 
 Laughter, 
 
 I at least, I for my part. 
 
 Far (= much, greatly). 
 
 Forefather, ancestor, 
 
 6 TIQIV (26). 
 
 yeXoaSf ooro^, 6. 
 
 noXv, 
 fTQoyovog, ov, 6, 
 
 Exercise 29. 
 O* What is the usual opt. of contracted verba 1 oirjv, <inv' 
 
 157. I remember my former^ ^ troubles. They 
 asked him whether he despised the Persians. Do not 
 despise your neighbour. Let us spare our money. 
 They accuse the judge himself of injustice. They con- 
 demned them all to death (156, note g). Do not aim at 
 producing'^ laughter. The men of the present day* 
 have forgotten the virtue of their ancestors. Much in- 
 justice is laid to the charge of Xenoclides. The father 
 of Xenoclides was found guilty-^ of impiety. Most 
 persons desire money. Let us master our desires. Do 
 not desire the property'" of your neighbour. Let us fly 
 from the company of the impious. Let us not only 
 speak well of the pious, but let us also confer benefits^' 
 upon them. 
 
 Exercise 30. 
 
 158. They have condemned Sophroniscus to banish 
 ment (156, note g). He accuses the others of folly. If 
 you had done this,^* I for my part should have accused 
 you of folly. If you do this, 1 for my part shall accuse 
 you of folly. If any one should do this, the prudent 
 would accuse him of folly. He said that, if any man 
 did this, the prudent would accuse him of folly. I think 
 you happy on account of your piety (149. /). This boy 
 
 far' surpasses his brother in virtue {dat.) Alas what 
 folly I" These things happened in the time of «• our 
 forefathers. He said, that to be prosperous was not in 
 our (own) power.*' 
 
 ^ 28. The Genitive contifiued, 
 
 159. a. b) After verbs of price and raZwe, the price 
 or vahie is put in the genitive. 
 
 160. After verbs that express or imply exchange, the 
 thing /or which we exchange another is put in the 
 genitive, 
 
 161. d. e) A noun of tiine is put in 'the gen, in an- 
 swer to the questions when 7 and since, or within what 
 time 7 
 
 If :he point of time is defined by a numeral adjective, the time 
 ichen is put in the dalive: it stands however in the gen. with the 
 Jormer, the »ame^ each^ &c, 
 
 1^2. /. g) The gen, expresses the part bt/ which a 
 person teads, takes, or gets hold of any thing. 
 
 162*. a) dgaxfi^g ayogd^eivTi, to buj/ something for 
 a drachma. 
 
 b) nXsiarov^ tovto tifiojfiai, lvalue this at a 
 
 very jiigh price (very highly). 
 
 c) TQetgfiPag xatt^t^xe tovinnovjie laid down 
 
 three mincB for the horse. 
 XQrmara rovroov TTQartEiai, he exacts the 
 money {ox payment) for this. 
 
 d) yrxToV, by night ; rjfitgag, by day ; xQorov 
 
 avxpovffor a considerable time. 
 
 e) TioXX^p rjfiegmv oif fiSfieXszijxaf I have 7ioi 
 
 practised for many days. 
 /) Xa^M (generally Xu^ia&ai) nod 6 g, to take 
 
 * woXgf, itXtiuv or jrXtw*', n>Moroi. 
 
r 
 
 J', 
 
 
 r If 
 
 IP 
 
 flf 1 
 
 ti 
 
 
 
 74 
 
 THE GENITIVB. 
 
 (a person) by the foot a/fif x'<^^^* '• 
 
 /earf by the hand. • 
 
 hv XvHov imv oSTODf x^arw /g'C^ AoZ(f o/ 
 
 <Ac wolf by the ears. 
 A) tovto ovx iativ avdqog (Tog)Ov, this is nol 
 
 the part of a wise man. 
 i) ovnavtog shat, not to be a thing that every 
 
 body can do. iavtov thai, to be one's 
 
 own master. 
 
 163. Vocabulary 27. 
 Purchase, buy, 
 
 Drachma, 
 To value, 
 Mina, 
 Lay down, 
 
 To exact, to exact pay- 
 ment, 
 
 ayogd^oj ' {properly "am in 
 the market-place,'* ayogd) 
 
 Tifidofiai. 
 
 aaTa-tix^rjiii. 
 TTQaTieaOai. 
 
 Considerable,long(oftime.) avxvog, i 6v [prop, "con- 
 tinuous"). 
 
 To practice. 
 To take hold of, 
 To get hold of, 
 Equestrian exercises. 
 
 fielExdoi. 
 
 Xa^Eo&ai (92, note»). 
 
 iiQat£(o (prop. " to master**). 
 
 ta inntxd. 
 
 Exercise 31. 
 
 164. The king will not fight (these) ten days. !No 
 one has arrived for a long time. I should like to pur- 
 chase'** this for three minae. It is the part of a good man 
 
 » (a) The being or having what the root denotes, ia expressed by 
 verbs, do,, lo), rfw, ayjatoj (^rro.), u^oi, .'^o,. (6) The making a thing 
 into, or furnishing it with what the root denotes, is expressed by 
 verbs in 6o), i^o), i^o)p (s), alvu» 
 
 Obs. These meanings are not invariably owerved ; e. g. those m 
 Cat are set down as belonging to both classes. The least subject to 
 thange are those in ito, du), da>. (R.) 
 
 m^ 
 
 COMPARISON. 
 
 75 
 
 to confer benefits upon his friends. He told me that he 
 valued this very highly. He said that if he had a talent, 
 he would lay it down for this horse (102). It is not 
 every man that can master" his desires. He took hold 
 of the boy by his foot. The mother leads her daughter 
 by the hands. J have not practised equestrian exercises 
 for a long time. Two dogs had got hold of the same 
 wolf by the ears. Three dogs had got hold of the wolf; 
 by the same ear. The boys are practising equestrian 
 exercises. They exact payment for the horse. If you 
 care for yourself, provide for your safety. If they cared 
 for the boy, they would not do this. I had got hold of 
 the wolf itself by the ears. It is not every man who can 
 get hold of a wolf by the ears.'' It is not every man 
 that is-without-fear-of death. A slave is not his own 
 master. I will go away by night. The Scythians went 
 away by night. 
 
 V i ^vyv A 
 
 § 29. Comparison. 
 
 166. a) The thing with which another is compared, 
 is put in the genitive. 
 
 The fuller construction is with ^, than ; which however is used 
 only where the genitive cannot be employed. 
 
 6) The gen. is sometimes used, where it is not the immediate ob 
 ject of comparison : e. g. in the phrase, *fa>X«o»' t^iov ^6stq^ the things 
 compared are not '/' and ^your singing i* but ^my singing' and 
 ' yours.* 
 
 166. c) Greater, <fec. than ever, than at any other 
 time, is expressed by using avtogj before the gen. oi 
 the reciprocal pronoun. 
 
 167. d. e) Too great, &c. is expressed by the com- 
 parative with Tf xard > before a stibstantive ; ^ ^aze be- 
 fore a verb in the infinitive. 
 
 k To get hold of, &,c. 
 ' Or 1> Kp6i, 
 
 is not the part of, &c. 
 
 S 
 
78 
 
 COMPARISON. 
 
 COMPARISON. 
 
 77 
 
 168. a) fisiXtov Ifiovy taller (greater) thaii L 
 
 h) >{dXXTov ifiov adeigy you sifig better (more 
 beautifully) than /(do). 
 
 c) dvvaraTSQoi avzot avrav'^ iyiyvovto, they 
 
 became more powerful than ever (lite- 
 rally, more powerful themselves than 
 themselves, i. e. than themselves were at 
 any other time). 
 
 d) fisi^a ij xaia Sdxgva nenop&evai, to have 
 
 suffered afflictions too great for tears. 
 nnQog fisi^ajf ? 3<a^* av^QtoTJOv," a 
 
 corpse of superhuman size. 
 orrXa nXeo) tj xata rovg vexgovg, more 
 
 arms than could have been expected 
 
 from the number of the dead {quam pro 
 
 numero). 
 
 e) vBcoTEQoi da IV ?jwars eidtvai olmv natiqaif 
 
 i(jTfQt]VTai, they are too young to know 
 what fathers they have lost. 
 
 168*. Vocabulary 28. 
 
 Sing, fjSoi.' 
 
 Sing better, xdXXTov adetv. 
 
 Powerful, dvratogf jf, 6v. 
 
 ^^^h ddxQVOVf OV, TO. 
 
 Suffer, ndaxm.p 
 
 Arms, SnXa.^ 
 
 Yo"ng, fiog.d, 6v, 
 
 Deprive, azegm:' dnoaTSQtm. 
 
 Dance, x^Q^^^' 
 
 Master, teacher, diddaxaXog, ov, 6. 
 
 ■ So in SUperl. icivSraros aavroi ^irda^ • 
 
 ■ Literally, greater^ than in proportion to (or actor Jing fo) man. 
 • aSu) (dei6(i})ffut. faonai, but aor. J|ff^4^ 
 
 f 7ra<T;^a), irtiaoftaif iriiroyda. Ivadov. 
 
 q Properly, instruments or tools of Jany kind. 
 
 This verb is most common in the>aM. form, with fxxX. mid., in the 
 •ease, am deprived of : — tTrtpovfint, aTe^f,a<ff,at, iffrfpij/ior. iirupfidtjv, &.C. 
 
 ^dfoarepiu (124, c) is more common than oTcpcu. [arepioKu ia the 
 oommon form of the pres. act : eripoftat of the pres. pass.] 
 
 Pupil, 
 
 /ia&Tjrtjg, ov, 6. 
 
 Words that go with comparatives to mark the degree of excess or 
 
 defect. 
 
 Still, 
 Much, 
 
 Little, a little, 
 The— the 
 
 ezL 
 
 noXX^.* 
 oXiycp. 
 
 ocTQ) — roaovToy (quanta — 
 tanto). 
 
 Exercise 32. 
 
 169. The boy is taller than his father. The boy is 
 wiser than his master. The daughter sings better than 
 her mother. You have become more powerful than 
 ever (108. c). The Athenians have become more pow- 
 erful than ever. The good judge is suffering afflictions 
 too great for tears (167. d). More arms were taken than 
 could have been expected from the number of the dead 
 (167. d). He told me, that the corpse was of a super- 
 human size. If I had practised, I should have sung* 
 better than my mother. If you do this, you will be- 
 come more powerful than ever. If they were to do^» 
 this, they would become more powerful than ever. If 
 they had done this, they would have become more pow- 
 erful than ever. He said that, if they did this, they 
 would become more powerful than ever ( 102). He said 
 that, if they had done this, they would have become 
 more powerful than ever. He is too wise (167. e) to be 
 deceived by his slave. The masters are too wise to be 
 deceived by their pupils. The pupils practise by night, 
 that they may become wiser than their masters. He 
 said that he should have died butfor^* the dog. The 
 boys dance better than their masters. Practise virtue, 
 that you may become really wise. They are too young 
 to know that virtue ought^* to be desired. The boy is 
 Btill taller than his father. The girl is a little taller than 
 
 • Sometimes the ace. is used ; /i£y<7, ttoXv^ &c. 
 
 • Imperf. because the meaning is, * I should now be a better singer. 
 
79 
 
 COMPARISON. 
 
 COMPARISON. 
 
 79 
 
 ^^ 
 
 / 
 
 her mother. The daughter sings much better than hei 
 mother The more they have, the more they desire. 
 
 ^ 30. Comparison continued, 
 
 170. a) Two comparatives are to be translated by 
 more — than^ or rather — than, with the positive. 
 
 For adverbs it is often convenient, as in the example, to use a 
 
 substantive. 
 
 171. h) (ag and on (like the Latin quam) are used to 
 strengthen superlatives. (So also on(agj J, <fcc.) 
 
 172. d. e) ei Tig xal aXXog {si qtiis alius), and elg avriQ 
 {tinus omnium maxime), have the force of superlatives. 
 
 (£tf yt avijp b)v is also used.) 
 
 173./) negiTtog {exceeding, over and above), and 
 adjectives in -nXdaiog {-fold), govern the genitive from 
 their comparative meaning. 
 
 174. a) ta^vzEQa ^ aocpdtBQa {Herod,), with 
 more haste than wisdom, 
 h) (og rdxioTa, as quickli/ as possible, cty^ (o g 
 avvGJov ngoa^saav, they came up as 
 silently as possible, on fityiatog/us great 
 as possible, A/f 
 
 c) oaovg ijdvvaro nXsiGTOvg'' ux^goiaag, 
 
 having collected as many men as he 
 possibly could. 
 
 d) xaineQf it rig xaJ aXXog^ ej^sig ngog ra hrj fit- 
 
 Xaivav TTjv T^t/a, though if any body has 
 black hair for his years, it is you {i. e, 
 you have remarkably black hair for your 
 years). 
 
 e) tovg aymvi^ofitvovg nXeTara elg dvt^g Svtdfief^g 
 
 mqieXetv, being able to be of more service 
 
 • Or, 5ti vXciarovs dOpoiaas, 
 
 to the contending parties, than any othei 
 individual. 
 f) negtrta rwr dgxovvrmv more than enough (of 
 money, die.) noXXanXdaioi rui^v avrwr, 
 many times as numerous as ourselves. 
 
 175. Vocabulary 29. 
 
 Silently, 
 
 (Ttyg. 
 
 To come on, come up. 
 
 ngog-ttfu. 
 
 As many as, 
 
 oaoi. 
 
 Most, 
 
 nXeiaTOt. 
 
 Feasible, 
 
 dwarog, og 6v (fr. dvvreiv, to 
 
 
 perform). 
 
 Although, 
 
 xaineg. 
 
 For your years. 
 
 TTgog rd sitj. 
 
 Hair, 
 
 <^gi^, jgixogy n. 
 
 Collect, 
 
 d'&goi^oi. 
 
 To be enough or sufficient. 
 
 dgxtoD (fut. earn). 
 
 Many times as many or 
 much. 
 
 noXXanXdaioi, 
 
 Twice as many. 
 
 dinXdoioi, 
 
 Brave, 
 
 dvdgeiogf a, or. 
 
 Slow, 
 
 ^advg, £ta, v. 
 
 Slowly, 
 
 §gadt(og. 
 
 Gift, 
 
 dmgov, ov, to. ^ 
 
 To give a share of, give 
 
 fieta-didafii {gen. o thing ; 
 
 some, 
 
 dat. of person). ' 
 
 Exercise 33.' 
 
 176. One could not find (86*) a blacker dog than this. 
 They are more wise than brave. If any man practises 
 temperance, it is he. He received more gifts than any 
 
 ▼ In doing the exercises of the form : " if any one — it is" (174 d), 
 replace mentally *it is* by the verb ; " if any man practises temperance. 
 it is he"=t/ any man practises temperance^ he practises temperance, 
 4. e. he, if any other man (does), practises temperance. 
 
 In those of the form " more than any other single person^* replace thif 
 form by »Aer<rro tli ivfip^ or tU yt hvhp wi». 
 
 n 
 
80 
 
 THE DATIVE. 
 
 THE DATIVE 
 
 61 
 
 
 r 
 
 tt 
 
 ij i 
 
 t I 
 
 Other man. If you had dona this, you would have don« 
 more bravely ^ than wisely. I shall collect as many 
 men as possible (174. c). The Persians came on as 
 slowly as possible. He has injured the state more than 
 any other single person. He has collected as many 
 ships as possible. When you have collected^' as many 
 men as possible, march against Cyrus. The just judge 
 has been of more service to the state than any other 
 single person. The army of the Persians comes on as 
 silently as possible (174. h). If you have more than 
 enough, give some to your friends. If they were bold, 
 they would conquer twice as many as themselves. More 
 hares were taken than could have been expected from 
 the (small) number of the dogs.^* One could not find a 
 more beautiful woman than the mother of this Scythian. 
 If any man has been of great service to the state, it is he! 
 
 § 31. The Dative, 
 
 177. The notion of the dative is opposed to that of 
 the genitive, as its fundamental notion is that of ap* 
 proach to. 
 
 178. The dat. expresses the person to ox for whom a 
 thing is done : it also follows words that express union 
 or coming together, and those that express likeness or 
 (a) identity. 
 
 179. b) The instrument (c) the manner, and (rf^ th<5 
 cause, are put in the dative. 
 
 180. e) The definite time at which a thing is done, 
 is put in the dative. 
 
 181. /) The dative sometimes expresses the agent; 
 especially after the perfect pass, ahd verbals in tkg, 
 tog. 
 
 182. a) to. avta ndaxto a o /, I suffer the same as yoa 
 
 • Comparative ring, by rule 56 ; not plur. as in example. 
 
 Sr^asvg xata tbv avrov xQovov ^HgaxXei Ysvofie* 
 vog, Theseus who lived about the samt* 
 time as Hercules. 
 
 b) naxdaauv Qoi^dip, to beat with a stick. 
 
 c) dgofKp nagrjl&svj he came running (literally, 
 
 at a running pace). fisydXy anovS^, in 
 great haste. 
 
 d) qio^qif through fear, ydfiveiv voac^, to be suf- 
 
 fering from (or ill of) a disease. dXyeir 
 Tin, to be pained at a thing. 
 
 e) tJ TQitri TjfieQny on the third day. 
 
 f) tavta XfXexTai tj/aiv, these things have been said 
 by us. 
 
 183. Vocabulary 30. 
 
 To live about the same 
 time, to be contemporary 
 with. 
 
 F'ear, 
 
 Running, a running paco, 
 
 To be suffering, or ill of a 
 disease. 
 
 On the next day, 
 
 Heavy, severe, 
 
 Thales, 
 
 Solon, 
 
 Why? 
 
 Haste, 
 
 6^^ 
 
 yiara rov avrov )^qovov ycffiir- 
 ^o^ogj ovj 6. 
 
 dQOfAOgy ov, 6. 
 
 ydfiioi {xafioifiaif xtxftrjxcL, 
 
 exufiov. 
 ry vazEQaia. 
 ^aQvg, eia, v. 
 OaXrjg.* 
 
 2^6Xoi)Pf oavogf 6. 
 ri; or dia ti; 
 anovdi^f rjgf ij. 
 'HgaxXng, ^ eog (ovg) 6 
 
 r -^^^^ Qupoogy ov, 
 Verhwbergyvern the dative. 
 
 Associate with, keep com- ^ t>»jL 
 
 pany with, ^^* 
 
 Follow, inofiai.* 
 
 t>«n 
 
 GaXilj, G. GaXt'w, D. GaAp, A. GaX^v. (ijroj, jyr/, rjra, later.) 
 
 y Voc *H^<i«Xc{(. The eoc. u 'HpaKXcs occurs only in this ezclaiaa* 
 
 1. 
 
 • ivfiuat, lipoftai. Imperf. eiir^niiv, aor. lairSuriv. 
 
'^ 
 
 82 
 
 THE DATIVE 
 
 
 ^vi 
 
 
 Envy, grudge, 
 
 ^J'o meet, fall ill wiih, . 
 
 Blame, 
 
 Find fault with, rebuke. 
 
 Scold, rail at, speak calum- 
 
 uiously of, 
 Accuse of, charge with, 
 
 blame, 
 Plot against, 
 Figlit with. 
 
 Contend or dispute witli, 
 Contention, strife, 
 
 Xotdo(iiofint (XoidoQtoy takes 
 the acciis) 
 
 i'/y.aXiaj, 
 
 iTTI^OvXiVO). 
 
 Itd'xofiui, 
 
 tQig, tdogj rj (ace. iotSa et 
 
 , *?*")• 
 OQyl^ofiat, 
 
 Ofioioi;, a, 01*. 
 
 Obs. Verbs of "eproaching, &c. take ace. of the thing (as well as 
 dat of person), especially when it is a neut. pronoun, (i/«aA<rr, ic. 
 
 Am angry with, 
 
 Am in a passion or rage. 
 
 Like, 
 
 Exercise 34. 
 
 184. Do not associate with the bad (72. a). If you 
 associate (67. 2) with the bad,=« you will become bad 
 yourself. The boys arc following the dog. Most men 
 follow their neighbours. I envy you your wisdom 
 {7iote a). Do not envy your nCiighbour. Do not envy 
 me. It you had stfu'ck^' the judge with a stick, you 
 would not have got off with hnjmnity}* They set out 
 the next day. What do you charge me with (183. 
 Obs.) ? I asked whether (72. c) they were suffering the 
 same as the geometer. If you had plotted against the 
 general, you would not have come off with impunity. 
 He will not fight with the king (thesa) ten days (161 \ 
 I knew that he had suffered the same as I (had). I 
 
 • i^dovlbi takes gen of the object that excites the enry^or of the thiag 
 gnidged. (See 149./). 
 
 * rvyx^"*^* rtvionai^ Tcrvxixa* iroxov. With a gen. to obtain^ rw 
 <CTW (raoi from^ i^ith gen.) ; also, to hit (a nuiri— acertff). ^ ' 
 
 . i 
 
 Ak 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 THE DATIVB. 
 
 83 
 
 plotted against the king from envy. Do not contend 
 with your parents. I suffer similar treatment • to yoii! 
 1 should blame the citizens, if they had done this. He 
 scolds, 710^ 0/1 /y" the others, but also the judge himself. 
 I should have scolded the boy, if he had done this, 
 vvny arc you jn a passion with your slave? 1 have 
 not met you (these) two days. I am angry with those 
 who transact the affairs of the state. O Hercules ! 
 what t;j the world'^ am I to do (99. c) ? Through fear 
 he did not hit the mark. 
 
 Exercise 35. 
 
 185. Do you wish, then (99. a), that I should strike 
 • t^l^^yuh this stick? .He told me that his father was 
 sullermg from a severe disease. Thales was contempo- 
 rary with Solon. I admire the wisdom of Thales. 
 Hercules lived about the same time as Theseus. If any 
 one was brave, it was Hercules.' » O father, do not scold 
 your son. If you had kept company with the bad, you 
 would have become bad your yourself. I asked the boy 
 whether we ought to envy" our neighbours. The dam- 
 sel has very beautiful eyes.«« Let us aim' at speaking** 
 wel of al the good. Let us abstain from acting inso- 
 cntly. All, and you among the Jirst,***SLdmiYe these 
 things. Let us be contented with our present condition. ^ 
 He said that, if Xenoclides had been wise, he would 
 not have plotted against the general. He told me that 
 he wished to give his slaves a taste of liberty (149. c). 
 Let us keep company with sensible persons. Let us obey 
 the laws of the state. Lshould like to hear^* the boy sing 
 ipavL) Do not associate with those who* pursue what 
 
 I- i.?'^f^"^''V Y^y ^^ y°^ ^^^a^ge me with injus- 
 \!.ul ^^^^^"g^ fear he missed the mark. I admire 
 both** your horses and those^of your friend. The rest 
 
 • Like UingB. 
 
 * ri following the article. 
 
 • SVk 
 
 7ii 
 
 M 
 
 'S 
 
 ^s 
 
 
 
 •'J.'u.. 
 
 i<n 
 
 t 
 
 r«,.*l 
 
 Sr.V 
 
 :l 
 
 H5 i 
 
 
 ti>. 
 
 '^- 
 
 ft 
 
 V 
 
 '$. 
 
 mmmtmmm 
 
 
 *• " - • .V 
 
84 
 
 middlt: voice. 
 
 of the co7t)itnf^ has been laid waste by the Greeks. He 
 told me that we ought to persuade the judge (120. c). 
 
 § 32. Middle Voice. 
 
 The middle voice denotes: 
 
 1) That the agent docs 'the action upon hvn- 
 
 self; or 
 
 2) That the agent does the action for Ins own 
 
 advantage ; or 
 
 3) That the agent gets tlie action done for hia 
 
 own advantage. 
 
 The strict reflexive mcaninrr}? found but in very few verbs ; prin- 
 cipally those mat describe some simple action done to our oienver- 
 tons; as as to dolne, croirn, &c. The reflexive sense is often cquiv 
 alcnt to n new simple meaning; which may be cither transitive or 
 xntransitire, 
 
 187. The lenses that have the middle nicanin^ when 
 the verb has it at all, are 
 
 1) Pres. and impcrf. } . y 
 
 2) Perf and Phiperf \ ^^"^^ passive form, 
 
 3) Futures and aorists ?nid. 
 And in some verbs 
 
 4) The aor. 1. pass. i. e. of the jmssiveform, 
 ISS. Vocabulary 31. 
 
 To wash, ;.oi'«,.. M. wasli myself, bathe,-'' 
 
 strangle, andyxeiVy andylai. M. to strangle {or hang) 
 
 myself, umly/eaOat. 
 
 a) With new iiitransitive meaning. 
 
 To send, cnlXur. M. (to send one's self ) to 
 ._ , journ ey, aztV.taOaiJ 
 
 • II may have an accust. of a part of one's own p*«rson. 
 
 crtXXtcOa,, to clothe oneself , nnd to send for, lius aor. onCX^aQar. 
 tTiAAcoeoi) to travel, vToXfivat. 
 
 MIDOLE VOICE. 
 
 85 
 
 To make loccasc, nuveu. M. (to make myself cease,) 
 
 lo stop, cease, leave olf, 
 
 TTUViO&CU. 
 b) With new trantiitire meaning. 
 
 To put a man over (a river), M. to cross (a river, ace.) 
 
 rTEQuiovv (nvu). mQuioioOai. 
 
 To pluck, TiVfir. M. 10 mourn for (ace.) i. e. 
 
 by tearing one's hair, ti)- 
 
 XioOat. 
 
 (2.) 
 
 To make a man one's ally ' 
 
 (to form an alliance with 1 
 
 a person), i.e. for one's * ovu^aiov nouXadai tiva, 
 
 own advantage, 
 To place guards (over one's J 
 
 own property; for one's > xftraoTjJ(y«oO«iP g;rXaxa^ 
 
 own protection,) ) 
 
 To lift or take a thing up, M. to take up for one s ad- 
 
 uwm It. vantage, i. c. to keep for 
 
 one's self, mQiaOon. 
 To And, nQio'Auv. M. find for myself, procure, 
 
 get, fl'(i[(JX£(Ti>«f. 
 
 To provide, miqac-Aivdluv, M. to provide (for one's own 
 
 use), nvLnacy.ivaC,E(5i)(f.u 
 
 (3.) 
 
 I cause a table to be set be- / ^^.^..^[omai rQant^av. 
 
 fore me, \ ^ - 
 
 To let out for hire, ftta06(o. M. cause to be let to myselt, 
 
 i. e. to hire, fttaOovaOai. 
 To leach, dtliuaxHr M. to get or have taught, 
 
 dtdua-AfdOat. 
 To weep for, naraxlatHv. M. to weep for (one's own 
 
 misfortiuies, ace.) xaza- 
 
 nXaUaOai. 
 
 I> gad larttfti' 
 
68 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 Having jliown Iiis own 
 wickedjiess, 
 
 To enact hiws {of an a hso- 
 hite prince who docs not 
 niak.^ ihem/or himself). 
 
 To enact laws (of the Iciris- 
 latorofa//ee.s7f//(;, who 
 
 • makes them for himself 
 as well as for his fellow- 
 citizens)/ 
 
 
 pr?s°cd'byX"?Lr '°"""° '"'""''^ •" ""= »"'"" "> «'/ 1« " 
 
 Wicked, 
 
 To weigh anchor, 
 
 To conmience or engage in 
 
 a war against, 
 Sail-away, 
 
 «/(>e(r(f4/xr()ia', understood). 
 
 (^/cc.) 
 
 Exercise 30. 
 
 189 Solon enacted laws for the Athenians WnO. 
 >^nrsdves O boys. The son of XenocliJerhun; . n ! 
 sclt. Al ol them washed llieir hands and their feet Mi m 
 your neighbour's eyes. 1 will let you niy 1 ou e I will 
 take into my pay (Jure) as many Hoplit Js aVy/o^.i . il 
 The mother wept for her sutferings. 1 provided ^m^^^^^^ 
 
 mo Iier. The citizens, fearing, placed guards O ve 
 o ^e'd ovor'r ^ "• "'"^'i^ ^^'^''^'- 2^^) The soldic^r 
 me Athenians. If wc had been wise, wc should hiv«. 
 formed an alliance with the Athenians. AVIiat kind.of 
 
 ^ rT!"*" ^.^'^"^"^^ " "°^ however, strictly observed (B ) 
 
 XtivOrjt 
 
 ll 
 
 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 87 
 
 laws has the king of the Persians enacted? The boy 
 has shown his wicked disposition. If you do this, you 
 will get something good. 'I'he Athenians engaged in a , 
 war with the Persians. The Athenians having weigh- 
 ed anchor, sailed away. He told me that wc ought to 
 obey the laws of the stale (120. c). If the Athenians had 
 been wise, they would have enacted laws. The Athe- 
 nians crossed the river and attacked the Persians. 
 
 ^ 33. Middle Voice coniinuca, 
 
 190. Vocabulary 32. 
 1) To take,' uI{)hv. 
 
 To take, receive, ht^tXr, 
 
 M. choose (followed by «»- 
 Ti with gen.\ niQuaOau 
 M. take liold of, ).d(ieaOai* 
 
 2) Verbs whoso Mid. Voice Bccrnn to have a reciprocal meaning. 
 
 To consult, ^ovltvuv. 
 
 To reconcile (others), hu- 
 P.i'f/y)." 
 
 M. to consult together, de- 
 liberate: but also (with 
 
 * regular mid. significa- 
 tion) to counsel myself, 
 adopt a resolution. (In 
 the sense of deliberate it 
 is followed by h^qi with 
 geu.\ ^ov).evt(jOat, 
 
 M. to be reconciled to each 
 other {7r(>ng with ace), 
 diaXvtaOat. 
 
 3) iliddle forms of which there is no m/tre nnd wliich must there- 
 fore be considered simply as deponents. 
 
 I receive, dixofiat. 
 
 I perceive, am informed of," aiaOdtonat, 
 
 ■ a}pltJ, &,C. tJXoVf fiXiJiirji', '}piCti^. 
 
 MM 
 
 H«aM 
 
 -■.r»ii^^^'*M^.. 
 
 »* - * 1' 
 
 i 
 
m: 
 
 V 
 
 88 
 
 ^MIDDLE VOICK. 
 
 4) Aorifiia passive with mid. meaning. 
 
 Laid myself down : laid . 
 
 down, yaTixhOtir,* 
 
 Took myself off, dTi^indp;^, 
 
 (Irom mQuiovaOai, cfofiuaOai, ^oi^uaOai, ^axuaOai). 
 
 5) Some first futures oimid. form have a pass, meaning. 
 
 fmn-." "^'^^r^'''^^ ofioUy/^aoiica, crvlu^oiua, OQtipOfiU,, 
 fiom a)(3n.cA^«, ofwXepco, cfvXurzo^, tq^'cj^ 
 
 (aid, hcJp,) (conftss.) 
 
 6) To be on one's guard, 
 to guard against, (with 
 ace. of lhi7ig or person), 
 
 7) By (agent after pass, 
 verb), 
 
 (;,'»arJ,) (nourish.) 
 
 cpvhiizeaOai {mid,) 
 
 vnu (with ^e^z.): also,-7«^a 
 
 Exercise 37. 
 
 T ^^V, '^J^^y ^^^^^ choose to obey rather than p to fi'^ht 
 I would choose liberty before wealth. Xenoclides was 
 chosen genera with tinee others. The multitude often 
 choose ill He took hold of his hair (plur,) Let us 
 consult about the state. To deliboratJ ciuidcly is a 
 difierent thing (ri/Jer.^) from deliberating'^ wisely Let 
 us consult together what we ought to do.'" They con- 
 sulted together what they should do with (137 b) the 
 unjust judge. I cxercised-myself-in (190. 4) that art. 
 Go to sleep. Having said this, he took himself off. 
 1 he boy haying shown (183. 3) much virtue and tern- 
 perance died. O boys, receive this. Ihave received 
 tins. 1 he city will receive many times as much (174 
 /) as this (plur.) O slaves, receive sonie« of tiie wine' 
 Ihe physician being informed of wliat had happened 
 came in great haste. 1 crossed over the river in great 
 haste. If you do this, you will be greatly benehted 
 
 mipo^^tm. 
 
 4*1 
 
 ON THE PERFECT 2. 
 
 ed 
 
 I will guard against this danger. Having a pnhi in 
 bo»h my ears, 1 lay down. This will be confessed by 
 all. This will be confessed, wlllinghj at least,*^ by 
 none. The army shall he maintained from the kinp;'a 
 country. I am glad that' the children are well brought 
 up. The city shall be well guarded by the citizens. 1 
 feared the very men {those themselves) who* guarded 
 the city. 
 
 ^ 34. On ihe Perfect 2. 
 
 192. The Perf. 2. (improperly called the Perf. mid.) 
 prefers the intransitive signification, but never has 
 the pure rejlexive meaning of the middle. 
 
 1) If the verb has both the trariB. and intrant, meaning, thc;>tfr^ 
 1. has the former; the per/. 2. the latter. 2) If the intrant, mean 
 ing has gone over to the mid,^ or to the pass, (as often happens)^ 
 the perf. 2. belongs in meaning to that voice. 3) If the verb is in 
 trans , the perf. 2. has the same relation to it that any other perf 
 has to its verb. 
 
 193. Vocadulary33. 
 
 Perf. I. Perf. 2. 
 
 Open, wyo/j'CD^' . avt(ft)^af Stand open, avtoiya. 
 
 Arouse, lyaQca, tyfiyzQAU, am awake, iyQ/jyoQa. 
 
 Persuade, ndOto^ ntnuxa, am confident, trust, have 
 
 confidence, ntnoiOa. 
 
 Break, uyrvftt/ am broken, tilyu. 
 
 Destroy, o).lvni,\ 6Xoi).Exa, am undone, {perii\ oXojXa. 
 
 Fix, TZfjyrvfii,^ am fixed, am congealed^ 
 
 (fee. ntnrjya. 
 Ods. d)r?»t«/i», Karaypvfit, morc common than the simple verbs. 
 
 P ^XA<T» «. 
 
 Q Tliis verb prefixes the temporal to the syllabic augment— ii'/Myoi» 
 iv('':ia, inf. d^oJ^at. avi,,>ya belongs to later Greek writen* : a^«'jyii« 
 ?i i« U5ed by the older authors. 
 
 * aypx^fn, o(w, aor. la(a, liyriv (u). 
 
 » *X>C,ii, iXw, 6\u\cKa. uXtaa. *XX^/iai, 6Xoiifiat, ShoXa. <iXrf/ii}». 
 
 Bt>^-'9mmmmmtii 
 
 xV.hfi'«!?|^p«r.'! 
 
 
t^mi0t0^ammAliKmSm^»m,'^*3Jum ir ,ii ■ ■U* « 
 
 00 
 
 Pot, pitcher, 
 
 One more, 
 
 Gate, 
 
 Spear, 
 
 Breast, 
 
 To watch over, 
 
 To raise a war, 
 
 Safety, 
 
 Roman, ^ 
 
 Jupiter, 
 
 Early in the morning. 
 
 ON THE TERFECT 2. 
 
 doQV, ■ doQUTOfj to. 
 
 CTiQVOV, or, TO. 
 
 iyQr^yoQkvui niQi (with g^en.) 
 iyeiQEiv noXifiov (in pass. 
 
 arise). 
 acjqiuXetat ag, ij, 
 'Pa)fi(uo^, ov, 6. 
 Zevg, Ji6^\ 6 (voc. Zev), 
 
 TTQm, 
 
 Exercise 38. 
 
 194. The pitcher is broken. If we conquer the 
 Romans i?i one more battle,** we are undone. The 
 spear was fixed in his breast. All the water" is congeal- 
 ed. I broke the boy»s head. The boy*s head is broken. 
 I have watched over your safety for many years. Hav- 
 ing lost' all his property, he took himself off. The 
 gates are open. The servants opened the gates early, as 
 their custom was. Brave men have confidence in them- 
 selves. Then only (91. c), when they obey the laws, 
 will the citizens be prosperous. If we do not bear what 
 covies from the gods,'^^ we are undone. Who in the 
 world^' lias broken this pitcher? It is the part^* of a 
 general to watch over the safety of his army. O Jupi- 
 ter, the folly of the man !*" If a war should arise (6c 
 raised), we are undone. If you break one pitcher more, 
 O worst of slaves, you shall not come off with im- 
 jnaiihj.^^ My property was plundered, wretched vian 
 that Ia7}i!*» If any man is in the habit of performing 
 just (actions), it was he.«^ I have not met either my 
 friend or my brother's.* 
 
 o S6pv. 66paTos, &c.— Poet. iop6s, iopH of which iopi\B found in Attic 
 prose, m the phraee hpX iUXv. 
 
 
 MOODS AND TENSES. 
 
 01 
 
 § 35. Mditional Remarks on so?ne of the Moods and 
 
 Tenses* 
 
 195. a) TIjc fut. 3. (or future perfect) expresses a 
 future action continuing in its effects, 
 
 19G. Tlic fut. 3. dillbrs, therefore, from the Latin 
 futurum exactum, in not being used to express merely 
 the future completion of a momentary action. 
 
 197. b) The fut. 3. is, however, sometimes used to 
 express 1) the speedy completio?i of an action, or 2) the 
 certainty of its completionm the most positive manner. 
 
 198. The fut. 3. is obviously the natural future of 
 those perfects, that, from their marking a continued 
 state, are equivalent to a present with a new meaning : 
 e. g. ftffiptjfiaif xixTTjfzai. 
 
 199. Some verbs have (he fut. 3. as a simple future : 
 e»g. dtOr^aofiai,^ nEnavabfiat, xexo'xpofiat. 
 
 200. c) In the active voice a continued future state, 
 or ^future action continuing in its effects, is expressed 
 by tcTOfeai with perf participle; a circumlocution which 
 is also used in the passive (as in the example 205. c.) 
 
 201. d. e) The perf has also a subjunctive and op- 
 tative, and the future an optative, which are used when- 
 ever that kind of imcertainty or contingency peculiar to 
 
 those moods agrees with the time of these tenses. 
 
 • ^ 
 
 Only, however, when particular distinctness is required ; and 
 even then, the perf. part, with ciijv or u is generally preferred to the 
 regular ojA. and nibj. of that tense. 
 
 202. Tlie imperat. perfect is principally used in 
 those verbs whose perfects have the meaning of a pres- 
 ent : f4ffivjj<rOf 6cc. 
 
 203./) The third person of the imperat. perf pass. 
 marks a decided resolution : it is a strong expression for 
 let it he done, <fcc. 
 
 204. Obs. i!OB with the optative— and also the opta- 
 
 • • From ieu to hind. 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 i 
 
 -■:t 
 
 ■ ^%%t»3jfi.'^^'^mif^tm^^ 
 
 >-'sc-j 
 
,i 
 
 02 
 
 MOODS AND TENSES. 
 
 tive alone «— expresses a wish. If the wish expressed 
 has not been (and now cannot he) realized^ ei&e is used 
 with indie, of aorist or imper/., according as the time to 
 which the wish refers is past, or present. So mcpeXof 
 . {eg, e) alone, or with il&s, ei ydq or w^, and followed by 
 the infiniti^. 
 
 205. a) tj noXiteia rsXtmg itenoafii^aeiaif lav 6 roioi)- 
 ji - rog aifTfjr imaxonlQ gpv^al, the constitution 
 ^ will have been perfectly arranged, if such 
 
 * ^^fi guardian superintends it, 
 
 b) (pQu^e xai TJSTTQd^sTat, speak arid it shall 
 
 (immediately) be done. 
 
 c) ra dt'ovra iaofiEOa iyvo^xoreg,^ x«J Xoytof 
 
 fiaraioiv dnr^XXayfitvoi, we shall have voted 
 on the subject as we ought j and be freed 
 from empty speeches. 
 
 d) ei&s 6 vtog veviatj'aoi, would that my son 
 
 had conquered ! 
 
 e) slnev on ^Joi rjf^fQcc tqitti, he said that he 
 
 should come on the third day. 
 f) TtEnEiQaaOonj let it be attempted, 
 
 206. Vocabulary 34. 
 
 Constitution, 
 Arrange, adorn. 
 Superintend, overlook, 
 What we ought. 
 Empty, vain, useless 
 I am come, 
 I am gone, am off, 
 Endeavour, 
 
 noXiTHa, ag, ij, 
 
 xoafitco. 
 
 iniGHontos. 
 
 ra diovja. 
 
 paralogy a, 09. 
 
 ^xw ■ (with perf meaning). 
 
 oiXOfiai'^ {perf meaning.) 
 
 neiQuofiai, 
 
 ■ As in cj vaTy yivo 10 -trarpdq tiirvyicTtpoq. See also 293. e. 
 
 7 yiyvuiOKtiv interdiim de plebiscitis vel populi juasis (Bremi ad 
 Demosth. Phil. I. 54.) 
 
 • ij/ras \kov, ^w ; no Other tenses in use. /?i'o» «> ^kuv, to have ar- 
 rived at an advanced age {Herod.): a construction eeidom found ip 
 ^ttic Greek. 
 
 • otxoitaty oij(vaoiiat, ^Tifiai (pi^ajKo). 
 
 //I .A^. %. 
 
 ^ 
 
 / 
 
 ENSES. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Would that 
 
 To make to disappear, 
 If it is agreeable to you, if 
 
 you are willing, 
 And that too, 
 For the present at least. 
 As far as they are concern- 
 ed. 
 
 a^«, £?&•' &(ftXov'^ si yoQ 
 (ocpeXoVy (og ScpeXov, or mcfs- 
 Xov alone). 
 
 xal tavia. 
 to ye vvv ehai. 
 
 to em tovtotg eJyai. X/y 
 
 Exercise 39. 
 
 207. For thus we shall have done (205. c) what we 
 ought. For thus what we ought (to do) will have been 
 done (205. 6). I will remember my former^^ folly. He 
 told me that they had forgotten their former virtue (205. 
 c). Let us place the wise and good as guardians of this 
 most beautiful constitution. If it is agreeable to you, 
 these things shall {instantly) be done. Let these things 
 be done (205./). Do not attempt to deceive the gods. 
 If you do this, I am off. The physician told me, that 
 he would come on the fourth day. If you obey God, 
 your soul will be adorned with all virtues. Would that 
 the wise superintended the state ! Would that the 
 prudent managed the affairs of the state ! Would that 
 the wise judge had superintended the whole constitu- 
 tion ! Would that Thales were alive ! Would that 
 the man had escaped death ! If you obey the physician, 
 you will be freed from your disease. Would that the 
 Greeks had conquered ! They condemned him to death 
 (156, note g. obs.) and that too though he was {say: 
 ' being') your citizen. For the present at least, we will 
 use him. I don't know what in the world^^ we are,^® 
 for the present at least, to do« with him. As far as 
 
 ^ d<pci\b} (debeo), owe, ought. 6(pciXfi<TU). Aor. w^fAov {un-Atttc o<pe' 
 Xov) used only in wishes, us w^eXc fpi- ^(OKparrjs {how Socrates ought to 
 H alive), would that Socrates were alive ! tXBt kXcos eXa^es. 
 
 • XP^fTioi 18 the verbal adj. from xP^of^oi. 
 
 VI 
 
94 
 
 ON THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 that (person) is concerned^ I am undone. For the pres« 
 ent, at least, let us desist from the chase. O boy, may 
 you become wiser ' 
 
 § 36. On the Infinitive, 
 
 208. The use of the Greek infinitive is much nearer 
 to that of the English than that of the Latin is ; thus : — 
 
 209. h. c) It expresses the p?/rpo5e, and (6. ^)is often 
 used in the active, after both verbs and adjectives, where 
 the passive would be admissible, but less common. 
 
 Hence it must often be translated into Latin by the participle ir. 
 dus, or by the supine in u. 
 
 210. The particle wars * expresses a consequence, and 
 is used with the infinitive ; or, if the consequence be a 
 definite consequence that has actually occurred, the in 
 dicative. 
 
 211. ^ So — as to = ware with infinitive always. 
 
 \ So — that = wore with infinitive or indicative. 
 
 With the infinitive the consequence is more closely connected 
 with the principal clause, as contemplated or resulting immediately 
 and naturally from what is there stated. The consequence may 
 be equally real. 
 
 212. * So thaV should not be translated by the indic- 
 ative, except where the sense would allow us to substi- 
 tute therefore or consequently (itaque) for so that. 
 Thus : " the road was so bad that I did not reach my 
 inn till midnight" ="the road was very bad; conse- 
 quently I did not reach my inn till midnight :'* here the 
 indicative would be properly used, wcjtc properly an- 
 swers to ov7(og, or some other demonstrative, in the pre- 
 ceding clause. 
 
 214. a) 6 av^QOinog niqivnB q:t).ttr, it is the nature of 
 man to love. 
 
 * More rarely wc. 
 
 ON THE INFINITIVB. 
 
 95 
 
 h) nagixoi Iptavrov igmzav, I offer myself to bi 
 questioned. 
 
 c) ^X&ov Idelv as, I came (or am come) to see 
 
 you, 
 
 d) i^9vg axovsiv, sweet to hear, detvog Xsyeiv, 
 
 clever at speaking. ;ca>Lc;ios' Xa^tiv, hard to 
 take (or catch). 
 
 e) ovT(og avoijTog iaxiv, wars noXe^ov avr eiit^vTjg 
 
 aiQsTa&ai, he is so senseless as to choose 
 war in preference to peace, 
 ovtag avorjTog saziv, mars noXsfiOv avx eiQi^vrjg 
 aiQsiTat, he is so senseless, that he {actually) 
 chooses war in preference to peace. 
 
 f) q}iXo7ifi6taTog ^v, aaze ndvta VTZOfiStvairov 
 
 inaivEta&ai tv£na, he was very ambitious, so 
 as to bear any thing for the sake of being 
 praised. 
 
 214. Vocabulary 35. 
 To put forth naturally. 
 
 Supply, afford, oTer, 
 
 Sweet, pleasant, agreeable, 
 
 Terrible, clever, 
 
 Hard, difficult. 
 
 Senseless, 
 
 In preference to, instead of, 
 
 Peace, 
 
 Ambitious, fond of honour, 
 
 Undergo, bear, 
 
 On account of, for the sake 
 
 of, 
 Leaf, 
 
 (jpi'o) (TTcqptJxa et scpvv are in- 
 trans.; I am produced 
 = I am by nature, or it is 
 my nature to, (fee. 
 
 rfivg, sXa, v. 
 deivog,^ jj, 6v. 
 j^aXsTtog, J/, 6v. 
 dfotjtog, og, or. 
 avzL 
 
 siQTJvtj, rig, Tj. 
 (fiXoTliiog, og, ov. 
 
 VTT0-fitV(O. 
 
 irexa {gen.) 
 (pvXXov, ov, to. 
 
 • irapcj^caOai, mid. is also used for to afford^ without tmj pereejUibU 
 difference of meaning. (See example in 298. 6.) 
 
 ' — fof, an old pass, termin. (like twj, r6s), whence 6eii>6s terrible 
 »r»yv<f hateful, Slc (B.) 
 
 1* 
 
 
96 
 
 ON THE INFINITIVE 
 
 ON THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 97 
 
 Bring up, educate, 
 
 Very, 
 
 Wing, 
 
 Young bird, 
 
 Art, also^ contrivance, 
 trick, 
 
 Long, 
 
 Not yet. 
 
 Endure, bear. 
 
 To get teethy feathers, <fec.. 
 
 To give one trouble, to mo- 
 lest, harass, <fcc.. 
 
 TiTSQov, ovyto: ntEQv^, vyog, ^ 
 fEoaaoiy ov, 6. 
 li^vri, rig, ^. 
 
 fiaxQog, a, or, 
 ovTzoa.^ 
 
 qrvoo, 
 
 novov or nQayfiaia naqixtiv. 
 
 to advance.' This wine is pleasant to drink. It is the 
 nature of boys to pursue what is pleasant. 
 
 Exercise 40. 
 
 215. It is the nature of man (213. a) to love those 
 who confer benefits upon him. The city is a difficult 
 one to take. The woman is a terrible one to find out 
 contrivances. The man is unable to hold his tongue. 
 He told me that his daughter had been well brought up. 
 If you give me any trouble, I will not endure it, at least 
 {not) willingli/.*^ The eagle has long wings.'" He had 
 been so brought up as very easily to have enough. He 
 is so beautiful as to be admired by all. You are so 
 senseless, that you are always hoping for what is im- 
 possible.'^ They are too wise'" to choose war in prefer- 
 ence to peace. The young birds have already got " 
 feathers. The trees are already putting forth their 
 leaves. The child has not yet got (any) teeth. If you 
 molest me, you shall not come off with impunity.*' They 
 harassed them so, that the army was not able (jindic.) 
 
 » This word is often strengthened by the addition of ri (t.Ji t» ti). 
 
 * jrc5, irwjTorf, ever yet, ever up to this time. The former is joined 
 to ot), iif\ J the latter to oiii^ finSi ; and both relate to the past. OiSiirore, 
 urjSiirore, are Commonly employed only generally, or with reference to 
 the future. (See 238*, note on examp. b.) 
 
 * This verb has a double atigment : imperf. iivstx^i"it^t oor. iivsox^iinv, 
 ^ Aor. 1., VLB per/., has a different meaning. 
 
 ^ 37. The Infinitive continued, 
 
 216. a) The infinitive with the article in the (^en, 
 sometimes denotes a inotive or yurpose. 
 
 It may be considered as governed by IvcKa understood. 
 
 217. b) When the infinitive has a subject of its own, 
 the general rule is, that it stands in the accusative. 
 
 This rule holds good, when the injin. is used with r<J, (as in 
 221. c). 
 
 218. h) A preposition with the infin. may be equiva- 
 lent to a sentence introduced by a conjunction. 
 
 219. d) But when the subject of the infinitive be- 
 longs to and is expressed with the former verb, it is 
 generally not expressed with the infinitive. 
 
 The examples in 221, show that this rule holds good, whether the 
 subject of the infin. be the subject of the preceding verb or an 
 oblique case governed by it. — In the second example the accusative 
 would be expressed even in Latin : dixit sefestinare. 
 
 220. e) When the subject of the infinitive is omitted 
 because expressed with the other verb, an adjective or 
 substantive that forms the predicate with the i?ifin. is 
 mostly put in the same case that the subject of the in- 
 finitive stands in in the other clause. 
 
 Thus (in 221. e) vi6s conforms to 'AXi^avifMC 0c<J$ to iydj • irpoBiiiov 
 to avTov, Ac. — This construction is called AtlraclioTu 
 
 S21. a) hiixic&ri de not ^AraXdvTTjy 70v fi)} Xriarag xa- 
 
 novQyelv rtjv Ev^oiav, aiid Atalanta also 
 
 was fortified^ that robbers (or pirates) 
 
 might not commit depredations in Etibma, 
 
 b) ovdev inQuxOtj dia to ixeivov ftq noQeivat^ 
 
 vopcuoftai, 
 
 5 
 
 ^: 
 
 -IV 
 
 If 
 
 H 
 I 
 
ON THE INFINITIVB. 
 
 nothing was doncj because he was nol 
 present, 
 e) OVA OQ^^g ex^i to nax^g ndtsxovta afiv- 
 vsa'& ai dvridQmvta xaxoig, it is not right 
 for one who suffers wrong to avenge him- 
 self bt/ doing wrong in return, 
 
 d) dsofiai oov naQafisvsiv, I beseech (or entreat) 
 
 you to stay with us, scprj anovda^etVy he 
 said that he was in a hurry, avveinsip 
 ofioXoya, I confess that I assented, 
 
 e) 6 'Als^avdgog eqjaoxsv elvai Jtog viog, Alex- 
 
 ander used to say that he was the son oj 
 
 Jupiter, 
 BTzeiaa avtohg that Oeog, I persuaded them 
 
 that I was a god. 
 iSiorro avT ov thai 7Tqo-&v fiov, they en- 
 
 treated him to be zealous. 
 l^fCTTt fi 1 yevea&ai svdaiftovi, I 7?iay (if I 
 
 please) become happy. 
 
 222. Vocabulary 36. 
 
 tsixi^o). 
 
 reixogy sog {ovg) to. 
 xaxovgyog {xaxog et tQyov), 
 KaxovgyiUf ag, ij. 
 xaxovgytifia, atog, to. 
 
 To wall, fortify, 
 
 A wall, 
 
 Evil-doer, rascal, villain. 
 
 Villainy, 
 
 Misdeed, 
 
 To do evil towards, dc 
 
 harm to, to inflict dam 
 
 age on, &c. 
 To ward off, 
 
 To return a man like for 
 
 like. 
 To reraam witn. 
 
 Haxovgytoi). 
 
 ofivveip u tin (also with 
 dat. only, dfivreiv tiviy to 
 defend. In Mid. ward 
 off from myself ; repel, 
 requite, revenge myself 
 on, with ace, of person : 
 also without case, to pro- 
 tect oneself, 
 
 totg ofioiotg dfivfea&cu. 
 naqoLfUvm 
 
 l! 
 
 ON THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Say, 
 
 To feel or be thankful for, 
 
 return thanks for, 
 One may, 
 One might. 
 It is right, 
 Master, 
 Laugh, 
 
 q^daym {-^ give out "with 
 a slight intimation that 
 the thing is not exactly 
 so." Vdmel) 
 
 Xdgip eldtvai {gen. of thing) 
 s^san (licet), 
 
 Ig&mg ex^i, 
 deanozrig, ov, 6. 
 yeiaoi (with fut. mid. -acro- 
 fiai). 
 
 Exercise 41. 
 
 223. The city was fortified, that no one " might do 
 injury to the citizens. Nothing was done, because 
 (221. b) that villain gave us trouble. Let us beseech our 
 friends to be zealous. He said that he would be with us, 
 if it was agreeable to us.^^ I persuaded them that I 
 was a philosopher (22L e). I persuaded the judges 
 that Abrocomas was a rascal. It is a hard thing (65) to 
 conquer one's temper. He is too young*'' to have mas- 
 tered his temper. If you ward off from me this danger, I 
 shall feel thankful to you for your zeal. I will revenge 
 myself on him who has injured you. If you return like 
 for like to him who has treated you ill, you commit a 
 sin. You used to say (221, e) that you were master. 
 "We ought to defend the laws of the state. It is in our 
 power'^* to become happy. You may (if you please) be- 
 come a philosopher. He says that he will deliberate. 
 Nothing was done, because {prep.) all the citizens envy 
 the judge. He says that he will brave this danger. It 
 IS not right, that a citizen should plot against the con- 
 stitution. If all the citizens defend the laws, it will be 
 well. 
 
 ftriSeii, as a purpose ie exprcseed. 
 
r 
 
 100 
 
 ON THE INFmiTin. 
 
 ON THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 101 
 
 224. Vocabulary 37. 
 
 Preposition in. 
 Before a vowel ix becomes «J • it governs the ^en. and 
 means in general, out of, forth from. Hence, of 
 cause =tfi consequence of; from/for: ulso, of suc- 
 cess io7i of time. 
 
 Out of the city, 
 
 For this cause or reason. 
 
 This being the case, for 
 
 this reason, therefore. 
 After our former tears, 
 Unexpectedly, 
 
 «x rr^g noXetog. 
 
 ix Tuvrijg tijg aiiiag. 
 
 IX tOVfOV. 
 
 ix Twf TTQoaOev daxQvoap, 
 f J unQoadoxt^Tov {uTTQoadoxtj' 
 Togy unexpected). 
 
 Exercise 42. 
 
 ^ 225. We are now laughing after our former tears. 
 The men from {out of) the city are plotting against the 
 king. He says that he is watching over the safely of all. 
 The Grecian cavalry, unexpectedly charging the ranks 
 of the Persians, conquer (them). It is sweet to laugh 
 after troubles. The physician says that diseases are 
 from Jupiter. This being the case, it seemed good to the 
 generals to depart. The slave says that the pitcher is 
 broken. He says that he is glad' the citizens are rich. 
 He says that he takes pleasure in sleeping. He said 
 that the judge had an upper chamber, whenever he stay- 
 ed ui town. This being so, let every man provide for 
 his own safety. I asked him how much he thought the 
 geometer's possessions would fetch," if sold. I wonder 
 at what has been done' by the general. It is not every 
 man," that can bear unexpected (evils). This man has 
 inflicted more damage upon the city than any other 
 single person." Would that the physician had remain- 
 ed with (us) ! Would that the physician were here 
 Would that the physician had been here ! 
 
 n 
 
 ^ 38. The Infinitive continued. 
 
 226. Attraction may take place (that is, the predi- 
 tate substantive or adjective be in the ?iominative), 
 when the infinitive is introduced by the article or ^azs. 
 
 227. a) TTQog ro avficptQov ^aai, dia to (piXavtoi elvai, 
 
 they make self-interest the object of their 
 lives, because they are lovers of themselves. 
 
 b) txninnovtai im tq)° ofjioioi ToTg XeiTZOfievotg ehai, 
 
 they are sent out, on the understanding 
 that they are to be equal {on an equal foot- 
 ing with those that are left behind. 
 
 c) ovdeig tTjXixovrog eatco nag vfiTv mate, zovg fofi- 
 
 ovg naqa^ag^ fiij dovvai dixr^v^ let no one be 
 so powerful amongst you, as not to be 
 punished if he transgresses the laws. 
 
 228. Vocabulary 38. 
 
 It is expedient or profitable, 
 Expediency, utility, 
 
 To make self-interest the 
 
 object of one's Hfe, 
 Self loving, a lover :f self, 
 
 selfish, 
 Self-love, selfishness, 
 Transgress, 
 
 So great, so powerful. 
 To be punished, suflfer pun- 
 ishment. 
 Infinitely many, very ma- 
 ny, a vast number of, 
 
 avficpbQEi {dat.) 
 to GVfKfiQov : {tu avf4q)£Qovza, 
 what is expedient.) 
 
 TTQOg to GVUCpiQOV ^v. 
 
 cpiXavTog, og, ov 
 
 qxXavtia, ag, tj. 
 naQa^aivto'' (of a law, <fcc., 
 
 to break). 
 trjXtxovTogy-avTtjf-ovTo. 
 dixrjv didovai {gen. of thing, 
 
 dat. of person by whom). 
 
 f*VQioif ai, a. 
 
 ■ brl with dat. often marks a condition. 288. 
 
 » 0aub}, 0fi<rofiaif pi3r,Kay iffrjv. 0fi(7Oi and f/J/jcra, trtms. (i0nif Prfii^ 
 §a{tiv^ ffui 0Hvai^ 0ds.}—irapa0aivo} haS also per/. pa88. vapa0t0duai, aoT. 
 
102 
 
 ON THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 Ten thousand, 
 Soldier, 
 Country, 
 Treaty, 
 
 Excessively, 
 Excessive, 
 
 fJlVQlOL 
 
 OjgarKOJTjgf ov, o. 
 
 naiQig,^ Idog, ^. 
 
 cnovbai, mv (properly "li 
 
 bations"). 
 ayav, 
 6 ayav. 
 
 Preposition, aviL 
 
 Govems genitive : signification, ins^eac? i/; in prefer 
 ence to; (213. e) ; equivalent to. 
 
 Exercise 43. 
 
 229; Let us fly from excessive self-love. Let us pur- 
 sue the honorable rather than the expedient. They 
 choose war in preference to peace, because they have 
 not tasted the evils of war. They undergo every toil, 
 because they are ambitious. He says that a king is 
 equivalent to very many soldiers. All men, so to say,** 
 are lovers of self. If he were not ambitious, he would 
 not endure this. I am come on an understanding, that 
 1 am to be on-an-equal-footing with the other citizens. 
 Do not transgress the laws of your country. They bear 
 every thing for the sake of being praised, because (prep.) 
 they are excessively ambitious. Let us choose what is 
 honorable in preference to what is expedient. It is not 
 right, to make self-interest the object of one's life. It 
 does not belong to a pious man, to fear death excessive- 
 ly. It is not every man that can" master self-love. 1 
 have not fallen in with Abrocomas for a long time. I 
 love both the children of Abrocomas i and those of Phi- 
 lip. Every body aims at becoming happy. It is profita- 
 ble to men to be pious. If you do this, you shall be pun- 
 
 .i 
 
 P Properly a poetical fern. adj. agreeing with y»f. 
 
 « Nouns in as have the Doric gen. in a (for ov), when they are th« 
 aames o( foreigners, or of Doric Greeks of no celebrity ; as 'A0poK6iias 
 a 'A0poK6na. (R.) 
 
 li 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 lOS 
 
 ished for your villainy. All the laws of the state, so to 
 say,** were transgressed by this villain. He thinks that 
 the treaty has been broken. 
 
 ^ 39. The Participle. 
 
 230. A participle assumes an assertion; or rathei 
 states it attributively, not predicatively. Whenever it 
 is convenient to express this assertion by a complete 
 sentence, we may do so ; connecting it with the princi- 
 pal sentence by a relative pronoun, or a conjunction (or 
 conjunctional adverb) of time, cause, condition, or lim- 
 itation. Hence, vice versa — 
 
 231. a, b. c. d) Relative sentences, and sentences in- 
 troduced by when, after, if, since, because, although, 
 &c. may be translated into Greek by omitting the rela- 
 tive or conjunction, and turning the verb into a parti- 
 ciple. 
 
 In translating from Greek into English, the proper particle to be 
 used must bu found by considering the relation in which the parti- 
 ciple stands to the principal verb. 
 
 Thus, " I visited my friend votrovra," may mean, ' w?io was iU^* or 
 • because he was ill,' or ' when he was ill.' 
 
 232. e) The'Englishverbalov participial substantive 
 under the government of a preposition, may often be 
 translated by a participle agreeing with the nominative 
 3ase of the sentence. 
 
 283. g) A past participle may often be translated in- 
 to English by a verb, connected whh the pyncipal verb 
 by * and.^ 
 
 Of course, vice versa, the first of two verbs connected by * and 
 may be translated into Greek by a past participle. 
 
 234. a) yvfrj tig xnQ^ oqviv eZ/c xa{^' 8i((iatTjv fjfitgav (6ni 
 avt^ tiHtovaaVf a certain widow woman 
 had a hen which laid her an egg every day 
 
 }\ 
 
104 
 
 THE PARTICIPLB. 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE 
 
 105 
 
 b) ra xQ^fAara avaXcaoag anr^y^aro, when cf 
 
 after, he had spent all his moneys he hang* 
 ed himself, 
 
 c) i^Xsnof iau Xiynv nghg tjjv yacTTtQa, oora ovh 
 
 exovaavy it is difficult to speak to the stom- 
 achj because it has no ears. 
 
 d) yiyvoiaxovtsg on xaxd icttv, ofimg im&vfiov' 
 
 Giv avtcovy though they know that they are 
 hurtful, they nevertheless desire them, 
 
 e) Xfj'i^ofievoi ^6aiv, they live by plundering. 
 
 f) xQatmv ds Tjdovojv xai im&vfitoiv, diaq)e^cfioi)g 
 
 av aojcpQovoT, but if he gained the victory 
 over pleasure and his desires^ he would be 
 temperate in an uncommon degree, 
 
 g) Xa^mVf scprj, tovTov, ftaGziycoaov, take this fel- 
 
 low said he, and Jlog him, qixpag ^6 noi- 
 fitjv nhqav, to xiqag avzijg xuifajcy, but the 
 shepherd threw a stone and broke her horn. 
 
 235. Vocabulary 39. 
 
 A widow, 
 To know, 
 To consume, spend, 
 
 Stomach, belly, 
 The future, 
 To plunder, 
 
 Remarkably, in an uncom- 
 mon degree. 
 To scourge, flog. 
 To throw, 
 Stone, 
 
 yiYvtoaxoD.' 
 
 dvdXi(jx(o {fut. dvuXoia(o,aor, 
 
 dvdX(o(ja). 
 yaaiJQ, sgog, ij. 
 TO fitXXoy, 
 Xfjt^ofiai, 
 
 diaqjegovToog, 
 
 fiaauyooi). 
 
 nstgog, ov, 6 {niiqa, ag, ^, 
 in good authors, is a 
 rock,) 
 ^' xpJXog, )f, or. 
 
 Bare, uncovered, 
 
 Participles with peculiar meanings. 
 
 Al first, at the beginning, dQx6/4evog, ^, op. 
 
 ' yiyvuvKc^ yvwao/iat, lyvbiKa^ /yvwa^ai, lyv^¥, (j^yvuvj fvCs9t^ Y^f't 
 
 At last. 
 
 After some time, 
 
 With, {often translatedby) 
 
 ttXevj^v, oiaaf mr, 
 
 diaXtnwp XQOvov.' 
 
 txoov, dyoiVj q)tQ(0Vy XQ^f*^* ^S' 
 
 Exercise 44. 
 
 iCf- Obs. Sentences in Italics are to be translated by 
 participles. 
 
 236. I shall be happy, if I know myself , The judge 
 himself shall be punished, if he transgress the laws of 
 the state. The master himself took the slave and floo-. 
 ged him. He fled for refuge into the temole, that^» he 
 might not be punished. Since you see this, are you not 
 without fear of death ? If you do what you ought, you 
 will be happy. That shameless (fellow) lives by flat- 
 teringthe rich. What impiety I^o He set off with ten 
 thousand Hoplites. Cyrus was riding with his head 
 uncovered. Take the boy and punish him. He has 
 spent both his own money and his« father's. It is not 
 every man who can" be without fear of the future. 
 He threw a stone and broke the eagle's head. He cross- 
 ed the river, though it was flowing with a full stream. 
 The wolf teas persuaded, and went away. The physi- 
 cian, with much skill (art,), freed the boy from his dis- 
 ease. At last he went away. At first you spoke ill of 
 every body. After some time I will be with you. 
 
 ^ 40. The Participle continued . 
 
 237. a) The participle of the future is used to ex- 
 press a purpose.*' <y 
 
 • feo (luX. iroXiv or bXiyov vp. 
 
 * Of course in choosing which may be used, we must consider 
 whether the persons merely had, or led, or brought, or used the thing 
 or person with which he performed the action. 
 
 " The mtention is spoken of in a less certain way by the addition 
 mui. Ht had Cyrus arrested, ^« d^roKTiviLv. 
 
 6» 
 
lOG 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE 
 
 THE PABTICIPLE. 
 
 ion 
 
 1 1 
 
 238. b) Many vevhsihiii signify erjiotlo7is, perception 
 by the senses, knowledge, recollection, cessation or con- 
 ti?iuance, &c., take the participle, where we should use 
 the infinitive mood, the participial substantive, or, 
 * that,^ <fcc. 
 
 238.* a) iyco sQ^ofiai vfiiv iniKovQi^aojv, T am com* 
 
 ing to aid you, 
 rov adixovvta naqa *rovg dtxaarag aysip dei 
 
 dixrjplimaovra, he who wrongs ayioth er 
 
 should be taken before the judges to be 
 
 punished (Uterally, one should take, <fec.) 
 rovg tovto noiriaovtag ixnffinsi, he sends 
 
 out men to do this, 
 b) ideip 70vg Tiaidag &rjjrovg y Evvria ag, I knew 
 
 that I had begotten mortal children (or, 1 
 
 knew that the children I had begotten 
 
 were mortal), 
 fjadofi^v avzav oiofitvmv mai aocptoTaTcov, 
 
 I perceived that they thought themselves 
 
 extremely wise, 
 cvvoida ifiavT^ aocpog wy (or (Toqpw ovti), 
 
 I am conscious of being wise (pr, that 1 
 
 am wise). 
 oldtTTois'' fistefiEltjat fioi aiyj^aavri, I have 
 
 never repented of having held my tongue. 
 
 239. Vocabulary 40. 
 
 To bring assistance, to aid, 
 succour, 
 
 Judge, 
 
 inixovQeo) (dat.) It may 
 have besides an accus. 
 of ihe thing : * imxoxQHf 
 foffQ) to bear help against 
 a disorder ; to combat it.) 
 
 ' See 214, h.: "but oUinore, like nun^uam, is occasionally found 
 with past tenses even in the best writers." (P.) 
 
 • «i TW ytt^dva iireKovpTjoa. (Xen.) 
 
 ^ The diKatrrfii decides in a court of justice according to right and 
 law: the Kpirm in the other relations of life according to equity ard his 
 inowledge of human nature. (Pass.) 
 
 Begetj 
 
 Dare, attempt. 
 
 Verbs that 
 
 See, 
 
 Learn, am aware, 
 
 I repent. 
 
 Make to cease, stop. 
 
 Cease, 
 
 Am ashamed. 
 
 Remember, 
 
 Appear, 
 
 Am evident. 
 
 Know, 
 
 Am conscious, 
 
 Rejoice, 
 
 Perceive^ 
 
 ysvvaoi, 
 
 take the participle. 
 OQoia}, 
 fiavd^dvto.* 
 /lerafitXei *■ fun, 
 7tav<o, 
 
 Xi^ycOy Ttavofjiau 
 ahxvvofiai,^ 
 fiSfivrjiiai, 
 qjaironai.^ 
 
 htjlog el(ii'^=2im eridently, 
 o?5a (2 perf. of cr^cD.) 
 Gvvoida tp.avi^, 
 
 alaOdvofiai, 
 
 Exercise 45. 
 
 239.* I am ashamed of having flattered Xenochdes. 
 Remember that you are a man. He was conscious of 
 acting unjustly. He rejoices in being praised, because 
 he is ambitious. I have ceased to be a flatterer. I am 
 conscious of fearing death. I am not ashamed of hav- 
 ing conferred many benefits upon him. I know that I 
 am mortal. I do not repent of having ravaged the 
 whole country. I am conscious of wishing to destroy 
 whatever I may take (shall have taken •). He is evi- 
 dently doing disgraceful things. He evidently cannot 
 either speak well of his friends or treat them well. 
 Cyrus knew that the son he had begotten, was mortal 
 
 f Of things requiring courage. It has also the meaning of susti' 
 nere, to bear to do so and so. 
 
 * fiavdivb)^ fiaOfieoftai, iiCjidOriKa. iftaOov. 
 
 * itcra'niXei, ^tra-/i£X/}«c, &C. 
 
 ^ ala^vpofttti ruictp=il am ashamed to do it! alaj^'Cvopai irottSp Of 
 T c /) ff a (, I am Mhamed of doing, or having done it, 
 
 * iav <paivoi{t(H, d^tircuf , if it should appear that I have acted u^juttly 
 
 * iUMi ifTTit iifiuinevos, he U evidently vexed* 
 
 * 91.*. 
 
108 
 
 THE PARTICIPLB. 
 
 (238* b), I will put a stop to his inflicting damage on 
 the city. 1 knew that the children he begot were mortal 
 Do not cease to love your mother. Know that you shall 
 be punished for your injustice. The physician is here 
 to (p) ' combat the boy's disease. Take the villain be* 
 fore the judges to be punished. They will evidently 
 attempt this. I knew that he had done more service to 
 the state than any other single person.** I will send out 
 men to (p) inflict damage on the city. 
 
 I' 
 
 ^41, The Participle continued ; tvjidvta^ Xafdavm, 
 
 qiOdvm, 
 
 240. di&dvm' {come or get before) and XavOdvo)^ 
 {am concealed) are generally rendered by adverbs, 
 the participle that accompanies them must then be 
 turned into a verb. 
 
 241. The participle Xavx^dvmv or Xa&mv may be ren- 
 dered secretly^ without being observed^ seen, &c. Hence 
 iXa^sv eiasX&mv is nearly equivalent to elaTjXOev XaOtov, 
 but gives more prominence to the notion of secrecy. 
 
 242. a) 6 KvQog, ate^ naXg coy, ti^eio toig roiovroig, 
 
 Cyrus, as being a boy, was pleased wiCh 
 such things. 
 
 b) hvxop TTOQovrss, they happened to be present, 
 
 Tvyxdvei mp, he happens to be (or simply, is.) 
 
 c) Xav^dvn ri noimvy 1) am concealed from 
 
 myself doing it =- do it without knowing 
 it; unconsciously J unknovm to myself. 
 
 ' A (p) after the first word of a clause shows that it is to be turned 
 into a participial clause, as explained in the two preceding sections. 
 
 V ^Bavbit <pdr)eoiiat, li^BdKa. iipddaa, i(j>6jjv. Fut. <pdaou} in later wri- 
 tera. {iipdiiv--<t>Oainv, <pd(o, (pOfivat, <l>dds). i<pBnv is the older aorist : but 
 l<pBaaa IS used once even by Thuc, and from Xenophon downwards u 
 Ale more common fonn. (B.) 
 
 k XavBdvUf \n<ru}f \i\iiBa. fAadov. (See 156.) 
 
 i OfUnirtih. (See 371.) 
 
 ■^ 
 
 t 
 
 . 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 109 
 
 2) am concealed from others doing it^ra 
 do it without being observed; secretly, 
 without being seen or discovered. 
 
 d) Sq)^Tjv avTovg dquxofievog^ I arrived before 
 
 them. eq)&T^v dcpixofievogt^ I arrived first. 
 
 e) ovx ap (pO dpoig Tioiap tovto, you cannot 
 
 do this too soon. 
 
 f) ovx av cpd-dpoig nomp lovzo ; woiHt you 
 
 do this directly 1 = do it directly. 
 
 g) Xeye q)^daag, speak quickly; at once 
 
 dpvaagi rqiie, run immediately. 
 
 243. Vocabulary 41 
 
 Preposition dno. 
 Signification, from ; governs the genit. 
 
 dap ITZTTCOP. 
 
 ano dsiTiPov yipea&ai. 
 
 To fight 071 horseback, 
 To have done supper, 
 To do a thing of them- 
 selves, 
 At the suggestion of others, am dvdQwv itwcop. 
 
 tit 
 
 acp savTojp. 
 
 Openly, 
 
 ano 70V TTQoqjapovg (frcir 
 adj. fTQoq)aftjg). 
 
 Preposition ttqo. 
 
 Signification, before (of time, place and preference), in 
 behalf of for : governs genit. 
 
 For (=in behalf of) the % ~ « , ^ 
 jjjpl fTQo rov paaiXtojg. 
 
 To value very highly, to ttqo noXXov nomaOai (to 
 
 attach great importance 
 to, 
 
 value before, i. e. more 
 than, much. See 282). 
 
 To choose war before, in ngo BiQi^prjg (for which dvu 
 
 preference to, peace. 
 
 is used in 213, e). 
 
 • Uveoftai (commonly d<piKveonat), l^oftatf lyfiai. u(J/ii|v. 
 
 ' From dmtv or dvirtiv, to accomplish. 
 
no 
 
 THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE, &C. 
 
 M 
 
 Exercise 46, 
 
 244. The physician happened to be present. You 
 cannot punish the boy too soon (242. e). The enemy 
 arrived at" the city before us. Go away immediately 
 (242. g). Won't you go away directly (242./) ? If you 
 do this before our enemies (do it), we have conquered. 
 If you do this before me, I am undone. If we arrive at 
 the city before them, all will be well. The slave broke 
 the pitcher without being discovered. The Scythians 
 fought on horseback. The father went in to the gener- 
 al without being observed. These Hoplites wei-3 drawn 
 up before the king himself He is too sensible'"* to choose 
 war before peace. He has done supper. Speak at once 
 (242. g\ if it is agreeable" to those who are present. To 
 incur danger in behalf of the state is honorable. It is 
 the part of a good man to incur dangers himself for his 
 friends. He did this at the suggestion of other persons. 
 I should never have done this of myself. If Xenoclides 
 had not been their general, they would never have dared 
 to commence a war openly. Men enact laws, that^* they 
 may not be injured. Having done supperj they prac- 
 tised equestrian exercises. 
 
 ^ 42. The Genitive Absolute, Sec. 
 
 245. a) The case absolute is in Greek the genitive : 
 it marks the time, or generally any such relation to the 
 principal sentence, as i^7c should express by when, after, 
 since, as, because, though, if, <kc. 
 
 246. b. c) The participles of impersonal verbs are put 
 absolutely in the nominative; of course without a noun, 
 and in the neuter gender. 
 
 •» «:j, if they went into .t. 
 
 THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE, djC. 
 
 Ill 
 
 247. d) When the time relates to a person, ini is gen- 
 erally expressed. 
 
 248. e) When a motive is attributed to another per- 
 son, the particle ag is generally used with the gen. or 
 ace. absolute. 
 
 249 a) ifiovxa&svdovTog, whilst I was asleep. rovToap 
 ovTOig ixovTcov, this being the case ; or, as 
 this is the case. 
 
 b) diarl fitmg, i^o^ amivai ; why do you re- 
 
 main, when you are at liberty to go away 7 
 
 c) So deof anitvoLiy when, whereas, (fee. you 
 
 ought to go away, do^av'' tj^iv amivai, 
 when we have determined to go away. 
 Also do^av tavta,° this being determined. 
 
 d) Im KvQOv §aaiXevovtogy ill the reign of Cyrus. 
 
 e) iaioina atg ndviag s id 6 Tag (or Ttdvroof 
 
 eid6T(ov),he held his tongue, as suppos- 
 ing that all knew. 
 
 250. Vocabulary 42. 
 
 Words used in Nomiru Absolute. 
 
 When or whereas it was 
 said or told, 
 
 It being disgraceful, possi- 
 ble, impossible, plain or 
 evident, 
 
 There being an opportuni- 
 ty, when 1 may or might, 
 
 It being fit or incumbent, 
 
 UQTlHtVOV. 
 
 alaxQov — dvvazop — advvatop 
 — dljXop or. 
 
 When, whereas one ought. 
 
 naQov.^ 
 
 TiQoaTjxov. TTQoai^icei (dat.) it 
 belongs to. ol nQoarinov- 
 reg, those that belong to 
 us = relations. 
 
 diov. 
 
 * So SoKovVf ctfioyiiivov. 
 
 • Also 66^av-oi TovroVf So^avratv tovtuv, and iS^avra raSro. 
 
 P iariv, IvtttTi^ irdpeffriv, i^c<rrtj &,C. irpaTreiv, all signify, one can Of 
 m,jy : but evctrn relates to physical possibility (it is possible) : i^eart to 
 moral possibility (it is allowed) : cvn and Ttapian stand between these 
 two meanings, without being confined to either of them ; the latter im- 
 plying also the notion of facility. (B.) 
 
 ^f 
 
 /J 
 
112 
 
 THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE, &C. 
 
 As far at least as this is con- 
 cerned, as far as depends jovtov y« mxcc. 
 on this, 
 For the sa^e of, .X^Q^^ (with gen. =» prop- 
 
 ^ ft^; but xoiQiv e/i^'r, /of 
 my sake). 
 After the manner of a dog, » ^, 
 Hkeadog, xr^otf^ix^,. 
 
 Without, Slvev {gen.) 
 
 For any thing the other 
 heavenly bodies could do irexa tav itsQoap aargmr. 
 to prevent it, 
 
 Exercise 47. 
 
 251. Without you I should have perished for any 
 thing my other friends could have done to prevent it. 
 Why do you remain, when we have determined to suc- 
 cour our friends? Why do you hold your tongue, 
 whereas you ought to speak? Why do you remain, 
 now that you have aft opportunity to depart ? He ask- 
 ed the boy, why he remained, when it was his duty tc 
 depart. Though they were toldt to be present, they are 
 not come. If it is agreeable to you,*^ we will go away. 
 I hope that we shall thus arrive before'^ the Persians. 
 He had the same upper-chamber, whenever he wished. 
 The slave told me, that the physicians were come [p) to 
 combat the boy's disorder. If you act unjustly towards 
 your slaves, know^* that you will be punished by the 
 gods. I knew that all the rest of the country had been rav- 
 aged by the Persians. Why did you choose war, when 
 you might have chosen peace ? He told me that all were 
 permitted to go in to the general, whenever he was at 
 leisure. 
 
 t It being told. 
 
 THI RELATIVE. 
 
 118 
 
 Exercise 48. 
 
 262. Cyrus evidently''^ desired to be praised, I per* 
 ceived that he wished to disobey the laws of his country. 
 O boy, cease to do this, since (p) it is disgraceful to de* 
 spise your father. The boy went secretly (241) into his 
 father's house. But this being determined, we cannot 
 set out too soon." The master, as being a fool, was de- 
 ceived by his slave. Do not practise many arts, since it 
 is impossible to do every thing welL Let us not despise 
 our relations. As far as money is concerned, you will 
 rule over all the Greeks. Know that you will get off 
 well, as far at least as this is concerned. He told me 
 that, if any man was well suited to govern men, it was 
 Cyrus.*' The physician told me, that he had come for 
 my sake. This animal runs like a dog. This being 
 the case, I will go away at once. All men, so to say^ 
 desire what is absent. It is the part of a senseless man, 
 to hold cheap what is present, from the desire of what is 
 absent. He said nothing himself, as supposing^' that 
 all felt grateful to Xenoclides. 
 
 % 43. Tlie Relative, 
 
 253. a. b. c) The relative is often used to introduce a 
 causcj ground, motive, or design of what is stated. 
 
 Obs. 1. When it expresses a cause or ground it takes the indie. ; 
 when it expresses a -purpose (as in 258. c), the/ui. indie, [or the svb' 
 junctive i]. 
 
 Obs. 2. The relative is not used merely to connect b. sentence with 
 the one before it so frequently as in Latin. When so used, it ia 
 probably always expressive of some emotion. (B.) 
 
 < *Conjunctivu8 cum pronominibus adverbiisve relativis consociatus 
 nonnisi in veterum epicorum sermone fini indicando inservit.* (Herm 
 ad CEd. Col. 190. So KrQger,Lachmann,<fec.) Some MSS. read Swan 
 In the passage of Thucydides, 258. c. 
 
114 
 
 THE RELATIVE. 
 
 THE RELATIVE. 
 
 115 
 
 i 
 
 ! ' 
 
 i 
 
 V 
 
 Ob8. 3. SSe is not used as a mere antecedent to the relatif c, but 
 oirds, which is not so strongly demonstrative. 
 
 254. d) The antecedent is often expressed in the 
 relative clause, and omitted in the principal clause. 
 
 When this is the case, the relative clause often stands first ; the 
 subst., which mostly loses its arlicle, is then not to be placed im- 
 mediately after the relative. 
 
 255. e) The relative is often made to agree in case 
 with the antecedent in the principal clause. 
 
 This is called Attraction of the Relative : it seldom takes place ex- 
 cept where the relative should regularly stand in the orcuso/ire, the 
 antecedent being in the gen. or dot. and, xcithout a demonstrative 
 pronoun (as ovroj, Utivoi)' 
 
 266. g) When the relative is attracted, the antece- 
 dent is often placed in the relative clause, but in the 
 case in which it would stand in the principal clause. 
 
 257. g) The antecedent is sometimes wholly omitted. 
 
 As, for instance, when it is some general or indefinite notion 
 {man, thin^, &c. as in 258. g, ex. 2), or has been before mentioned, 
 as in 258. /I. ' 
 
 In (258. h) the rel seems under the government of a preposition 
 belonrring to the other clause. As in English sometimes,— "she 
 would have the head q/'ir/wsocr«r advised it." 
 
 258. a) ^avfAaatov noieTg og rj^tv ovdh d idmg^ you act 
 
 strangely in giving 71s nothing. 
 
 h) fuaxaQt^ov rtjv /iiyTf|)«, oicov ttHrtov ixvQtjas, 
 they pronounced the mother happy in 
 having such children. (Here omv = on 
 rotovro3v.) 
 
 c) t] vavg nQEff^eig ayei, oineQ ra aqjtTSQa cpgdatoaty,* 
 the ship is bringing ambassadors to 
 make (or, that they may make) their own 
 statement. 
 onXa xravtait o<^ afivvovvrai 70vg ddixovvTag, 
 they are procuring arms to defend them- 
 selves with against those who injure 
 them (or, with which to repel or pujiish 
 those tcho injure them). 
 
 d) ovtog iauvy ov eJdeg dv^qa^ ) This is the man 
 ov tJdeg dvdQa, ovtog iartVy ) you saw. 
 
 Attraction of Relative. 
 
 e) fiEtadidmg avT(p tov aizov, ovnsQ avtog e^f'^* 
 
 you give him a portion of the food which 
 you have yourself 
 
 f) ^4^ hy^l^^vi matevaofiev o) dv Kvgog 5ft5, we will 
 
 confide tn any general whom Cyrus may 
 give us ' (for ov dv^), 
 
 g) dnolctvo}'' wy exto aya^wy, I enjoy the^good 
 
 things I possess, fiefjivijfitvog (ov engal^e, 
 remembering what he had done.' 
 h) fiBTSTitfiTisTO dXXo aTQatevfiaf ngog (p ngoa&Ef 
 elxe, he sent for another army^ in ad- 
 dition to the one he had before. 
 
 259. Vocabulary 43. 
 
 Surprising, strange, 
 To act strangely, 
 Corn, (food for man in gen- 
 eral,) 
 Ambassador, 
 To send for, 
 To enjoy, 
 
 ^avfiaarog, rj, ov. 
 {^avfiaaTov noieiv, 
 
 cXtog." 
 
 TiQta^vgy eayg, 6. 
 
 fieiaTitfjiTzonai. 
 
 dnoXavca.^ 
 
 » More probably, (ppaaovatv, (KrQger.) 
 
 Prepositions «V, avd, slg. 
 
 eV = in, answer to where ? — govenis dat. 
 
 «ra =(properly) up : in, on, through (of a large space 
 
 of time) — governs accus. 
 ilg= into, towards, against, in reference ^0— governs 
 
 accus. V, 1a 
 
 • Dederit. ^ * See 94. 
 
 ■ This verb (which is probably from the same root as Upeiv. P.) ie 
 properly to receive from ; to receive whether advantage or disadvan- 
 tage from any thing. So that (like our, to reap the fruits of) it is used 
 in both a good and a bad sense. 
 
 ' Plur. often clra in Att. Greek, which is also found in Herodotus. 
 
 » diroXooo), dnoXavaofiai. Imp. dniUvov, aor. drrtXavca^ tllOUgh UO sim- 
 ple verb is found. ajr^Xawoi/, dnfiXavaa are later forms. 
 
 \ 
 
116 
 
 THE RELATIVK. 
 
 THB RELATIVE. 
 
 in 
 
 The first of all, 
 
 It depends upon you, 
 
 Through the whole country, 
 
 Through the whole day, 
 
 Every day. 
 
 Every year, 
 
 By fives, or five andfive^ 
 
 To attend a master, 
 
 To send (a boy) to a mas- 
 ter. 
 
 iv aoi tail, 
 ttva naaav ttip y^r. 
 ava naoav ztjv ^/i£(>ar. 
 dva naaav ijfiSQav, 
 ava nav itog. 
 dva Tttvie, 
 
 slg SidacjHciXov (foirnv^ 
 xiav understood), 
 
 ftV didaaxdXov nffinstv. 
 
 (•* 
 
 I 
 
 Exercise 49, 
 
 260. I pity the mother for having been deprived ot 
 such a daugher (258. b). 1 will give him some of the 
 wine which I have. He sent for more wine in addition 
 to what he had drunk already (258. A). This is the 
 hare you saw (258. d). You act strangely in speaking 
 .. _ i ll even of your friends. He knew that 1 should enjoy 
 
 ^Umg^HU^e good things I possess (258. g^). Receive the good 
 ^^Tnings you desire (258. g). 1 have a stick to beat you 
 with (258. c). The Hoplites arrived first of all. All 
 these things depend on you. They harassed us all the 
 day, so that (211) the Hoplites could not march. They 
 went into the city by fives. Those who had plotted 
 against the king entered (went into) the city by threes 
 without being observed.''* Say quickly^ what your 
 opinion is [what seems good to you). I, for my part, 
 would choose peace in preference to all that I possess. 
 I knew that (/?) the citizens would choose'* peace in 
 preference to war. Why do you wait, wheii it is your 
 duty to succour your friend? The Athenians used to 
 do this every year. They are not aware that (p) they 
 
 * This phraae is elliptical: Iv roXg TrprTirot naptj<rav=ii» ToTi napoifftp 
 wpaiToi iraprjaay. Thuc. iises iv rois even with a fem. superlative. (Se« 
 iil 81.) 
 
 r Properly, to go frequently into his house. 
 
 arc despised^* by every body. They do this, ?iot only 
 every year, but also every day. I admire your lilies, but 
 not • your brother's. The boy attends no master. We 
 send our boys to masters. 
 
 Exercise 50. 
 
 261. I repented of having flogged''* the slave. I in- 
 deed eat that I may live, but others live that vhey may 
 eat. Socrates said, that he indeed ate that he might 
 live, but that others lived that they might eat. The 
 beauty of the city was admired by all who were-there.' 
 He said that if the citizens obeyed the laws of the state, 
 they would prosper (102). I wonder at the water being 
 turned into wine. The widow would have died^'^ but 
 /or^» her hen, which (p) laid her an egg every day. 
 The beauty of the boy was admired by Socrates him- 
 self. The Persian cavalry unexpectedly charged the 
 ranks of the Greeks. He says that he (219) has a pain 
 in his head. I perceived that he rejoiced^* in the wealth 
 of the citizens.* I am ashamed of being glad''* that my 
 daughter is beautiful.* He is evidently'^ vexed at the 
 misdeeds of his brothers. Henceforth let us despise no- 
 body. Thf; judge told me that we must persuade (120. c) 
 the citizens. Would that you had done what you ought ! 
 Would that you would do what you ought ! I am at a 
 loss what to do (98). 
 
 § 44. The Relative continued, 
 
 262. a) When the relative, with such a verb as to be, 
 call, believe, 6cc. stands in appositiori to a noun, it gen- 
 erally agrees in gender with it, rather than its proper 
 antecedent. ... ^ 
 
 • oi ihould stand last : it then takes an accent (oO. 
 

 
 H 
 
 ' * 
 
 P 
 
 116 
 
 THS RELATIVE. 
 
 119 
 
 THE RELATIVE. 
 
 263. b) kGtiv-ol^=tnot, some, and may be declined 
 throughout : — 
 
 N. ecTiv o7, iariv a7, sartv i. 
 
 G. tVTlV U)V. 
 
 D. cariv oij, iariv aU, tOTtv o?f, &C. 
 
 264. c) In the same way iaiip ots ^sometimes ; eouf 
 oTzoVf somewhere, (fee. 
 
 265. d) So also taiiv with oaitg is used as an inter 
 rogative. 
 
 266. c) l(p q5 or ^rs is, ^ 07i condition that^ with the 
 future indie, or the injin. 
 
 The relative in this construction answers to the demi nstrative 
 Inl TovTu: which, or ini Toio6cf is not unfrequently expressed. 
 
 267. g) av&' cJy, because, for ( ^arr* tovrov ou). 
 
 It may, however, be used in its proper meaning : ' in return for 
 those things which,' &c. 
 
 268. h) H Tig * does not express any doubt as to 
 whether there was any, but is used as equivalent to 
 ocng, whosoever, whatsoever (= all that), 
 
 269. a) (po^ogf ^v aidw xaXovfisv, the fear which we 
 
 call bashfulness. 
 
 b) ano t^p iv ^ixeXin noXstov eariv taPffrom 
 
 ^ some of the cities in Sicily. 
 
 c) 01 am Q eldov sajtv onov, whom I saw some- 
 
 where. 
 
 d) eat IV ovaripag avOQfanovg rex^avftaxag im 
 
 aocpin; are there any persons whom you 
 have admired for their wisdom 7 
 
 e) Xt^G) aot, icp ^ aiyijaei, I will tell yon, on con- 
 
 dition that you will hold your tongue, 
 f) iQ^'^t]aap icp (pre avyyQaxpai pofiovg, they were 
 chosen on the condition that they should 
 draw up laws (i. e. to draw up laws). 
 
 • For *8unt qui dicanV the Greeks said, lanv o? Uyowtv^ or ciaXv o! 
 KtyotTeif or elaiv oT Myovaiv. Examples of the last construction are no* 
 fencommon. (Kr.) 
 
 * tU indef. has gen. tov, dat. roi (both enclitic), for nySt, t ,i. .So 
 Iffrif hai orov, oTta 
 
 g) lOQip 601 oJda av€t av ^XOeg, I feel thankful 
 
 to you for coming, 
 h) ecpOet^ov si ti XQW^^ ?*'» ^^^^V destri^yed 
 
 every thing of value. 
 
 270. Vocabulary 44. 
 
 To be banished, 
 
 To return from banish 
 
 ment, 
 To wound, 
 Some, 
 
 Somewhere, 
 Sometimes, 
 Hold my tongue. 
 
 qisvyeiv.* 
 
 nareQiofiai, xaTSiui. 
 riTQ(6ax(o.^ 
 
 eat IP oj. 
 ear IP onov. 
 tat IP ore. 
 
 aiydco.* 
 
 Preposition 8id. 
 
 Governs accus. and genitive. 
 
 Signification: (with ^e;i., *//im/^^,' of space o .iiU6| 
 
 and of means. 
 « (with accus.) ^on account of ; also, 
 
 through, 01 a cause. 
 
 On your account. 
 After a long time, , 
 
 Every five years. 
 To pity, 
 
 To be angry with. 
 To be at enmity with, 
 At a little, at a great dis- 
 tance. 
 To have in one's hand, 
 
 bia as. 
 
 dia TToXXov xQOvov : aUo, dia 
 XQovoVf after some time. 
 
 dia 7ISPTS ST (OP J 
 
 dl OIKTOV sxsip. 
 
 8i oQyrjg t^sip. 
 
 di sx^Q^S yiypsaOai tipi,* 
 
 8i oXiyov, dia tzoXXov. 
 dia x^fQog s^sip. 
 
 • t^tiytiv is used for tpvyctv, to he in banishment. (Heindorf.) 
 
 rtrpuiff/KCj, rpitXio) 
 
 , &.C. 
 
 • Fut. generally, ajy/jao/iai. It caimot, like (rtwirdw, talte accu». ol 
 thing. 
 
 ^ Also ^ttt irifiitTov tTOVS and Sia ircftiTTOiv iroiv. 
 
 f So 6id ^iXiac Uvai tivi. (Xcn. Anab. iii. 8.) 
 
M 
 
 130 
 
 o oio; av ay^g. 
 
 oiot av avijQ. 
 
 121 
 
 Exercise 51. 
 
 271. I deem you happy in having received" such 
 
 good things Most men cr«/en% desire^' the S 
 
 thmgs which their neighbours possess. I will go awS 
 
 on condition that the physician shall stay. Some J: 
 
 them were wounded by the enemy. I will tell y^ on 
 
 cmiduion that the others shall ifold their ton^e ' Is 
 
 there awy person whom 269. d) you have prai^d for^ 
 
 us forwardness? I will endeavour to do^this so that 
 
 211) even you shall praise' me. I would choose 
 
 hberty before all the good things I posLs (258 T) 
 
 chdes was chosen general, with three Mers.^' iZ 
 
 Whv amY wSo"h t"'f " r""''"^ ^y 'he Athenians. 
 Why am I wretched, w/ten / way become happvi I 
 
 T "". T'""y '^"^^ Abrocomas.'^ He was banLhed 
 hrough the ^henians. I rejoice in seeing you "aS 
 some time. Know that it is through the g^s^^ that you 
 are doing well. Know that it is through me that vou 
 have returned from banishment. The Xy ki2°s 
 
 ThTC°"'" "'"TS '^^'y "^o ""s everrfive years 
 The boy pursues the dog with (havivg) a stick in his 
 
 § 45. 6 olog ai) ar^Q. 
 
 ^nlP' J'^^fe'a''''e adjectives, oroj. 'oaos, i,l,'^ot, &c. 
 suffer attraction not only in the accusative, but a so in 
 the nominative, when the verb «y with an express 
 
 » Gen.—a!,£u takes ace. of person, gen. of thing. 
 •'^-^ innn. pres, ° 
 
 -.n.*J;I" ''Tl'- ^'"^. "f " ^"°'"- ?"«'<:•) through the god,. The other 
 
 J:ren.heflew"4/ '*■■' "' '*''"' "' ''*"''^ *'' '° ^ 
 
 subject stands in the relative sentence ; as, tqanai, olo% 
 aov avdgo^, for fQUfiai dpdQog toiovrov oiog av el. 
 
 Obs. 1. This attraction consists in the omission of 
 the demonstrative adjective in the gen., dat., or accus., 
 and then putting the relative adject., by attraction, in 
 the case of the preceding substant. The verb of the rel- 
 ative sentence (fZ/iO is also omitted, and the subject of the 
 relat. sentence agrees with the attracted relative. 
 
 Obs^ 2. In this construction, oaog follows such words 
 as Oav^anjog, nXeiatog, ucpOorog : and ag the adverbs 
 i^avfiaaimgf O^avfiaoTagf 6cc. 
 
 273. a) G. egafiui oiov oov avdgog, I love such a 
 
 man as you. 
 D. x<^Q^^ofiat ot(p GoYavdgiy I gratify such 
 
 a man as you. * 
 A. eTmiy^ olov ae uvdga, I praise such a 
 
 man as you. 
 
 b) K. log ah J (ar^'^), such a man as you. 
 G. rov olov aov {avdQog), of such a man as 
 
 you, (fee. (fee. 
 
 c) -& av fiaar 6v oa ov ;r^ov;fw^jya£, he made 
 
 astonishing progress, 
 
 d) Oavfiaalfiog mg aOXiog yiyovt, he has he- 
 
 CQme -ifurprisingly miserable. 
 
 274. Vocabulary 45. 
 
 To love, ' -f^aw." 
 
 To gratify, x«C*toiM«i 
 
 Advance, make progress, 7iQox(OQt(c 
 
 To leap, aUofiai." 
 
 To throw, Qinzo). 
 
 The truth, to aXtjesg (aXj/^jJff, true ; ai- 
 
 ijv^£ta,.truth). 
 
 ' vtp is often added : ol oloi vtp i/icXs &vSpes. 
 
 * ipau, poet, ipofiat, Ipaodfiaoiiai, npaaQriv (gen.) love. (See Index.) 
 Fret. pass, ipuftai, (IpSadat^ ip(oficvo() , to be loved. 
 
 • iXXoftai, iXovitai. Aor, 1. fiXiftriv with a in the moods, aor. 2. ^Xd/i»;> 
 with S. Aor. 1. should probably be preferred for indie, and part. ; aor. 
 9. for optat. and infn. (B.) Hermann rejects the indie, and imver. of 
 
 .9. 
 
Wfll 
 
 -J 
 
 122 
 
 oiog av avtiq. 
 
 fl mg aXtiO^g ndaifjiopia. 
 
 01X8(0. 
 
 a&Xiog, a, op. 
 
 True happiness, 
 To dwell, 
 Miserable, wretched. 
 
 Preposition, Haza, 
 
 Properly xatd signifies a motion from a higher placa 
 downwards : and governs the genit, and actus. 
 
 With genit. it means, down from, down, under; but 
 more commonly against ^ with verbs of speakings 
 thinkings &c. 
 
 With accus. it means, at, hy, near, durifig, in an in- 
 definite way ; also, according to, and with the distri- 
 butive sense of our *6y' (by twos, &c.) 
 
 According to reason, 
 
 During, in, or.at the time 
 
 of the disease. 
 In villages, 
 Two by two. 
 In all respects, 
 Sensual pleasures. 
 According to Plato, 
 
 xata Xoyov (also with gen. 
 " in proportion to"). 
 
 aara Ttjv voaov. 
 
 xaja xtafiag (vicatim). 
 
 Tiaia dvo. 
 
 naza ndvia. 
 
 ai aara ro a^fia rfioval. 
 
 xaT« nXdiMva. 
 
 Exercise 52. 
 
 275. They cling to sensual pleasuits, because^' they 
 liave never tasted true happiness. They are too wise** 
 to cling to sensual pleasures. (Men) gladly gratify 5wc/i 
 a man as you are. I would gladly gratify such men 
 as you. They leapt down from the wall. Do you 
 
 king loved such men as you are. The boy has made 
 astonishing progress. He said that he would*' very 
 gladly gratify a man like you. Men like you always 
 speak well of the good. A man like you is praised by 
 every body. I would rather see men like you, than the 
 king of the Persians himself He has- become very 
 
 ovdiig oaug ov* 
 
 1123 
 
 wretched, unknown to himself.''^ I cannot gratify a 
 man like you too soon."^"^ Will you not gratify a man 
 like me directly ?^^ Sophroniscus, as being selfish, 
 obliged nobody, willingly at least. ^^ All men, so to 
 say** like to oblige such men as you. All men. so to 
 say, rejoice in praising^'' such a man as you are. These 
 things happened in the time of the disease. I know that 
 they dwelF^ in villages. The eagle has wings in pro- 
 portion to its body. To live according to reason is a 
 diliuient thing (from living °) according to passion. I 
 will tell you on condition that you (will) send your boy 
 to some master (259). 
 
 § 46, ovdetg oarig ov. 
 
 276. In ovdetg oazig oh {nemo non) the declinable 
 words are put under the immediate government of the 
 verb. 
 
 Kuhncr calls this inverted attraction^ because the noun (or word 
 representing it) conforms to the relative, not the relative to the 
 noun. 
 
 Sometimes adverbs are affected by this kind of attraction : Pfivai 
 
 KtiQiv, 69ev nep fJKCi (for Ktiac). 
 
 277. N. ovdeig oGTig ovx av javta noitjaeiEv. 
 G. ovdevog otov ov xateyeXacjEv. 
 
 D. ovdevi or(p ovx dnexQivaTo. 
 
 A. ovdeva ovr iva ov xatfxXavas. 
 
 There is no one who would not do this. 
 Theie was no one whom he did not laush at. 
 There was no one whom he did not answer. 
 There was no one whom he did not weep for, 
 
 278. Vocabulary 46. 
 To laugh at, xataytXdo}.f 
 
 111 
 
 • The art. must be expressed, though the infin. is to be omitted. 
 ' ycAdw, 'avo^at, but iyi\aca. Short a. 
 
124 
 
 To answer, 
 To weep for, 
 Especially, 
 
 There is nothing like hear- 
 ing, 
 As fast as they could. 
 
 The agricultural popula- 
 tion, 
 
 ovdstg oaus ov. 
 
 xataxXaim. 
 
 aXXmg t« xai (ootll Other 
 wise and also). 
 
 ovdfv olov uxovaai, 
 (og tdxoig dxopJ 
 oi afiqil y7fV B^fivtig, 
 
 Exercise 53. 
 
 279. There is no one who would not weep for such 
 men as you}* There is nobody whom he does not de- 
 spise. There is no one whom he does not hold cheap. 
 There is no one whom they do not gladly oblige. 
 There was none of those present* whom he had not 
 plotted against. I act strangely in not gratifying'^* a 
 man like you.** I know that I shall love^* a man like 
 you. lam ashamed of having plotted^* against a man 
 like you. He evidently wished^ ^ to oblige such men as 
 you. That is a hard thing, and for a man like me at 
 least,* impossible. To live according to reason is un- 
 pleasant {not pleasant) to most persons, especially 
 (when they are) young. There is nothing like hear- 
 ing the ambassadors themselves. The agricultural 
 population are doing well. They pursued the dog as 
 fast as they could. 
 
 * AoT. 1. diroKpiQi\9ai is passive, from AnaKpivoi (secerno), except ja 
 late writers, who use it for aitoKpivaaOai. (B.) 
 
 ' Gren. of rd;^of . 
 
 • Put the partic. after the negatives. Oiitvii irurt oi tavrtav l» </ c3» 
 tafffiXiKiav rrarvp ciV> (Plato, Protag. 317. e.) 
 
 illCJ 
 
 ys iftat. 
 
 otog. dsco, /JiiXXm, 
 
 120 
 
 ^ 47. olog. dioo. fiikXco, 
 
 280. a. h) olog with the infinitive implies great fit- 
 ness or ability in a thing : ri is usually joined with olog 
 in this signification ; as oUg tb elfu TzoietVy I am the rnan, 
 the fittest one to do it, / am able to do it, caii do iU 
 Without the infinitive, with neuter, olov denotes possi- 
 bility. 
 
 281. c. d).dt(o with oXiyov, noXXovy (fee. is used both 
 personally and impersonally, in the meaning of I want 
 but little of, am ia.rfrom doing, <fcc. : impers. noXXov det, 
 there wants much^ far from it ; oXiyov del, there wants 
 little, all but, (fee. Sometimes delv is omitted with oXi- 
 pt;, (fee. 
 
 282. e.f) fieXXoa is followed by an infin. of the fu- 
 ture, present, or aorist, 
 
 Obs. The future infin. is the most, the aorist the 
 least common." (P.) 
 
 283. a) olog re elfii, I am able (i. e. am such as to 
 
 do a thing), olop ti iatif it is possible. 
 b) 01 fiQoa&sp odovzeg olo i ttfiveiv elaiv, our 
 front teeth are adapted for cutting. 
 ov yoLQ TfV olog dno navtog xBgdaiveiv, he was 
 not of a character ^ to do any thing what" 
 ever for the sake of gain. 
 
 • There is a large gjass of verbs the object of which, expressed by 
 an infinitive, relates to future time, and may, therefore, be in the fu- 
 ture^ though it often is in the pres. or aor. '* The present is preferred 
 when either the certain definite occurrence of the action is to be 
 marked, or its immediate commencement from the time the words are 
 uttered." rK.) Buttmann properly observes, that a distinction should 
 be made between verbj whose object is necessarily future (e. g. hope 
 promise, expect) and those where the object is not necessarily future 
 (e. g. say, think, &,c.J : with the latter the pres. or aor. might be mis- 
 nnderstood ; with the former, not. But the MSS. often agree in giving 
 the pres. or aor. (with reference to future time) after such verbs. (B 
 td rlat. Cnt. 14. 3.) 
 
 ^ Or, was not a man to. See. 
 
126 
 
 oiog, dim, fiikXoo. 
 
 e) oXiyov dsa daxQvaai, I could almost cry ; oi 
 a7n near crying, 
 oXiy ov d eiv iddxQv<ja, I was near crying, 
 oXiyov ndviesy nearly all {detp omitted), 
 Tovto yoLQ noXXov delv eiTiot rig d Vyfor a 
 man would not assert that, far from it. 
 
 d) dvoiv deovta * eixoaij eighteen. 
 
 e) fiiXX(o ygaxpeiVy yqacpiiVy yQaxpai, lam going to 
 
 write, 
 f) d fiiXXei q)iX6ao(fog yspsaOai, if he is to be* 
 come a philosopher. 
 
 283*. Vocabulary 47. 
 
 Cry, shed tears, 
 I am far from, 
 Nearly, almost, 
 
 Far from it, 
 Am going to. 
 
 To gain, 
 Gain, 
 Stove, 
 Mostly, 
 Front (adject.). 
 
 daxQva}. 
 
 noXXov 8t(o. 
 
 oXiyov deiv (used as an ad- 
 verbial phrase; or 6Xi* 
 yov only). 
 
 noXXov deiv. 
 
 fisXX(o (also, afn likely to^ 
 and am to, <fec.) 
 
 xigdog, eog, to. 
 xdfiJyog, Of, rj. 
 Tct noXXd. 
 6 nqoaOev, 
 
 Prepositions, d^Kfl, ttsqi. 
 
 Govern gejiit., dative, and accus. 
 
 Signification : dficpl or Tzegl tov, * about ^ in answer lo 
 both where 7 and whither 7 dficpt <# Txegin or rivd sx^ip 
 or eivat is, to belong to,"" to be, or be employed about. 
 
 ^ The construction SvoXv 6i6vtoiv has disappeared, under the influ- 
 ence of modem criticism, from the works of the great writers, with the 
 
 single exception o{ Xen. Hell. i. 1, 5 : i«JcrirXrr ivoiv Seovaatv cUoai vavciv, 
 
 where hovvan is undoubtedly the proper reading. (Kruger.) 
 
 ■ ol dijcpl (or JTfjoi) "AvvToVf Anytus and his followers or parly . a 
 phrase employed by Attic writers, when they chiefly allude to only one 
 '.ndividual ; leaving it at the same time, for some reason, undecided 
 and in the dark, whether they mean that individual alone, or othera 
 besides. (B.) 
 
 o^og. dioj. fiiXXoD. 121 
 
 ttiQt T^ denotes care about: it foWows verbs of fearing 
 
 ^ {dtSttpat), being at ease about (aaQQEip), &c. 
 
 oficpi and (more commonly) mql tov are of about (de) 
 
 as in *to talk about.' Also, cpo^sia&ai, (fiXopeixap {to 
 
 contend) nsgi tipog. 
 ftEQi noXXov noteia&ai or rjyeia&ai,^ to value highly, to 
 
 make a great point of, or attach great importance to. 
 
 Exercise 54. 
 
 284. He asked whether this was possible. We cut 
 With our front teeth. He told me that his father had the 
 tooth-achem one of his front teeth. He has large'^front 
 teeth. He was not of a character to fear death. He 
 says that he does not choose to go in to the general, 
 since ip) he is not at leisure. The Athenians sailed 
 with (part.) nineteen ships. It is not possible that one 
 man should ever do'' all this. You will not escape from 
 («b . 6) death. He is • mostly about the stove. Do not 
 think that I do this from insolence. Young men are of 
 a character to desire many things. Nearly all (of them) 
 wish to entrust the arbitration to Socrates. They will 
 be entrusted with this^^ by nearly all (of them). I am 
 lar trom desiring all that you have. He fears the same 
 things that we do (182). He says that he (219) is with- 
 out fear of death. He says that the mother is afraid 
 about her daughter. The agricultural population are 
 doing well. I asked the general, whether he was soine 
 to march against the king. He says that he has been 
 entrusted with this.* » 
 
 f So irrpi rrXetoros, irXeiirrov, &C. jf$pl uikoov. (See 243.) 
 
128 
 
 onoag, ov fi^. 
 
 ontog. ov fitj. 
 
 128 
 
 ( 
 
 ^i 
 
 !i 
 
 ^48. 
 
 onoog. ov jifi. 
 
 285. a, h) onoog,^ when it refers to the future, hai 
 cither the subj. or the future indic^t and retains them 
 even in connection with past time, when the optative 
 might have been expected (69). 
 
 286. c. d) The verb on which the sentence with orrmg 
 depends is often omitted. 
 
 Rem. This construction is equivalent to an energetic vrnperative* 
 — opa or hpart may be supplied. 
 
 287. ov fi^,^ with the fut. indie, or aor. subj.^ is used 
 as an emphatic prohibition or denial, 
 
 Rkm. 1. This construction is probably elliptical: oi (Jmj iari) 
 
 fth, . . . &.C. 
 
 With the second pers. »ing. of the/u/ur« indie, it is a pr6kihiium\ 
 with the subj., and other persons of the future, a denial. 
 
 Rem. 2. Elmsley says: "oi ftfi cum futuro vetantis est, euro 
 Bubjunctivo vero negantis;" but Hermann shows, that the prohib- 
 itive meaning depends on the person, not on the tense. Elmsley 
 explained this phrase in what seems the simpler way, by join 
 ing the ufi to the verb. Thus oi ftfi XaXftven ; = rcHlyou not not-talk 
 = will you not hold your tongue ? s= hald your tongue. But Her- 
 mann (who at first agreed with Elmsley), Host, Kuhner, &c. adopt 
 the other explanation, supposing <5wj ian', or some such phrasei 
 understood. 
 
 287*. a) (fQovji^e onmg fArfilv ala^Qov noi^asig, takt 
 care to do nothing disgraceful, 
 b) ^vre^ovXsvev ovtn noieip, onoog 6 aXtog dvuaxti, 
 he advised them to do this, that the pro- 
 visions might hold out. 
 
 • 5nois is properly * how,* and it cannot be used for * that; except 
 where for ' that' we might substitute * that by this means; or * that so.* 
 With the future indie, it is always strictly « how; 5n.> rpSwtj, 
 
 t The fut. with ojrwf expresses a definite intention, for the accom- 
 plishment of which vigorous measures are to be pursued. (R.) 
 
 •» Dawes laid it down as a rule, that the subjunctive of the aor 1. 
 act. and mid. was never used with onus, ov fifi, but that the fut. i„ tie. 
 %*%B used instead. This rule is now given up by the best scholars j but 
 Battmann thinks that the subj. of the aor. 2. was employed with a kind 
 9/ predilection, and that, when the verb had no such tense, the fut 
 iudic. was used in preference to the subj. of the aor. 1. 
 
 e) oftng avrjQ ecsi, that you behave (or quit y our 
 self) like a man. 
 
 d) oncog fifi noi^arjjBy TzoXXdxig vfiag e^Xaxpfv, be 
 
 sure not to do what has often been detrir 
 m,ental to you. 
 
 e) ov fiij XaXi^aeig ; do not chatter pray, ov /itj 
 
 yivrjtai tovto, this will assuredly not hap 
 pen. 
 
 288. Vocabulary 48. 
 
 To bethink myself, consid- 
 er, take care, 
 Talk, chatter. 
 Whilst he was walking, 
 Nevertheless, 
 To be at dinner, 
 
 q)Q0VTll^(O. 
 
 XaXtto. 
 
 fiera^v neQinat^r. 
 
 ofimg. 
 
 deiTiftaj {deiTzvov, coena, the 
 principal meal of the day 
 taken towards evening). 
 
 Preposition ini. 
 
 Governs genit.j dative, and accus. 
 
 Signification : in answer to question where! generally 
 
 with genit., sometimes with dat. in the sense of 'on': 
 
 as icp Innov oxsTaOai : i(p innto rroQevea&ai. 
 In answer to questions whither? with accus.; as inl Xo- 
 
 (fov Tivdjto a certain hill ; and more generally, ow,fw. 
 
 towards tOj &-c. 
 
 They marched to Sardis, im ^ugdemv. 
 They sailed to Crdos, Im trig Xiov. 
 
 Towards home, in otxov. 
 
 inl with dative denotes in addition to, besides ; close 
 by (as m\ 7^ notan^) ; an aim or condition (266), and 
 the being in one's power (65). 
 
 ifii with genit. often marks the time by means of some- 
 thing contemporary^ generally a contemporary per- 
 son (65). 
 
 To come for ) (to effect it), iX(yeTv im tovtq). 
 this, i (to fetch it), " " tovro. 
 
 6^ 
 
130 
 
 f*i M ov. 
 
 To be drawn up four deep, ^Vi rertdgcp rera'^^oi. 
 1 o be named after a per- ^ ^ , 
 son, otofiu txeiv ini ripog. 
 
 To endure a thing for the , , , , 
 sake of praise, *^ e/raacp. 
 
 Exercise 55. 
 
 289. Be sure to be here yourself (287\ d). Takecare 
 that your children may beas good = as possible'* (287* a) 
 Be sure to behave like men worthy of the liberty you 
 possess. Take care not to say what has often hurt you. 
 rake care to mjure nobody. The Grecian Hoplites were 
 drawn up three deep Cyrus marched forSardis with 
 (part.) his Grecian Hoplites. He said that these things 
 were not in his power.'' They made (mid,) a treaty on 
 these conditions He is named after the great kin- 
 He said that his boy was named after Thales, the dIh- 
 losopher. They killed him whilst he was at dinner. 
 1 he Athenians though (p) they were able to take the citv 
 nevertheless sailed back home. In addition to all this tlie 
 Athenian generals have already sailed home. He told me 
 ihat the general was not of a character«« to act unjustly 
 by the citizens. They are not sent out (on an under- 
 standing that they are) to be slaves (227. 6). He savs 
 that he dwells close by the river. He is very ambitious, 
 so as (211) to do every thing for praise. He said that 
 the corpse was of a superhuman size.'' He said that he 
 had suffered things too great for tears." Do not do 
 this, pray. They will assuredly not obey the laws of 
 the city. Leave off chattering. 
 
 ^ 49. ^ij. i^/j ov, 
 
 290. a. b) After expressions of fear, solicitude, nn- 
 tertainty, &c. ^jy is used with the subjunctive or bidic. 
 
 • diXriarot. 
 
 (itj. fiij ov. 
 
 131 
 
 Obs. The indie, is used when the speaker wishes to intimate hi« 
 conviction that the thing feared, &c. has or will really come to pass 
 Of course the subj. becomes the opt. in connection with time paH, 
 and in a dependent proposition. (70, 71.) 
 
 291. c) The notion of fear is often omitted before /liy 
 ov, the verb being then generally in the subj. 
 
 292. f g) fit] ov is also used with the infin. after 
 many negative expressions: — 
 
 1) After to hinder, deny, fed misgiving, &c. when they have a 
 negative with them; if not (as in 293. e), they are used with /^n, 
 where tee use no negalive.t 
 
 2) After such expressions as Seivdv clvai, alaxp6v or aiax^vrw tlvai, 
 ala^fVtaBai, 
 
 3) After such negative expressions as, to be unable, impossible, 
 no* right, Ac. 
 
 ») nil oil is also sometimes used with the participle <» and with 
 (it re and infin., after negative expressions. 
 
 293. a) dt8otxa /i^ Odvcoy I fear that /shall die. 
 dtdoixa nTj ov x)dv(o, I fear that /shall 
 die. 
 
 not 
 
 b) (fo^ovfiai fiTj svQ^aofiEv, I fear we shall find. 
 cpo^ovfiai fi t] dficpoTtQcav tj fiaQn^nafiev, I fear 
 
 that we have missed (lost) both. 
 
 c) dV.a fjirj ovH J didaxrov, but perhaps it is a 
 
 thing that cannot be taught, 
 
 d) « ds vEvtja6fie\^a Im^aaikH, ri ifiTXodayv firj 
 
 ovxt ndvTa ra deivotara na&ovTug dnod'a- 
 v£Tv ; but if we shall fall into the power 
 of the king, what will prevent us from 
 being put to death, after suffering all 
 that is most terrible 7 
 
 e) ancioaJivoai jovg'EXXtjvag fit] iXOsTv, to pre- 
 
 vent the Greeks from coming, tjqvovv' 
 TO fiTj ne7ir<oxivaiy they (denied that they 
 had fallen) said that they did not fall, 
 amaiovvtEg avtov firj ^^eiv, not believing 
 that he would come. 
 
 ♦ But fhe nn is not always expressed after verbs of hinderingy pre- 
 tenting^ dtc. ax'h'*'^ « vrjSav, &c. 
 
 * Thus Juffr^yijrof yap av } elijv T0tav6t fih ov KaroiKTcipuv Upav (Soph 
 
 Ant. 96.) 
 
182 
 
 l*^' fit} ov. 
 
 /) avyaQvns6xov ^tjTTJcsip,* aaovx otfio'y aoio. 
 fifj ov poTj^sh dixatoavrn, for you prom- 
 ised to investigate it (with us), as hold- 
 ing it impious in you not to come to 
 the assistance of justice. 
 
 g) ovjB fiTj fie^rija&cu dvvufiat avjov, ovre ftefifrifit- 
 vog lATj ovx inamiv, lean neither not re- 
 member him, nor remembering not 
 praise him. 
 
 293\ Vocabulary 49. 
 Capable of being taught, 
 
 that can be taught, 
 Science, 
 
 Know, know how, 
 To fail into a person's 
 
 power or hands, 
 To prevent a person, 
 
 Right, lawful (as deter- 
 mined by divine or nat- 
 ural laws. 
 
 Fall, 
 
 Hinder, prevent, 
 
 To deny, 
 
 Fear, 
 
 Suspect, 
 
 Preposition lABtd, 
 Governs genit., dative, and accus. 
 
 diSaxtog, jj, OP, 
 
 imatrifiri, t^g, ^. 
 imaiafiai, 
 
 yiyviaOai inl rm. 
 
 ifinodoap eJvai fii^, or after 
 negatives or in ques- 
 tions implying a nega- 
 tive, firj ov. ix7ioS(6r is, 
 out of the way of 
 
 oGiog:' dixaiog, a, ov, (of 
 what is permitted by 
 human law. 
 
 xcoXvQ), dTTOXaXvOD. 
 dgveofiat, 
 
 vTxomevG) {accus. of person). 
 
 • 282, note c. 
 
 ' ixiaTTifiai, ivKTrfjaonat^ ^Kicr^rjv. Imp. nvivranriv. 2 ting. pre». ini* 
 
 t But as opposed to Ispdj, 5ff.of relates to man, i. e. to natural laws ; 
 hence Upa koI Sota, * divine and human things.* 
 
 ■ »irr«, Ktoov^aif vitrrtjKa. Iirtaov. 
 
 • jJcWw, 6ticoiiai, iidoiKo and ScSTa (both with meaning of prea ) Aof 
 
 [ilj WITH RELATIVES, 6iC, 
 
 I9b 
 
 I 
 
 Signification : with accus., after. 
 " " with genit., with. 
 ** ** with 5a/.(only in the poets),a/?iow. g-, intei . 
 
 Exercise 56. 
 
 294. I fear his coming to some harm {lest he should 
 suffer something). I feared the boy would come to 
 some harm. I fear we shall find, that {p) these things 
 are not so. I fear about my boy lest he should come to 
 some harm. The father, though he feared about his 
 boy, nevertheless went away. I cannot either go or 
 stay (110). I knew that they would prevent'* the king 
 from coming (293. e) into the country. I fear that we 
 have treated them ill. I fear that the rascal will not 
 die. It is disgraceful not to defend the laws of our 
 country. Nothing prevents this from being (293. e) 
 true. What prevents us from dying at once ? It is a 
 disgrace not to be without fear of death. It is a terrible 
 thing, not to bear what comes from the gods. It is not 
 right, not to choose to fight for one's country. It is not 
 right not to die for one's country, if it be necessary. I am 
 ashamed not to appear to have conferred great benefits 
 upon my country. I fear this will happen. After this, 
 what prevents us from dying ? They sent out mtin to 
 prevent themt from coming into the country. 
 
 ^ 50, fiij with Relatives, the Infinitive, <fec. 
 
 295. a. c) fijy is used in relative sentences and •yith 
 participles, adjectives, &c., whenever the negative does 
 not directly and simply deny an assertion with respect 
 10 some particular mentioned person or thing. 
 
 Hence relative sentences, participles, and adjectives take ^r, 
 * See 238*, the third example. 
 
134 
 
 (41^ -WrrH RELATIVES, &C. 
 
 ii 
 
 whenever they might be resolved into a sentence with '»/;' or de. 
 scribe on/y a supposed case ; not particular individuals^ but Individ* 
 uals of a. class, ft 
 
 296. d) The infinitive generally takes ^jy, except 
 where the opinions or assertions of another person are 
 stated {in sermo?ie ohliquo). See 110. 
 
 297. b) With Ziatt^ the infinitive takes ^//, the in- 
 dicative ov. 
 
 298. a) rig de dovvai Svvarai ezfQcp^ a firj avrog *x^t; 
 
 hut who can give to another what he has 
 not got himself 7 
 h) aacfdlEidv ooi TTagt'^ovraif ware ae fitjdt%a 
 XvneTv, they will afford you security y &o 
 that no man shall annoy you. 
 ngdyfiaTu ttuquxov, aats ovxsti idvvazo 
 JO OTQUTevf^a noQtvta&aiy they harassed 
 them, so that the army could not ad- 
 vance further {any longer). 
 
 c) ovdtlg . . . oGTig firi Tzagtazai, no one who shall 
 
 not be present (or, who is not present)."* 
 fiij moTEVfav, he who does not believe, 
 ra ju// xald, dishonorable things, 
 
 d) 70 fir] Tifiiiv ytQovrag droaiov tatiy it is wrong 
 
 ^ (an unholy thing) not to honour old men. 
 
 e) firj YfvoiTOj" may it not be so ! jw^ idotg tolto, 
 
 may you never see this ! 
 
 * The thing to be considered, with respect to a relative or parti- 
 cipial clause, is, whether it introduces some new particular concerning 
 the object spoken of, or forma one complex notion with it. In this way 
 it nierely restricts the general notion to a particular sense ; the thing 
 spoken of being, not the substantive itself^ but the substantive so limited. 
 
 * Or wf , which is used (though less frequently) in the same way. 
 
 ■ In connection with future time, the Greeks and Romans marked 
 the futurity of the condition or connected notion. IFc generally do 
 not. Thus in the example we should say, * a man who is not present,' 
 taking that as a general notion, without referring it to the time of the 
 other verb. The future must be used when it is necessary to mark this 
 out ; but to use it always, as some writers do, who plume themselves 
 npon their accuracy, is against the idiom of our language ; of which 
 »ny one may convince himself by examining a few consecutive oaeu* 
 ft the English Bible. 
 
 ■ Translated by ' God forbid ! ' in the English Bible. 
 
 Hfl WITH RELATIVES, &C. 
 
 185 
 
 299. Vocabulary 50. 
 
 One who has slain a man » * ^ ' „/ * /'^r,^ ^^^ 
 
 with his own hand, the ^^^^^ y v »» < v 
 actual murderer, *'' 
 
 Wrong, wicked, impious. 
 
 Security, safety from dan- 
 ger, 
 
 Safe, 
 
 To be in safety, to be safe 
 
 Voluntarily, 
 
 Lazy, idle, 
 
 vLfOGiog^ og, or. (See 293*.) 
 dacpdXetaf a^, tj. 
 
 dacpaXrjg, ijg, f'g. 
 
 fv Tip daqjaXsl eivai, 
 
 iOtXovTi]g,'' ov^o. 
 
 dgyogj og^ 6v (from «, EQyov) 
 
 Preposition naqd. 
 
 Governs genit.j dative, and accus. 
 
 Signification : with genit. from, after such verbs as to 
 receive, learn, bring, come ; and with the agent after 
 the passive verb. 
 
 W^ith the accus., to, and (in answer to where 7) at. naqd 
 with the ace. has also the meaning of the Latin prem- 
 ier ; besides, beyond, against. 
 
 With the dative, beside, along side of, by, among (fee. 
 as earn Tzaga r^ ^aatlei, '^he stood in the king's pres- 
 ence ;" TiuQ ifioi, " in my opinion" {meojudicio.) 
 
 Besides his bread, naga tov agrov. 
 
 Beyond, more than the » ^ *ii 
 
 •V ' naga. jovg allovg. 
 
 Against the laws of the . » - ^ -' a ^ « '^ 
 
 Contrary to or beyond 
 what was expected, 
 
 naga do^av. 
 
 Phrases. 
 
 I had a narrow escape from naga fiixgov tjXOov drro- 
 
 death, ■QavEiv. 
 
 \ had a narrow escape, nag oXiyov ^liq^vyov. 
 
 I'l 
 
 • Properly, as a volunteer. 
 
186 
 
 SOME ADVERBS OF TIME, d«C. 
 
 SOME iDVERBS OF TIME, &C. 
 
 13} 
 
 M 
 
 Exercise 57. 
 
 300. He who (p) does not love his father, h impious. 
 I fear it may be impious not to honour old men. No one 
 who is not present (298. c), shall receive money. I en- 
 treat you not to stay. The sons of the Persians of the 
 present day^' pursue what is dishonorable. He who 
 (p)does not trust God, Aa^ become miserable, un^ 
 known to himself J* Not to love one's own children is 
 wicked. It is not possible for me to give you what I do 
 not possess myself. He is too wise" not to know that. 
 Not to do good to your friends, when (p)you can, is 
 wicked. Pursue those things which are not (p) against 
 the laws of the gods. He said that, if there was any oc- 
 casion, he would labour" more than the rest. Know 
 that I will incur^* this danger with you (pL) Besides 
 his bread he has wine. I am conscious'* of having had 
 1 narrow escape from death. He was very lazy so as 
 to undergo no labour voluntarily. He was very lazy 
 so that he underwent no labour, at least willingly /^ 
 I had a narrow escape from those who were pursuing 
 me. These things happened contrary to what was ex- 
 pected. If we conquer the barbarians in*^ one more 
 battle, we shall be in safety. I have received this wine 
 7^? \^® Jai^^f^l slave. They denied that they were 
 {4M6.e) the actual murderers. I suspect ^ that this i^ 
 impious. He went away, because {p) he suspected 
 that It was impious to remain. Shall we sav this r99^ 
 or not? ^ ^ 
 
 % 51. Some Adverbs of Time, ^c. 
 
 301. a) Some adverbs govern a noun in the same 
 .ase as the adjectives from which they are derived. 
 
 P irrojrrfo, is followed by acc. and i^n., or (when it implies, feat^ 
 
 302. 1) Hence comparatives and superlatives take 
 the genitive. 2) Some particles are sometimes simply 
 adverbs^ and sovaeiirnQS prepositions governing a case : 
 e. g. oifia ofJioVf together : — oifia, (or ofiov) rolg aXXoig. 
 
 303. 6) ag, as a preposition {^ngog), is only joined to 
 versons, 
 
 304. Some adverbs, especially relative ones, refer to 
 verbs and whole clauses, and thus connect propositions 
 This is the origin of conjunctions. 
 
 305. d) axQi or fitjQij eoog^ and sate, both in the sense 
 of ^until,^ and in that of * as long as,^ govern the subj. 
 or opt, when there is any uncertainty ; the i7idic. when 
 not. 
 
 306. 1) Of course the opt, will appear without aw 
 in oratione obliqua, even where there is no uncertainty. 
 2) Hence, when a thing is spoken of as an object or 
 purpose contemplated, the subj, with av ' will be used 
 in connection with pi'es, or future time ; the optative,' in 
 connection with past time and the oratio obliqua. 
 
 307. e) TiQiVf as being a comparative, takes ? (which 
 however is often omitted), and generally the infinitive, 
 but the subj. with ay, if the event is future. 
 
 Hence the axihj. with av will be used after the imperative and/u- 
 ture with negatives : 1. e. when before = iiU. 
 
 308. a) a^ioag ^fimf noXsfirjaofisVf we will conduct 
 
 the war in a manner worthy of ourselves, 
 b^ tiaijX&ev w g ifie, he came in to me. 
 
 q Itixp^i ov is often found : So ?<»; oi, &,c. 
 
 » With npiv and fiviKa, and (in poetry) with /i^x/"» ^XP'' '^^» ^l^* 
 8uhj. is sometimes found without iv. (K.) 
 
 • And according to Hermann (against Elmsley) with iv. '* Ubi in 
 rectt oratione rplv av et similes particulee conjunctivum requirunt, in 
 oratione obliqui manet av, sed conjunctivo substituitur optativus ut pro- 
 prius orationis obliquas modus." (Praef ad Track, p 8.) — Hartung says : 
 " When the optative thus takes (in oblique narration) the place of the 
 subjunctive (in direct), the particle iv may, whenever one pleases, be 
 left at his old post." (Partikellehre, ii. 304.) — Poppo, however, rejects 
 Iv from Xen. An. vii. 7, 35. iilovro fifj dncXdeXv irph Sv dTraydyoi rd arpd- 
 nvfia (which in direct narration would be, /in dire\di^{ irplv iv drrayayjit 
 , , . ), a passage quoted by Hartung. 
 
SOME ADVERBS OF TIME, &C. 
 
 iarc (ftir) at anoi>Sa\ J.aav ««^„„ • - 
 
 , With pity '° ''"'^'^ «/">» ««r*e/t,ei 
 
 Merer /eai-e o/T tin f h^' f " ""''"''' '^'«y 
 
 Near, ' , , 
 
 Nnar the city. 7^^'' 
 
 Apart, W*^i' 7';i' W;if 0,^. 
 
 Immediately, directly, ,; JJ^^'^ 
 
 Directly or straight [o the 
 citv. 
 
 ON INTERROGA*-IVE SENTENCES. 
 
 189 
 
 city, 
 
 Immediately on his arrival 
 I^rom our very birth, as 
 
 soon as we are born, 
 MostofaJI, ' 
 
 Except a very few. 
 Except if, 
 
 Out of, without the city. 
 
 
 Exercisers. 
 ' Also T«i. JAS«. ;„,.-. n^. T T — '^^*'><' 
 
 
 fighting till I have conquered you. It is not possible foi 
 you to conquer your enemies out of the city, till you 
 have chastised those in the city itself. He went away 
 before I came. I was banished myself before you re- 
 turned-from-banishment. Whilst you are still at leisure, 
 speak. We were afraid, till {fi^xQ^g) the Greeks sailed 
 away. They did not cease till (before) they sent for the 
 boy's father. We used to wait about » till the gates 
 were opened. I will not go away till (before) I have 
 conquered you. He said, that he would come to us, 
 whilst he still might. Do not cease, till you have mas- 
 tered your temper. Whilst you remain, combat the boy's 
 disorder. He said that he feared the gods most, when- 
 ever he was most prosperous (was doing best). The 
 general went in to the king. And they {of persons be- 
 fore mentioned^ 38) obeyed, except if any man stole 
 any thing. He said that he was nearly related^ ^ to him. 
 They march straight to the city. Immediately on his 
 arrival, he told me that we ought to set about^^ the task. 
 From our very birth we want many things. He died as 
 soon as he was born. 
 
 § 52. On Interrogative Sentences^ 
 
 311. Besides the interrogative adverbs and pronouns, 
 ^he following particles are used in questions. 
 
 312. oLQa is mostly used in questions that imply sorao- 
 thing oi uncertainty^ doubt, or surprise, 
 
 313. The answer * Yes^ is expected by, — 
 
 ctQ oh; 7] 7«V / ov ; ovxovv ; aXXo rt rj; 
 
 314. The answer * iVb' is expected by, — 
 
 una [i/j; tj nov {num fortel) firi or n^v . ^ 
 
 ^ irepiftivbi. 
 
 w ft^opz^ufi ovv : but the etymology being forgotten, ovv is sometiraea 
 a8<»4 with it. Also pwi/ /i^ ; and /itSy oi ; the latter requiring an aeeent- 
 n> viawcr (^nonnc?) 
 
 4 i 
 
 I 
 
140 
 
 ON INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 Oas oi expects yes; nf,, no.^oi, is often followed by \ilvTot i alvi 
 by Sn.Sjj a-or, with which it has an ironical foxce^ I imafrine^ fortooth. 
 Also ovrt vov. 
 
 315. h. i) sha, tmira {then — and yet— and neverthe- 
 less) express astonishment and displeasure, implying 
 that what they suppose has been done, is inconsistent 
 with something before mentioued. 
 
 316. k) From the frequent use of aUo rt 5, it came to 
 be used as a simple interogative particle, and the ^ 
 was often dropt.« It is then better to write it as one 
 word, aXlon (K.) 
 
 317. jlna&(ov ; {having suffered what? = ) what pos 
 
 sesses you to . . . &,c. ? 
 tl finOcov ; {having learnt what! =what in 
 duces you to . . . (fee. ? 
 
 These phrases are used in indignant^ reproachful questions : the 
 former obviously relates to the/ec/inir*; the latter to the under 
 ttanamg, and consequently to more deliberate offences. 
 
 318. a) ag evrvx^t^' ; are you prosperous 7 
 
 faq ovx t6tiv aa&svj]g ; is not he ill 7 
 ^^ J ^ he is ill, isnH he 7 
 
 I ^Q(^ M ^otiv aaOevr^g ; is he ill 7 ) ry. 
 
 [ ^ he is not ill, is he 7 \^^^' 
 
 c) t] 7T0V TSToX/iTjxag ravra ; you have not surely 
 
 dared to do this 7 [No.] 
 
 d) Ti yccQ, idv 71 iQoiza ae ZajxQctTrjg, UTroxomi ; if 
 
 Socrates puts any question to you, you 
 will answer him, will you not 7 [Yes.] 
 
 e) ovri 7Z0V iyat dyQotxtXofiai ; surely I am not 
 
 behaving rudely am I? [No.] 
 
 f) fiav jias ddixsT; ^ he has not injured you in 
 
 any respect has hel [No.] 
 
 g) lATi u vEtaieQov* dyyilXsig; you bring no baa 
 news I ho pe, do you 7 [No.] 
 
 « Stallbaum thinks it was dropt in animated, impassioned ques- 
 Uons, and retained in those of a more sedate and sober character. 
 
 y The present of this word is used for the perfect, for a man eon- 
 tvmes to wrong us till he has made us reparation. (Heindorf, Protag. 
 
 • wwrtpoj for vtov{a new thing; netcs), and that per euphemismum 
 w KaUv. (Heind. Prot. 461.) 
 
 [Yes.] 
 
 ON INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 141 
 
 TVftTO!}. 
 
 fXev&EQog, a, ov. 
 
 h) lit iaiyag UXovrog &v ; and did you then 
 hold your tongue, you Plutus 7 
 
 t) 1 71 BIZ ovH out ^eovg dv&QcoTToov ri qiQOvri^eiv ^ 
 do you then really not think that the 
 gods regard mankind 7 
 
 k) dXXo Ti tj 71£qI nXsiarov fzoiyy ontog mg peXtiatoi 
 01 if6(6tsQ0i eaovTai ; do not you look upoti 
 it as a thing of extreme importaficBj 
 that the risitig generation should turn 
 out as well as possible 7 
 aXXoTi ovv olyB cpiXoxegdeTg q)iXov6i to xfgSog . 
 what ! do not the covetous love gain 7 
 
 319. Vocabulary 52. 
 
 To strike, 
 
 Free, 
 
 Weak, ill, daOevrig, rig, ig (a, aOirog, 
 
 strength). 
 
 Weakness, infirmity, a , ^z 
 
 complaint, . ' '» < 
 
 Fond of gain, (fiXoxegdi^gf i^g, sg. 
 
 Preposition ngog. 
 
 Governs genit., dative, and accus. 
 
 Signification: to, close by ; in answer to whither 7 ngog 
 generally takes the accus. : in answer to where 7 the 
 dative. 
 
 With ace, TtQog also means towards, against, in refer- 
 ence to, with a view to, in comparison of 
 
 With genit. ngog means from, by (after to hear, to be 
 praised or blamed by, and frequently after the pas- 
 sive verb). 
 
 It is also used with genit. of situation and in adjura- 
 tions. 
 
 I am wholly wrapt up in % ^^ '.« ^i^. .? .t 
 
 To pay close attention to . « r * ^a^. 
 
 one's affairs, «eofTo.ff;re«r^a«y.yrw<>« 
 
 In addition to this, ngog rovroig. 
 
142 
 
 ON INTEEROGATIIHE SENTENCES. 
 
 To fight against a person, 
 To calculate with one- 
 self, 
 
 To be dishonoured by. 
 
 On the father^s side, 
 
 1) To be consistent with, 
 like, characteristic of; 2) 
 to be on his side ; 3) to 
 make for him, to be for 
 his interest ; to be a good 
 thing for him. 
 
 ftQog iiva. 
 
 Xoyi^ea&ai ngog tavtof (sc 
 
 with cxsTrtsaOatf 6}i07ieip, 
 
 to consider). 
 aiifid^iaOai nQogtiroq 
 fTQog TiaTQog. 
 
 thai TTQog iivog. 
 
 Exercise 59. 
 
 320. Are not these things for our interest rather than 
 for thatof our enemies (318.6)? Is not he wholly wrapt 
 up in these things? You do not surely wish to have 
 wmein addition to your bread (318. c)? Idonot^wrc/v 
 actmsolentlydoI(318. e)l You are not come to bring us 
 (/?) any bad news, I hope {are you) ? [No.] And are you, 
 then, not without fear of death, though (p) a pious man 
 (318. A)? And do you, then, not think that you shall 
 be punished for what you have done (p. 'pass.) against 
 the laws of the gods ? What possesses you to strike* 
 a free man? What induces you not to choose to stay 
 with us any longer? What possesses you, that you 
 will not cease to behave-insolently^* towards your 
 friends ? These things are not more Jfor the ifiterest of 
 our enemies than of us, are they? [No.] Have you 
 been in any respect dishonoured by Xenoclides ? Do 
 you not think it a most important thing, that your child- 
 ren should be brought up as well as possible (318. k)l 
 U IS not like a pious man to fear death excessively. 
 The other party are more on Cyrus's side. Know that 
 these things are^* for the interest of Cyrus. I know that 
 he IS on the side of the Athenians. De we not both see 
 and hear from our very birth .?»• 
 
 • Translate as if it were, « hating suffered what do you strike V tc 
 
 INDIRECT SINGLE QITESTIONS. 
 
 U8 
 
 % 63. Indirect single Questions, 
 
 321. a) The proper forms for indirect questions are 
 those pronouns and adverbs which are formed from the 
 direct iiiterrogatives by the prefixed relative syllable 
 6 — , which gives them a connecting power. 
 
 Thus from jrdffoj ; iroToi ; irov ; nddev ; nuis ; &c. are formed hndaost 
 
 hiroToSy ovov, inrddev, oircjf, &C. 
 
 So offrti, formed by prefixing the relative to n'f , is the proper de 
 pendent interrogative. See 72, note y. 
 
 322. But as the Greeks often pass from oblique to 
 direct narration, so they often use the simple interroga- 
 lives in dependent questions; and even, as in {b^inter- 
 mix the two. 
 
 323. c) Occasionally, thougji very seldom, the rela- 
 tive forms themselves are used in dependent questions. 
 
 c) When, as in this example, a pronoun or noun is the accus. 
 after the first verb, and the nom. before the second, it is generally 
 expressed in the accus. ^^ and not in the nominative. 
 
 324. d) When the person of whom the question is 
 asked repeats it, he uses the forms beginning with 6 — . 
 
 325. a) ovx o7da (or ovx ^x<o) onoi TQUTKOftai. (See 72. b), 
 
 ovx oida oat ig iaii, I don't know who he 
 is. ovx olda OTzayg to TiQayna £7tqu^£v, 1 
 don't know how he did the thing, ano- 
 XQirat clrdQEiag ott otequ aoi qaireTai, an- 
 swcr boldly which of the two is your 
 opifiion. 
 
 b) ifffisp'' no (J a ti Ian xai oTzoia, we know both 
 
 ^ how many they are, and of what kind, 
 
 c) OQag oyv rjtAag, tcpTj, oaoi iafisv ; do you see, 
 
 said he, how many we are? (or how 
 mafiy there are of us ?) 
 
 » The accusative is generally retained in the English Bibie j 
 know thee, who thou art," drc. 
 • See 71. c. 
 
 « 
 
144 
 
 INDIRECT SINGLE QUESTIONS. 
 
 M| 
 
 - k > 
 
 t' 
 
 d) ovtog,'^ u TTomg ; — o,t< noioi ; you there, lohai 
 are you doing 7— Achat am I doing ? 
 
 326. Vocabulary 53. 
 
 Preposition vno. 
 Governs genit., dative^ and accus. 
 Signification : with genit., hy, after passive verbs and 
 
 active verbs with a passive notion. Also, to express 
 
 a cause ; from^ out o/, through, 
 TVith dat.^ under, after verbs of rest only: sometimes. 
 
 instead of the gen., after passive verbs {dafi^vai vno 
 
 rivi). 
 
 With accus., under, after verbs of rest as well as verbs 
 of motion. Also, about, of time. 
 
 To die by the hands of, aTTo&aveiv vno (gen). 
 
 To learn by compulsion, vn avdyntig. 
 
 He did it through or from < . », ,., 
 fear, ^"^ ^^^^^ (o««>?, ovg, to). 
 
 To be mad from intoxica- , , , 
 tion. ^"^ fis&Tjg ftaiveaOai, 
 
 At or about nightfall, l„h vvxta {sub noctem). 
 
 V 
 
 Exercise 60. 
 
 " 327. The slave died by the hands of his master. 
 Most boys learn by compulsion. I perceived (p) that 
 the boy learnt by compulsion. I do not repent of hav- 
 ing learnt^* these things by compulsion. He said that 
 the shameless flatterer was mad from intoxication. 
 The few are wounded by the many. I will go away on 
 condition that (269. e) you will yourselves set out at 
 nightfall. Do you see, said he, how many men are 
 wounded by a few ? I don't know how the eagle had 
 his eye knocked out.«» I shall praise (all) whom I see 
 (94. 1) marching in good order. How much would your 
 possessions fetch, if they were sold? He says that he 
 
 * ovrof, avrr,^ are iMed (instead of roc ) in exclamations ; you there .« 
 
 DOUBLE QUESTIONS. 
 
 145 
 
 will hold his tongue though he should have '* much to 
 say. If the slave should die by your hands, you will be 
 punished. Do you see how many there are of the ene- 
 my? He says that he has been entrusted with these 
 ibioj^'j.** These things happened about the same time. 
 
 €118 
 
 ^ 54. Double Questions, 
 
 328. Direct double questions are asked by noTsgop 
 (or norega) — rj, less commonly by aga — ?. 
 
 Rem. {iwv — *t is still less common : 5 — ? belongs to poetry, espe- 
 cially epic poetry. 
 
 329. Indirect double questions are asked by sits— 
 si — 5: nitsgov — §. 
 
 Rem. ft—? belongs to epic poetry, though occasionally found in 
 Atiic poets. uTt — ^, and tl — ctrc, are also used by poets. 
 
 330. a) aotsgov sxpovrai Kvgcp, ij ov ; will they follow 
 
 Cyrus or not ? 
 ngiv drjXov slvai , . . noTsgof sx^ovtai, Kvgcp, ^ 
 ovf before it was known, whether, &c. 
 6)-T0t;T(j» tov vovv TTgoasxs, si dixaia XsyoD, rj fiiy, 
 attend to this, whether what I speak is 
 just or not, 
 c) oxonmfisv Bits tixog ovroag sx^iv, sits lii^, let us 
 consider whether it is likely to be so, or 
 not. 
 
 331. Vocabulary 54. 
 
 The road home, ^ oixads • odog 
 
 To suffer a thing to be 
 
 done, to allow it to be nsgiogdooJ 
 
 done with impunity. 
 
 • oUaSe is from the ace. of a shortei form (such as of^, oUdi) of o7iro?. 
 7 nough this form does not occur, several similar ones do ; c. g. dX«r, 
 Kf6Ka, for dXicfi, Kp6iniv. TB.) 
 
 ' It takes the infinitive if the thing is to be prevented; the partiei' 
 pie if it is to be avenged. Of course (by 73, note r) nepii'SeTv will be used 
 for aor., nept6^ea6at for fut. — The phrase brings to one's mind our '!• 
 
 7 
 
146 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON «i, ear. 
 
 Boldly, 
 
 Restore an exile, 
 To pay attention to, to at- 
 tend to, 
 liikely, natural, 
 
 ^a^mp (participle). 
 xatayoo, 
 
 toy vovv TXQoasxHVj or mfo^i 
 ^ Xm only, with daU 
 iixog.' 
 
 Exercise 61. 
 
 332. I don't know whether he is alive or dead. If 
 yon attend to your afiairs yourselves, all will be well. 
 If you attended to your afiairs yourselves, all would be 
 well. If you had attended to your afiairs yourselves, 
 all would be well. I will not allow our land to have 
 been ravaged with impunity. Are the same dogs pur- 
 suing the sheep, or not ? Go away boldly o?i condition 
 of holding your tongue. 
 
 I fear that we shall forget our road home. I knew 
 that they would not sufler'* their country to be ravaged. 
 O citizens, let us not sufiei our country to be ravaged. 
 They will not stand hy and see us injured. They 
 made peace on condition that both (parties) should re- 
 tain {have) their own. He said that Xenoclides was 
 too wise** to be deceived by his slaves. He says that 
 more arms were taken than could have been expected 
 from the number of the dcad,^* He says that /te'« is 
 not afraid of death. The king sent persons to restore 
 (the exile) Xenoclides (238*, third example). 
 
 ii 
 
 § 55. Observations on si, Idv. 
 
 333. a) H is used for ort (that^ after Oavf*d^to, and 
 some other verbs expressive -^1 feelings, 
 
 Hand by and see' (a man injured) ; but it gets its meaning in a diflfereni 
 way ; i. e. not from the notion of seeing and yet not acting, but from 
 that of not seeing, of looking round about an object instead of at a. 
 Hence it agrees more nearly with our to overlook (an offence). 
 
 ■ Ncut. ofciKus, part, of eoua {am like)^ which has three forms o 
 part, ioicwj, €Uus, otKui. (B.) 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON sl, idv. 
 
 147 
 
 This arises from the Attic habit of avoiding positivcness in speak 
 ing; which, in this case, speaks of what may be quite certain aa 
 only probable. ^ 
 
 334. b) el is (as we have seen, 80) used for ' whether ;' 
 it has this meaning after verbs of seeing, knowing, con- 
 ndering, asking, saying, trying, <fec. 
 
 335. idv is also used in this way with the subjunctive 
 when the question relates to an expected case that re- 
 mains to be proved, (K.) 
 
 336. a) dyavaxtoj el ovrmal^ a rooj fitj oUg t eifit 
 
 elneiVy lam indignant at being so unable 
 to express my meanifig, 
 
 ovx dyann el fit] dixt^v tdtaxsv, he is not con- 
 tented with not having been ptmished. 
 
 ^avfid^m el ftr^Selg vfxmv bgyl^eiai, I a7n as- 
 tonished, that not one amongst you is 
 angry, 
 b) (jxe'xpai^ el b*EXh\vaiv vofiog xdXXtov txet, con- 
 sider whether the Grecian law is better. 
 
 ax expat eav toSe aol fidXXov dgiaxri, see 
 whether this pleases you better, 
 fir^ds Tovto aQQfjTOv ecrrw fioi, idv ae ncog TzeiacOf 
 nor let me leave this unsaid, lilmay by 
 any means persuade you (i. e. that I 
 may see whether) I can, (fee. 
 
 337. Vocabulary 55. 
 Aminlignant, 
 
 O Athenians, 
 Please, 
 
 dyavaxTtco {dative; but il 
 takes the accus. of a neut. 
 pron.) 
 
 0) dpdQeg ^A&rivaXoi, 
 
 dqeaxoi ^ (dat.) 
 
 ^ Demonstrative pronouns and adverbs are strengthened by what is 
 called the » demonstrativum, which is a long accented i answering to 
 'ce in Lat. Short vowels are thrown away before it. 'jvroci {this man 
 
 here), ovmt, ravri, &C. So ovrcjai. 
 
 * The Attics use ckoitcj, oKo-roifxaty for present (not <r*ftTro/<a(), but oKi 
 ^ /»ai, ioKexpafiriv, and evKeitfiat, from aKiirrouai, depon. middle. 
 
 ' dpcffKU), dp'cao}^ &.C perf pass. tipcaftai : >)f»aOnp. 
 
[ 
 
 il 
 
 148 
 
 CONDENSED QUESTIOIfS. 
 
 Exercise 62. 
 
 338. It is this very thing, O Athenians, that T anj in- 
 dignant at, I that you alloio half your country (58) to 
 have been ravaged with impimity. This it is that I am 
 indignant at. Cyrus being indignant, sets out with 
 {part.) five horsemen for Sardis. He pleases more men 
 than any other single person.** He says that he is of a 
 mild disposition (137. a). I asked him whether the 
 king was of a mild disposition or not. Do you see how 
 many are suffering the same as you (182. a)? Do you 
 know of what kind the laws of the Persians are (323) ? 
 You there, what do you say ? — What do I say ! Al- 
 though, if any man is of a mild disposition, it is he.*' 
 I wonder that you are not able to go in without being 
 observed^* He says that he is not of a character to do 
 any thing whatever for the sake of gain (283). 
 
 ^ 56. Condensed Questions, 
 
 339. a. b. c) By attaching the interrogative to a par- 
 ticiple, or using it in an oblique case, the Greeks employ 
 a single sentence in questions where we must use two. 
 
 Rem. Thus in translatinsf from English into Greelc, a relative 
 clause attached to an interrogative one will be got rid of. 
 
 340. a) ti af noiovvrsg avaXd^onv trjf aQxalav agsr^p; 
 
 what must they do to recover their an^ 
 cient virtuel (or, by what conduct can 
 they, &c.?) 
 b) xaiaftffid&Tjxag ovv Tovg ri rrotovvrag to 
 ovofia jovio uTioxalovatv ; (have you learnt 
 = ) do you know J then, what those persona 
 do, to whom men apply this name ? 
 
 I I am indignant at this thing itselfl 
 
 CONDENSED QUESTIONS. 
 
 149 
 
 e) titag rovaff ogm ^evovg ; who are Jthese 
 strangers whom I behold 7 
 
 341. Vocabulary 56. 
 
 With what object in view, 
 
 By Jupiter, 
 
 No, by Jupiter, 
 
 Apollo, 
 
 Neptune, 
 
 Minerva, 
 
 Swallow, 
 
 Nightingale, 
 
 Spring, 
 
 Once, 
 
 Bring, lead. 
 
 To burn out, 
 
 Feacock, 
 
 Ti ^ovXofisvog; 
 vtj Jia, or vtj tov " Jia, 
 fid Jia. 
 
 ^udnoXXonv,'^ (ovog, 6, 
 IIo(jeidmv, mvog, 6. 
 '/4&tjpd, ug, tj. 
 X^Xidrnv,'* ovog J t}, 
 drid(6vyV 6rog {ovg), ij. 
 eaQf'* eaQog, to. 
 
 dyos. 
 ixxaioo. 
 taoig, 0), 6. 
 
 Exercise 63. 
 
 342. One swallow does not make a spring. He tolo 
 me that one swallow did not make a spring. I asked 
 by what conduct I should please the gods. The eagle 
 is having its eyes burnt out.** He says that the eagle 
 has had its eyes burnt out. With whdt view did the 
 other party march into the country of the Scythians ihe 
 same spring ? The peacock lays only once a year. He 
 (p) who commits no injury,' requires no law. By 
 Apo' lo, I will be with you, if I am wanted. By Minerva, 
 I will free the boy from his disorder. Who is this phy 
 sician that you are bringing (340. c) ? Will you not go 
 away at once ? — No, by Jupiter, not I (eycoyc). Even if 
 
 ■ The art. is generally used except in /i») or fia Aia. 
 
 ■ •AtriiXXcjf and HoaetSuiv have ace. 'Aw^AXw, YloouSiSf voe. 'AnoX.K,^, 
 
 f driS<iv, has also G. dnSovtt V. ariSoT. 
 
 * In prose cap is nom. in use : but the gen. and dat. are of the ooa« 
 traded form, JjpoSf ^pi. 
 
 ' Who injurea not at all. 
 
150 
 
 VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS. 
 
 VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS. 
 
 151 
 
 I-' 
 
 I 
 
 you should be unseen by others, you will at least be con 
 scious^yourself of having acted unjustly. What do those 
 sons do with whom all men, so to speak,** are afiigry 
 (340. b) 7 He envies every body.'* By Neptune, there 
 is nobody he does not plot against (277). Envy nobody. 
 The nightingale sings most beautifully. 
 
 ^ 57. Various Constructions, 
 
 343. a) ri iJLiqv is a solemn form of asseveration. 
 
 344. h) The prepos. avv is omitted before avrip, aitzi^, 
 &c. which then = together withy with. 
 
 345. c) afxcpotegov is used adverbialli/ {oT ellipticallj/) 
 by the poets both ; as well — as, <kc. So ufiqjoiega is 
 used in reference to two words, without being made to 
 conform to them in case. 
 
 346. d) When xai refers to alXog, it has the force of 
 especially/, in particular. 
 
 347. e) egxsa&ai, ttvai, with part, fut., is to be going 
 to, or on the point of. 
 
 348. /. g) Sometimes hxco makes an emphatic circum- 
 locution with the past particip. : and with some verbs 
 (e. g. the 2nd pers. of XrjQsiVf Ttai^eiv, qiXvuQeTv) it is used to 
 make a good-humoured observation. 
 
 349. h) qr/|pfl)i' appears redundant in some expressions, 
 but denotes a vehemence of purposenot altogether free 
 from blame. 
 
 Hence it answers to our to go and do a (foolish, impetuous) thing ; 
 to take a thing andjling it away, &c. 
 
 350. a) 1] fiTjv sTiaOov tovio, I protest that I suffered 
 
 this, ofivv^i ' ^ firjv dcoaeir, I swear that I 
 will assuredly give (or, solemnly swear 
 that I will give). 
 
 * Sftytijity inovnaif d^iojiOKa. ujftoaa. Perf. pass, dfiiofiocriiai, but the Othei 
 
 •enons and aor. 1 . pass, more commonly without the a. 
 
 b) ancoXovzo at vn^S avtoXg avdQaciv, the ships 
 
 were lost together with their crews. 
 
 c) diaqitQOvieg ? aocpin ? acUXXsi ydficporega, dis- 
 
 anguished either for wisdo?n or beauty ^ 
 
 or both. ^ 
 
 d) xd re dXXa evdaifiovei x a I fialdag bxh xatrj- 
 
 itoovg avrcf), he is happy both in other re- 
 spects and especially in having obedient 
 children. 
 
 e) OTIEQ Ja * ig^vy what I was going to say. 
 
 f) ndXai {^aviidaag tx(a, I have long been 
 
 wondering. 
 
 g) fiatXeig'' h^^^ V^^^ are joking. 
 
 h) vm^aXev iavtovqisgayv Ofj^aioig, he went and 
 flimg himself into the hands of the The- 
 bans. 
 
 351. Vocabulary 57. 
 To swear, 
 
 Just as he was 
 
 oiAvvni {ace. of the god or 
 
 thiiig sworn by). 
 ^neg or moTzeg elx^v. 
 
 Exercise 64. 
 
 352 The damsel is beautiful in person (137) in other 
 respects, and especially has very beautiful eyes.'^ He 
 swore that he would assuredly give them three talents 
 if he had them. I sweat that 1 will assuredly do this. 
 1 swear by all the gods that I will assuredly confer a 
 sreal benefit upon the state. Those with the king, with 
 f«) their heads uncovered, charged the ranks of the 
 Greeks He told me that the ships were lost, together 
 with their crews. He told me that, but for'' the gener- 
 al the ships would have been lost, together with their 
 crews. Are you not trying (me),- whether I am mad 
 
 » Imperf. of c7/ii, t6o. •. u • ^ 
 
 • :rai<(., ^a.'^«Ha*. -"S/^^'* Trcrra.a/iac l^aica. Later writers have e,ra.|a. 
 
 • «.fa<rOai takcs gen., seldom ace. (Thue. i. 71.) 
 
152 
 
 VAEIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS, 
 
 VARIOUS COKSTRUCTIONS. 
 
 153 
 
 326. c) ? You are not trying (me) whether I am mad, \n 
 you / Is he distinguished from ^ other people by (his) 
 wisdom, or (his) temperance, or both (360. c)l Are you 
 
 ^'"'"/i"!' V^ y°'' ^^^ • ^y^^s set out just as he was. 
 with five horsemen. He went and gave (350. h) all his 
 possessions to his neighbour. I have long been wonder 
 ing at the shamelessness of this flatterer (350 /) 
 
 § 5d Various Constructions continued. 
 
 .tJn^' ""^ ^"^^^r ^'^"'^^' «^'°^' <^^-» ^he personal oon 
 struction is preferred to the impersonal. 
 
 354. b) 5aop is used elliplically with the infinitive. 
 
 •555. c) Some words that impl^ sl comparison (e. g. 
 ^^avstv, diatfiQm, spavuog, dmXdaiog, idia;, 
 vrng^ev, nqiv) often take the construction 
 with ?. 
 
 -n^^3 ^^ X^^ ^?^ ''''''''' ^^ °^^^^ admitted after oidif 
 
 J57. /) A person^s qtioted words, when quoted ex- 
 actly as he uttered them, are introduced by Zu. 
 
 wh^n^' n?r J^ ^^^ ^'^^^^ ^"^^^^ ^^^«" f''om our own : tr« omit ' i/iof 
 when a person's words are quoted exactly, and insert it when not 
 
 ^ ^^r*/^ ^^^?l ^' °'''— ' (i" questions) the aor. an- 
 pears to be used for the present. ^ 
 
 358. a) dixaiog eifn roZro TTQdzreip (=d/xaioV iari9 
 
 J Does he differ from . . . ?) 
 ./™ y^^° ^^® S»o is spelt with an apostrophusin this phrase it mostlv 
 ceni was dropt, because m some very similar Dhraaes the A).v i» ai\'. 
 Whe^ev^Ht '^'" '^ " ^^/^i^ ^^ ^^ whettr it s aTds for l"r aAV 
 
 rowtio^tcJfaim flT'r '""' ^"'" '" '"*^' '^"'^"^ "H«c inter- 
 
 ff<* TovTo TTQcctTfiv), it is jiist {oi right) 
 that I should do this. 
 
 b) eqjOuae togovtov oaov fluxtjTa dreytaxtvai to 
 
 \ptj(fi(jftay it arrived first (indeed), but 
 only sufficietithj so, for Paches to have 
 had time to read out the decree. 
 
 c) qj&dveig fAxojy ^ rd nttjvd cfevysiv, you draw 
 
 (your nets) before the birds fly away. 
 
 d) ovx dv cp&dvoi dnoOv/jaxoiVf* he will cer- 
 
 tainly die (or, be killed). 
 
 e) 71 dXXo ovxoi 7/ hf^ovX^vaav ; what did thesf 
 
 people do but plot ? 
 
 f) aTiexQivaTO on ^aaiXeiav ovx dv de^aifjtjv, /u 
 
 answered, "I would not receive a king 
 dom." 
 
 g) ti ovH fTToiqaufisv ; (why have not we dom 
 
 it?=) why donH we do it 7 Let us du 
 it directly 7 
 
 359. Vocabulary 58. 
 Give orders, order, i7iizdtt(o. 
 
 Wou\d probably h^veheen ly^^^i^^^.^ev av ha^fdaqliva.. 
 
 destroyed, 
 To be the slave of, ^ovXntn. 
 
 Exercise 65. 
 
 360. But for Xenoclides, the whole country would 
 probably have been ravaged. But it is just that every 
 man should defend the laws of his country. You do 
 nothing but give orders. He answered, I should be a 
 fool if (p) I were to do this. He answered, I will give 
 you a portion of the food which I have myself. He 
 went away before his friend arrived. It is right that 
 every body should oblige such a man as you are. He 
 answered, I have done more service to the state than 
 
 ■ That is, he cannot die ti o soon (for die he must). 
 1 difierfnt explanation. 
 
 Buttmann givea 
 
 r 
 
 !1| 
 
154 
 
 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 155 
 
 I 
 
 any other single person. He answered, I will come tc 
 you if I am wanted. You do nothing but laugh at all 
 the citizens. What do you do but hold all men cheap ? 
 He answered, I will collect as many men as I possibly 
 can. He answered, I will come to you as quickly as 
 possible, to {p) combat the faithful slave's disorder. He 
 answered, if any body has done much service to the 
 state it is you. They arrived first, indeed, by just time 
 enough to have destroyed those with the king (358. b\ 
 Why don't you make me also happy ? Why don't you 
 answer? He answered, if Xenoclides had not been 
 present, the ships would have perished, together with 
 their crews. If (p) you do this, you will certainly be 
 the slave of your temper. If he were not ambitious, 
 he would not undergo every labour. 
 
 § 59. List of Partirles and short connecting and 
 
 tUher Phrases. 
 
 Obs Those itUh mm, asterisk cannot stand first in a sentence. 
 
 41*' 
 
 361. ajsdi^, ^ bui tome f ^ come now.'' 
 
 362. ad {Ion. and poet, aisi, aiiv\ always. 
 
 6 asi aQja>v, the archon for the time bein rr ; the 
 person who at any time is archon. 
 
 363. &lri9ig (accented in this way), ironically, indeed! 
 %iane 1 
 
 ?64. «Ua, but. It is often used to introduce quick, ab- 
 rupt retorts, objections, exhortations, <fec. ilX M- 
 fttToi', Miay bur, it's impossible' (or, why, it's iwr 
 possible). dUa ^ovXofiai, * well, / will ! ' 
 akin is also our 'but' =^^ except' after general 
 
 negatives : some case of StXlog generally stands Id 
 the preceding clause. 
 
 a)X ?,* unless, except; nisi, 
 
 alio u 7j (or aXXon) ; used as an interrogative par 
 tide (316). 
 
 aXXmg re 7(ai\ especially, in particular. 
 ^5. afiUy at the same time (as prep, together with, 
 dat.) ana followed by xa/ in the following clause ; 
 as soon as (omitting the xat.^) The two assertions 
 are marked out as occurring at the same time ; and 
 the particles may be variously translated, according 
 to the view with which the coincidence is pointed 
 out: no sooner — than; already— when ; when— 
 at once, &c. 
 
 366. aniUi (properly the imperat. of afislm, don't mind 
 or be anxious about), as adv. doubtless, certainly, 
 
 367. *«y, see75: for cay, see 77. 
 
 368. ava,' up ! (for avdarTjOij rise up !) 
 
 369. dv& wf, because, for (267). 
 
 370. ""dga^ («e, C«i* i^^ ^P^^ poets), therefore, conse- 
 quently, then. 
 
 1) It is also used where it seems to be without 
 power, but indicates conformity with the na- 
 ture of things or with custom; as might 
 have been expected; ex ordine, rite. Hence 
 it serves to mark a transition to an expected 
 proposition. 
 
 • dXX' h has this meining after negatives and questions that imply a 
 negative. The dXV might sometimes be supposed aXU, used elliptically ; 
 but frequently this is impossible ; and it is better, therefore, to under- 
 stand it always to be dXAd. (KrQger.)— A case of 5XXo$ often stands 
 already in the sentence. The construction probably arose from two 
 nearly equivalent forms : ov6h aWo^dWd, and ov6lv fiXXo — J}. (K.) 
 
 »» C. g. afta dxriKSaiiiy ri «fal rpirtpapxovs KaQiarajitv, 'Afia is also UScd 
 with the part, like fif rd|w : fi /i « tovt* eindp dviarn- 
 
 • When prepositions are used alone as adverbs, and thus become 
 equivalent to verbs, they throw back the accent. 
 
 * The old derivation from 'AFQ (to fit, trans, and intrans.) ieemi 
 fcr pneferable to Hartung's derivation from a common root with apTrd^w, 
 rapio, r«pente. So KOhner. 
 
 * Enclitic. 
 
156 
 
 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 , 
 
 ■ft 
 
 2) After ei, idp, &c. it has the force of indeed 
 OT perchance.— ei fiij aga (nisi forte) has often 
 ^ an ironical meaning ; unless, forsoothJ 
 
 371. ate (with part), as being (242. a). 
 
 372. *«? {backwards), again ; 2) on the other hand , 
 c) further ; and then also, 
 
 373. *avt8, avrdg (both Epic), and atdg, have the same 
 m^eanmg as av. So also the poetical ''av{^ig, Ion. 
 
 0-4 "''"^* ("^^"^ ^"^ «^«^ ^«^^*« a sentence or clause.) 
 3^4. aytrng, thus (emphatical) : 2) ut erat ; of things in 
 their original, unchanged state, or that are of com- 
 mon every-day occurrence; 3) it is attached to 
 words expressing reproach, contempt, or neglect, 
 e. g. childish, useless, vain, <kc. Hence 4) it is used 
 alone as equivalent to f4dTijf,idly, vainly, uselessly. 
 It is a sister form of ovioog.s (B). 
 
 r. 
 
 375. *YdQ (ys dQa),for. 
 
 It often. refers to a short sentence to be mentally- 
 supplied (such as, I believe it; no wonder. 
 &c.) In questions »» it answers pretty nearly 
 to our ^then,^ and implies surprise (^why? 
 what 7) 
 
 tlydq; quid enim? ov quidnienim 7 =^ certainly, 
 tj be sure. ^ 
 
 n^S ydq; {Alt.) is an emphatic denial =^by no 
 means. 
 
 376. V(a strengthening particle), a^/ca^/,. at all events, 
 certainly. 
 
 ' *Apa, the interrog. particle, stands first in its sentence. " Attic 
 pocto, however, allow themselves to interchange the quantity, and use 
 apa for eorueguently, &pa as the interrog. particle; but without altering 
 the proper p/ace of each." (B.) u* oiicnng 
 
 ^ f Hennann, on the other hand, says, that it should always be written 
 ynm m Homer; and Hartung thinks Buttmann's a strange mistake, the 
 denvauon bemg from avr6i, he and no other, self (so that aura„=Mtt« 
 and mno other way). He considers that the rough breathing is only a 
 dialectic peculiarity. aura>f JEol, aZruii Att. (Eustath.) 
 ' Especially after ris ; ndre ; irw$ ; &c. 
 For which yovv is more commonly used. 
 
 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 157 
 
 It adds strength and emphasis to the word to 
 which it is added, answering the same purpose 
 that an elevation of the voice does in speak- 
 ing, or italics in a printed passage. It is used 
 in rejoinders and answers, either to confirm 
 or to restrict; also in exhortations to make 
 them more impressive. 
 iyoDye, I for my part — slxozmg ye, quite naturally 
 — ^rafi; ye, quite so, certainly, 
 ye di],^ certainly. 
 
 ye tot, yet at least ; at least however ; however, 
 ye firiv (certe vero ; vero), certainly however ; but 
 yet ; hence it is also a strengthened di. 
 
 I 
 
 J. 
 
 377. ^loti [=bia tovto oTi), because: but later writers 
 
 often use it for oti, that. 
 i78. *de(see fitv) has three meanings of and, but, for 
 
 [the last in the old writers only]. • 
 
 379. *^jj,> a strengthening particle, properly 7ioio (for 
 which ftdrj is used) ; it is employed in various ways 
 to enliven a speech : — 
 
 dye d^, (ptge di^, come now ! 
 
 ri dri ; what then 7 
 It a.so means truly, forsooth. After relatives it 
 has the force of our * ever.^ octig ^/J, whoever it may 
 be, &c. It often follows superlatives. 
 
 380. *drinov (confirms a conjecture proposed. M.) : it is a 
 more emphatical nov (see nov), I imagine or sup- 
 pose; doubtless. 
 
 *d^nov&ev is used to hint, with a little irony, that 
 the contrary is impossible. 
 
 ^ Interest hoc inter yl Sfj et yl rot, quod Sn sententiam per yi restric- 
 tam simpliciter confirmat, rot autem earn sententiam indicat oppositam 
 CMC praBcedentibus quodammodo. Hinc yi in est sane quidem, enim" 
 vero; ye roi autem certe quidem. (Hemi.) •*• 
 
 ' It is only in Homer and Pindar that i >) stands at the beginning 
 uf a proposition or clause. (M.) 
 
158 
 
 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 159 
 
 
 V5*£..has also the ironical force ofai forsooth. (M) 
 
 E. 
 
 381. £/ if; 2) whether; and 3) after some verbs of 
 feeling, that. (See 333.) ^ 
 
 \ eixai, if even, although, 
 ( xa 
 
 382. 
 
 xaJ ft, cve/t if, even though. 
 
 £1 yaV, O //ia^ /—a wish j' like it&e. 
 
 SI firj, unless, 
 
 ei fjiri did, but for. 
 
 Ekig, eUi, properly, if anij one; ifanythino^: but 
 It IS used as equivalent to ^oang, with more emphasis • 
 whoever, whatever, ^ * 
 
 dtct 
 
 S7ZSI 
 
 \a, \ ^) ^f^f^rwards, thereupon; 2) then. 
 
 They are used in scolding, reproachful ques- 
 tioiis (see 315), and often with verbs, to refer 
 ^Q-i " a ^"^P^^^^C''^% to a preceding participle.^ 
 383. £.aa demonstr., Aere, there ; but also, and in prose 
 
 fuher^' '^^'''*'-" '''^"^'' demonstr., hlrl] 
 
 ivrav&a {Ion. IvOavTo), here. 
 tf(hv. hence thence, whence : ivOivds, hence. 
 
 'nn'fV;r'"^'' ^*'(Amc-i//mc), on the one side 
 — on the other. 
 
 hOevxal iv&Ev (hinc illinc; ah utraque parte), on 
 this side and that ; on both sides, ^ 
 
 EPTsv&ev, hence, thence. 
 OQA » (All these words relate also to time.^ 
 i>o4. inei, after ; 2) since, quoniam. 
 
 Before interrogatives and the imperat., it has 
 the meaning of for ; for else, 
 
 Oere Tthet *" ' ""^^ "'""^ *' '^* ^^^einning of period. Tor ihi. 
 
 I 
 
 iTteiUri has the same meanings, but «W is far 
 oftener used in the sense of since. 
 
 385. kte (= k oT«t), until, as long as. 
 
 386. hi, yet, still, further. 
 
 ovxhi, fiTixhiy no more, no longer. 
 
 387. «V ^y" ^^ condition that : i(p 4^s, the same but 
 generally with the infinitive. 
 
 H. 
 
 388. Tj, or ;^ in comparisons, than 
 
 389. i truly, certainly : but generally a mere interrog- 
 tive particle [—ne, but only in direct questions]. 
 
 ? nr^v assuredly, in asseverations, promises, &c, 
 
 390. 'ydrj, now, already. Also, 'without going any 
 
 further^^ 
 
 391. nv==lav (see 77). This^is the form used by the 
 Attic poets for idv : never dv, 
 
 B, 
 
 "192. •^iji' (enclit.), I should imagine; siirely ; in iron- 
 ical, sarcastic speeches, ov 0/jv, rj Oi^v. It is pecu- 
 liar to Ionic and Doric poets. 
 
 i. 
 
 393. ff a, where ; 2) in order that,* 
 
 t This derivation seems disproved by such passages as Xen. An. iv. 
 5, 6: i<Trc ini Td SaircSov^ usque ad. I believe it to be U with the old 
 connective re. See ri. , 
 
 • Here t<p' (T. (properly=i>ri rovrrj o— ) is equivalent to in\ tovtio wj— .. 
 
 P It retains this meaning in questions: nddev »}*« ; fi SfjXov oy ^ dyi>' 
 pat ; where is he come from ? or is it plain that he is come from the 
 market-place (and so the question unnecessary) 1 
 
 1 vavv yup /ioi <5o«r fi6n iroXXov av a^ioi ttvat InirpoTPif S>v roiovroi. 
 
 Xen. ^ ^ «. 
 
 r Ua (=in V3hich case) goes with indie, of a past tense to expresf 
 
 ▼hat would have happened, if, &c. W 9 v Tv<p\6s. L* c ? x ° >'> ^^' 
 
100 
 
 PARTICLES AND PHRASB8. 
 
 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 101 
 
 K 
 
 394. xa/, 1) and ; 2) also, even. 
 
 Ts — xai, both — and J or and also : as to ell — a*. 
 [But these particles are often used where we 
 should only use * andJ] 
 
 nal elf xav el : see under ei. 
 
 xaJ fidla, ) before these words nai has a peculiar 
 
 xaJ Tidvv, \ energy. 
 
 xaJ fir^v, ( immo,) well! certainly ! 2) (atqui), a/irf 
 yet. 
 
 xaineg, although. 
 
 xai tavia (idque), and that too, 
 
 aaiTot, and certainly ; 2) and yet certainly; and 
 yet ; 3) although, 
 
 %ai {also) often seems to be superfluous in familiar 
 conversation : ha, na\ c*^c5, that I may know, <fec. 
 
 xal is used in questions, to imply that nothing 
 can be expected, &c. It may be often translated 
 by at all, possibly, ri XQ^ ^Qoadoxnv; asks for in- 
 formation, but rixQh **"' TZQoadoxav ; * what can one 
 possibly expect ?' implies that nothing can possibly 
 be expected. 
 
 xat — de. When xai and bt come together in a pro- 
 position, xat is also: but the two are often used 
 where we should use * and also,^ 
 
 395. *X8, x«V, an enclitic particle, used by the Epic po- 
 ets for S.V, 
 
 M. 
 
 396. fia, not by — ; a particle of swearing. It has a 
 negative force when alone, but may have either »ai 
 or ov {yes or no) with it. 
 
 J97. fidhaTa fisv — si da /4^, <fec. = if possible — btit if 
 not, (fcc. — mentioning what is best to be done, and 
 also what is the second best, if that is not feasible.' 
 
 ' With numerals, words of time, &,c. itaUam (about) aignifiet thi 
 
 
 398. fioiXXop ds, or rather, 
 
 399. VfV,t indeed — answered by dt {but), or sometimes 
 by «>L>La, fiivtoi, 6cc, 
 
 The answering Se is sometimes omiited : — 
 
 1) When the opposition is clearly marked 
 without it : e. g. by naturally opposite 
 words, such as adverbs of place and time^ 
 with an opposite meaning: here — there; 
 in the first place — secondly, 
 
 2) When the opposition is suppressed: 
 chiefly when personal and demonstrative 
 pronouns are used with ftiv at the begin- 
 ning of a proposition. Thus, iyoj iiiv, 
 equidem, 
 
 400. *fievtoif to be sure; 1) / allow ; 2) but indeed, 
 however, 
 
 401. iifif not; 2) lest, or that not; 3) that (after verbs 
 oi fearing, <fec.) In questions it expects the answer 
 * no,' being somewhat stronger than ficov; {num?) 
 After some verbs (e. g. restrain, prevent, forbid, 
 deny, &c.) it is used where it seems to be superflu- 
 ous, from our using no negative particle. 
 
 firi ov : see § 49. 
 
 402. f^^^^W See o^^«. 
 (irjte, S 
 
 403. V?^> 1) ^^w^^j indeed; 2) but indeed, yet. 
 
 ti fii^f ; why not 7 
 
 404. liYitB ye, (nedum) much less. 
 
 N. 
 
 405. yjj, *6y,' in oaths (with ace.) 
 
 the statement made is nearly exact (according to the helief of thi 
 epeaker), without pretending to be quite so. 
 
 * ntv and 6i are much more frequently used than indeed — huty which 
 always express a strong opposition, whereas the Greek particles connect 
 any different propositions or notions. Thus a section, chapter, or even 
 part of a whole work, often ends with (for instance) «rai ravra filv ovtoh 
 iyivcTo : when the next chapter will necessarily begin with something 
 like Tj <)• varepaia (on the following day). It is only when the context 
 olearly requires it, that fiiv is to be rendered, it is true, indeed. 
 
162 
 
 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 406. *vv, vvv (end it. tJ), properly the same as rv», foJ 
 which it sometimes stands ; 2) for olv, then^ now 
 
 407. vvv 8q, now ; 2) with a past tense, jtist now. 
 
 O. 
 
 408. 6 fisv — 6 5i^" ^Ae one — the other. 
 01 fisv — ol de, some — others. 
 
 6 fisv, 6 d' ov often stands alone in reference to a 
 preceding proposition, ndviag (fiXriitov, ak)^ cif top 
 f48v jov d* ov, we must love all, and not {love) one 
 man indeed, but not another, nagijaav ovx 6 fitv 6 
 d* oVf aXXcc Tzdvtsg. 
 
 409. di{quod vero est\ after which the rovjo ian is 
 omitted.' 
 
 410. o&ovve/a (= otov evexa), hecatise^ that, in the Tragic 
 poets. 
 
 411. olog [7tomv\ of a kind or character (to do, <fec.) 
 oilog TS, able, possible, 
 
 otov elxog, as is natural ; as one may (or might) 
 suppose. 
 
 412. onotB, when, whenever ; 2) since: as qnando, 
 quandoquidem are used for quoniam, 
 
 413. onovy where (there were) ; 2) since (siquidem). 
 
 414. tftfag, as adv., how ; 2) conjunct., in order that, 
 that, oTToag soeaOs, see that you be =3. strong im 
 perative. 
 
 415. ooai ^fifgai or oarjiifQuiy daily; properly, a^ many 
 days as there are, 
 
 oaog follows ^^avfiaarog and superlatives of quality. 
 TtXeiaTa oaa or oGa nXsiuraf quam plurima : ^ar//a<y- 
 tov oaoVf m,irum quantum. 
 
 oaov ov (or oaorov), all but. 
 
 416. ore, when, ore fitv — ore ds,^ sometimes —some^ 
 times. 
 
 tfnt). 
 
 For 5 jtiv — b Si we sometimes find h fiiv — 5? is. 
 ^ S 6c ndvroiv detySrarov {but what is the most terrible thing of all, if 
 
 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 163 
 
 Whenever the forms T6re, ore are used twice (sometimetf oal| 
 
 4 <7. oT/, that (instead of Lat. ace. with iiifin.)', 2) be- 
 cause^ for 5t« zovto oTt, i. e. dioti. 
 
 on also strengthens superlatives, and is used to in- 
 troduce a quotation in the very words of the speak- 
 er, where we use no conjunction (see 358./.) 
 
 on firj, after negatives, except. 
 418. ov, not : in questions it requires the answer * yes.^ 
 
 ({}) ov diaXvaig =^the non-destruction. 
 
 ov yaq aXXd is commonly used in the sense of ^for,^ 
 with increase of emphasis, q, d. ^for it is no other- 
 wise, but,^ (M.) 
 
 ov iiri : see 287. 
 
 ov unv, yet not, but not ; 2) as a negative protesta- 
 tion. See ri firiv. 
 
 ov fitiv dXXd (or oif fit'vTot dXXd), properly, ^yet not.f^ 
 — but ;^ it has generally the force of yet, however; 
 sometimes of rather, much more, 
 
 ov ndvvj by no means, 
 
 ov (pTjfii, I say (that) 7iot ; deny, refuse, 
 
 419. ovx 0^*'' — «'^^-« **"'» ^^^ ^^^^y — ^^' ^^^^• 
 
 ovx oil — dXX* ovde, not only — but not even, 
 ovx 07i(og — dXXa xai, not only not — but also, 
 ovx oaov and ovx °*o*' ^^® ^^^° found for ovx on and 
 ovx ontog respectively. 
 
 420. ^ ovtt, fii^Ts, ) Both forms are connecting nega- 
 \ oM, finde, ) tives, answering to neque ; 1) nor, 
 
 and not ; 2) ovre, or firiiE repeated are neither — nor. 
 The forms ov5«, juiyd*, have the further meaning of 
 1) also not ; 2) not even, which is always their 
 meaning in the middle of a proposition. 
 ov^ CO?, not even so. See &g, 
 
 421. *olv, therefore, then.^ It gives to relatives (otrrfd- 
 ovvy <fcc.) the force of the Lat. cunque, {ever, soever)- 
 
 once) for -nori — norit sometimes — sometimes, they are accented totL — 
 ,-„— . (B.) 
 
 « When //»; on, fAh o-wj begin the sentence, vno06\ri tIs may be sup- 
 plied ; or they may be understood like the Latin ne dicam, and are thus 
 stronger than the preceding expressions, but both in a negative sense. 
 
 r ovv is often used to resume a speech that has been interrupted by 
 t parenthesis (=/ say.) 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
164 
 
 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 165 
 
 1) ovxovf, properly an interrogative of mfereiice 
 as ovxo'vv ivfj&eg tolxo; 'is not ihis, then, 
 foolishV But generally the interrogative 
 force and with it the negation vanishes, and 
 ovTioivis to be translated simply by » therefore. 
 and begins a clause.* , • ,i . 
 
 2) ovMvv is a strengthened negative ; not in tie 
 least.'-ln the meaning * therefore not,^ with 
 out a question, it is better written ovx ow. 
 
 *^- So«.Ter!is used of both past ..A future 
 time ; oiSwconort, only of past time. (See n<o. ) 
 
 n. 
 
 423. •«4 (enclit.), ^wtVe ; used nearly like ^/, to strength- 
 en a preceding word. It is frequently appended to 
 relatives, and adverbs of time, cause, and condition. 
 Thus aaniQ properly means ' exactly as. 
 
 It is derived, probably, from mQt, m the sense of 
 
 424. nh^h-n), ii (not nn tiiv-nn «t, Hermann), fart- 
 425^^7x^r%fept : as conjunction, or preposition with 
 426.^Tou£ i^:^^^l, -. .i has sometimes the 
 
 42r.'"=«1.^«5S^^^^^ 
 
 it expresses surprise: t.;-;io«; who tn the world .< 
 
 428. *«o« (encUt.), sometcAere ; 2) perchance, Perhaps, 
 Z) I imagine, Msed in conversation when any thing 
 isassume^d in a half-questioning way, that the speak- 
 er may build something on the assent of the person 
 
 appealed to. , , t /•< » ;. 
 
 429. L6i « ^£^*, 1 adjure you by the gods (.xerem is 
 generally omittted in t his form of adjuration). 
 
 . ci,oi,. extra interrogauonen,, acerbam interdura habet iiomam 
 i^Brrnii, Dem. p. 238.) 
 
 430. ngo tov^ (better frgorov), before this or that time 
 (=^ HQo rovtov or ixeivov lov XQovov).^ 
 
 431. *;ro) (enclit.), ^ /iZZ 7ioi^?, hitherto: but they are 
 "^TKOTtote, ] never joined to affirmative proposi- 
 tions in this sense. 
 
 ovnoD, fxi^rrm,^ never yet, not yet. nmnoTs is sel 
 dom annexep to the simple ov, fii^, but to ovde\ 
 urids. The form without nco (ovdsTTOtSy never) 
 is commonly employed only generally or 
 with respect to the future. Both nm and nci- 
 noT8 may be separated from the negative par- 
 ticle by other words between. 
 
 These particles are also used with relatives, 
 interrogatives, dind participles used as equiv- 
 alent to relative sentences. With these words 
 there is no negative expressed, but the notion 
 of a negative lies at the bottom of them all. 
 rig 7t<o ; — oaa tkotiots rjXmaafisrf 6cc, 
 
 432. nafiaXa, «* properly, how so ? how then 7 hence, by 
 no means. 
 
 T. 
 
 433. 
 434. 
 436. 
 
 J a fAsv — ra ds, partly — partly (adverbially). 
 
 •t a^a or t uq (poetical), aga strengthened by roL 
 
 •re (que). See xai. 
 
 In the old language (as we find it in the Epic 
 poets) T« seems to impart to many pronouns 
 
 • Iv yip rut ir p d rov oiicjiia PofjOeia nto toTs M-syapemiv ovSau66sv 
 ixaxeeu. (Thuc. iv. 120.) 
 
 * It answers exactly to omr * before this,* * before that* 
 
 " Quando in serie orationis pr<Bteritum tempus memoratur, tunc de 
 eo quod ante illud etiam fuerit formula itporov non videtur adhiberi 
 posse, nisi simul insit relatio ad prasens tempus; hoc est, nisi diserte 
 Biraul signilicare quia yelit, nunc non amplius ita esse:* (Buttm. ad 
 Alcib. 1. 14.) 
 
 • Not to be confounded with Homer's ovrw, /i/Tfl-wsBovrro)?, /i^wf, in 
 no toay, by no means. 
 
 * For ircjf itaXa ; (B.) Others say for vd aiXa ; — irw being a rather 
 onconunon Doric form for irdOev ; 
 
 i! 
 
 I !] 
 
 it 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
|Q5 PARTICLES AND PHKASES. 
 
 ana particles the connect'mg ])Over, which 
 they afterwards retained in themselves with- 
 out the particle. 
 Thus we find i^iv it, dire, yaQ ti, &c., and even 
 
 EspeckUy the particle is found after all rela- 
 lives, because these iu the old language \vere 
 merely forms of the pronoun demonstrative, 
 which through this ri obtained the connect- 
 ing power {and this), and thus became the 
 relative (which). As soon, however, as thes« 
 forms were exclusively allotted to the rela- 
 tive signification, the particle « was dropt as 
 superfluous. Hence we often find m Homer 
 Sc T£, oaov TE, (fcc. for Sf. S<ior, and the like. 
 The particles cSirt, i«, and the expressions 
 olo's rt. tV V « are remains of the ancient 
 
 IICQ org 
 
 436. TBfitV— TO W.«» one place and another; here— 
 there : in one respect— but in another. 
 
 437. ri, in some respect, in any respect, at all.' « 
 
 438.'"'Ti aJXnIntroduces a statement o,>po*erf to what 
 has been said before, and may be translated by 
 {quumtamen') whereas, but however, or sometimes, 
 but rather. (See Heindorf, Thext. 37.) 
 
 iJ 3£ with the superlat. often stand alone, with the 
 omission of tolt6 iouv. thil^h'^-'o* ««;.'«;«"; 
 T« ^dwf xaT£H?y«<«»^o. i'«f "'« g-rea/es/ thing w 
 C/Ais'> that, &c. (See o 8« — .) 
 
 439 -TO enc it.), properly an old dat. for r,1, meaning 
 <A/r"/oVe, ceJiLh,. But these meanings haved - 
 appeiredl and ro.'has only a stre ngthening ioxco.'M 
 
 • It is often added to tra^w, cx^iov, oUiv. 
 ..JmS which, however often comes 'o t - «mejhmg ^^ r. - 
 
 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 
 
 167 
 
 is frequently used with personal pronouns, and in 
 maxims^ proverbs^ &c. 
 
 *7oivvVf therefore, then, now, so now. It is also 
 used when a person proceeds with an argument; 
 noiD, further, hut now. Besides this it is frequently 
 used in objections, either in a continued narrative, 
 or more commonly in repHes : why or why then, 
 [Very seldom as the first word of a clause. P.] 
 
 zoiyaq (ergo), therefore, 
 
 joiyctQioi and roiyagovVf therefore, even therefore, 
 and from no other cause, precisely for that reason, 
 
 440. rote nip — tore ds,^ at one time — at another. 
 
 441. Tomxa (Epic), on that accotmt ; therefore. 
 
 442. Tovto fjifv — 70VT0 ds\ on the one hand — on thr other, 
 
 443. TQ), therefore. 
 
 n. 
 
 444. (og (relat. adv.), as (as if, so as) ; 2) of time, as^ 
 when ; 3) with numerals, about ; 4) it strengthens 
 superlatives, especially of adverbs, and some posi- 
 tives. 
 
 (OS (prcpos.= €ig), to, with ace: but only o{ living 
 things. 
 
 oig (conjunc), that; 2) in order that, with suhj.^ 
 opt., ovfut. indie. : 3) so that, with infin., more com* 
 monly mats: 4) since; 5) quippe, /or. 
 
 oJtf III ' {== ojg spsazif as it is possible) is used with 
 superlatives : (og tvi fidXiaTa, as far as it is any way 
 possible, 
 
 (og tnog dnelvy so to say. 
 
 ojg avvsXovTi (sc. Xoym) unnv, to be short ; in a word 
 JFor which avvilovzi dmlv, and avvekovn alone 
 are found.] 
 
 * See note on ore. 
 
 * When prepositions are employed instead cf the compounds of civai 
 or rather when, this verb being omitted, they stanu alone as adverbs 
 the accent is thrown back on the first syllable. See L>-x. 
 
 : f 
 
 >« t 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 I 
 
168 
 
 PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 
 
 09^ (with accent) = ovtoDg, thus. It is common in 
 the poets, especially the lonians ; but in prose is 
 found only in o^^ ^$, aal mg. 
 
 Table of the less obvious meanings of Prepositions in 
 
 Composition. 
 
 afiqiif on both sides. 
 
 avrly againstj marking opposition. 
 
 avdy^ up ; back again. 
 
 did {dis) marks separation; taking apart or 
 aside. 
 
 iv, often into. 
 
 natdj^ down; it often implies completion, and 
 hence, 2) ruiti, destruction (answering in both to 
 
 per). 
 
 fiezd (trans) marks transposition, change. 
 
 naqd sometimes signifies (like prceter) missing or 
 doing amiss. naQa^aivstv, to transgress, <fcc. 
 
 k With Patvctv, &c. dva^ up, and Kara, dowji, mean respectively into 
 the interior^ and down to the coast. 
 
 1 Hence Kara is sometimes equivalent to vp in English : *cara^ay«ri', 
 
 t» eat up. 
 
 ) 
 
 TABLE 
 
 OF 
 
 DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, ETC. 
 
 English. 
 
 1. (§ 1.) He who does. 
 
 2. (§ 2.) Socrates. 
 
 A woman. 
 
 3. (§ 3.) Ml/ slave. 
 
 Your slave, (kc. 
 
 4. I have ) a pain 
 I am suffer- > in my 
 
 ing from j head. 
 6. He rejoiced (or, was 
 vexed) when the citi- 
 zens were rich (or, 
 that the citizens 
 were rich). 
 
 6. My friend and my bro- 
 • ther's. 
 
 7. ($ 4.) The wisdom of 
 
 the geometer. 
 
 8 
 
 Greek. 
 
 The (person) doing (6 
 TTgdrtcov). 
 
 The Socrates (often). 
 
 A certain woman (yvvtj ug), 
 
 [When a particular per- 
 son is meafity though not 
 named.] 
 
 The my slave. 
 
 The your slave. 
 
 I am pained (as to) the 
 head : ace. (dXya). 
 
 He rejoiced (or, was vexed 
 at (im) rich the citizens 
 
 The my friend and the of 
 
 the brother. 
 ( Very often) The of the 
 
 geometer wisdom — or 
 
 the wisdom, the of the 
 
 geometer. 
 
 \i 
 
 ^ii 
 
 
no 
 
 TABLE OP 
 
 DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &C. 
 
 171 
 
 English. 
 
 8. The beautiful head. 
 
 9. The son of Philip. 
 Into Philip's country. 
 
 10. The affairs of the state. 
 The people in the city. 
 Those with the king. 
 My property, 
 
 11. (^5.) The men o/oZd. 
 The men of old times. 
 The men of those days. 
 The intermediate time. 
 The present life. 
 
 The upper jaW. 
 
 12. (§ 6.) The rhinoceros 
 
 has a very hard hide. 
 They have strong claws. 
 
 13. The beautiful ; beauty 
 
 (in the abstract.) 
 Beautiful things. 
 Whatever things are 
 
 beautiful. 
 What is beautiful. 
 
 14. Speaking. 
 Of speaking. 
 
 By speaking, &c. 
 
 15. Virtue. Gold. Eagles. 
 
 Greek. 
 
 As in English; or, Mhe 
 head the beautiful.' 
 
 The of Philip {son, vioV, 
 understood). 
 
 Into the of Philip (coun- 
 try, ;fw^ai', understood). 
 
 The {neut. pL) of the state. 
 
 The (ol) in the city. 
 
 The (oi) with the kin^^. 
 \ > / 
 
 The long-ago (men)— oi 
 
 ndXai. 
 The then (men). 
 The between time. 
 The now life. 
 The w/? jaw (^ arm yfd&og). 
 The rhinoceros has the 
 
 (=its) hide very hard. 
 They have the{=ihe\x) 
 
 claws strong. 
 
 TO ytaXov. 
 
 \ 
 
 ra Hula. 
 
 16. To do kind offices. 
 — confer benefits on. 
 —treat well. 
 
 The to-speak. 
 Of the to-speak 
 By the to-speak, <fec. 
 
 TO XaXtip : Tov XaXth, 6cc. 
 The virtue. The gold. 
 
 The eagles (when the 
 
 class is meant ; or eagles 
 
 generally). 
 
 cJ noitif with acc, of person. 
 
 English. 
 
 17 To prosecute on a 
 charge of murder. 
 To be tried for murder. 
 
 18. (§ 7.) Some— others. | 
 But {or and) he {or it). 
 
 And he . . . 
 
 19. (^8.) The other party. 
 The rest of the country. 
 
 20. The M7AoZe city; all the. 
 
 city. 
 Every city. 
 
 21. (§ 9.) With two others. 
 
 22. To perform this service. 
 
 To perform many ser- 
 vices. 
 
 23. Hisow» things. 
 One's own \ ° 
 
 25. (§ 10.) What comes 
 
 from the gods. 
 
 The greater part of . . 
 Half of. . . 
 
 26. ('J 11.) In fny time. In 
 
 my father's time. 
 In. my power, 
 
 27. (§ 12.) To be so. 
 
 To he found, ) 
 brought in, > of..(kc. 
 guilty S 
 
 28. {% 13.) Not only— but 
 
 also. 
 To confer a great bene- 
 fit on. 
 
 Greek. 
 
 To pursue of murder. 
 
 To fly of murder. 
 
 The indeed— but the, 
 ol [Jitv — ol ds. 
 6 de. . . at the head of a 
 
 clause. 
 
 \ <r 
 
 nai og , * . 
 
 ol hsQOi. 
 
 The other countiy. 
 
 ndaa /} iioXig, 
 
 naaa noXig. 
 
 Himself the third (pron. 
 
 last). 
 vnriQBJBiv rovto (pers. for 
 whom in dat.) 
 
 noXXa vnriQEiEir, 
 
 The things o/ /iim5e//*(T« 
 mvTOv.) 
 
 The (neut. pi.) of the gods 
 
 1 ' Hn agreement 
 onolvg r ^yj^^ jj^g jjQ^^,^ 
 
 wt<5vg ^ governed by 'op 
 
 in (fiov. in\ tov natqog. 
 
 in ifioi. 
 
 To have (themselves) so 
 {ovtcog Ex^tv). 
 
 To be taken or caught 
 {aXoivai with gen.) 
 
 ovx oTi—aXXd nai. See note 
 
 on 82. 
 To benefit greatly (fjisya 
 
 ojqpeXar). 
 
 II 
 
 ft 
 
 I 
 
172 
 
 TABLE OF 
 
 DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &C. 
 
 173 
 
 English. 
 To do a great injury to. 
 
 89. (^ 14.) I should like to 
 behold. 
 I should like extremely 
 
 to behold. 
 I would rather behold 
 A than B. 
 
 30. It is not possible. 
 
 31. OnMcpZeathatlcould 
 
 then conquer 
 
 Though I should have, 
 <fec. 
 
 32. (§ 15.) When you have 
 
 done, you will, 6cc. 
 
 33. {^ 16.) What I please. 
 
 34. (§ 17.) And you as 
 
 much as any body. 
 And you among the 
 first. 
 
 35. Am slow to doit (112). 
 
 36. Conditional Pro- 
 
 positions (79). 
 (1) Ifl have any thing, 
 I will give it. 
 
 Greek. 
 To hurt greatly {fieya ^Xdtt- 
 
 teip). 
 Obs. ta fAiyiGTa to be 
 used, if it is ^ great- 
 est,^ not ^ great? 
 I would gladly behold 
 
 ifiiai av -Osaaaiiiqv. 
 
 r^dTov av ^eaaaifitjv A ?^ B. 
 
 It is not (avx tartv). 
 
 As so beiiig-likely-to-con- 
 
 quer (mg ohmg mQiyiv6* 
 
 fievog av). 
 
 fjftoy av. 
 
 When you shall have done 
 {av with siibj. 90*). 
 
 a donH (/iot). (If necessary, 
 a do^etev, or, a av doSfl). 
 
 Having begun from you 
 ^ (100). 
 
 Do it by leisure (TpAJ). 
 
 (1) If the consequent verb 
 is in ihe future, the con- 
 ditional verb ir> (gene- 
 rally) in the subj. with 
 
 - QtaaBat is * to hehoW something that may be considered a «P'cfa- 
 iU. ihu (hp~av, SxpeaOut) is simply vidcre, to see. Hence Tow/ii shou d 
 be used in the phrase ' / shouid like to see,' when the notion of a gped- 
 lade is quite out of place. i- ■ i _». 
 
 • Po^U verb* may be in the future indicative (ihe conditional verb 
 
 Os 
 
 .>N 
 
 English. 
 
 If it has thundered, it 
 has also lightened. 
 
 2) If you should do so, 
 
 I s'AowZd laugh. 
 If you were to do so, 
 
 I should laugh. 
 If you would do so, 
 
 you would oblige 
 
 me. 
 
 3) If I had any thing, I 
 
 would give it. 
 If I had had any 
 thing I would hav^ 
 given it. 
 
 37 {That) they would 
 
 fetch. 
 {That he, &c.) woiild 
 
 be able. 
 They would have 
 
 died. 
 I should have died. 
 38. (^20.) We should (or 
 
 ought to) set about 
 
 the work. 
 
 Greek. 
 
 If the consequent verb ** 
 in any tense of the ind 
 but the future, or in the 
 imperative, put the con 
 ditional verb in the indie 
 with ei. 
 
 2) When both verbs have 
 ^ should,^ * would,^ or the 
 first ^were to^ the second 
 
 >" ^should ox^would^ hoih 
 are to be in the optative ; 
 the consequent verb with 
 
 av. 
 
 3) When the consequent 
 verb has * would,^ but the 
 conditional verb not, 
 both verbs are in a past 
 tense of the indicative ; 
 the conditional verb with 
 CI, the consequent verb 
 
 with " 
 
 av. 
 
 » jf 
 
 r 
 
 4 
 
 evQBiv av. 
 dvvij&ijvai av 
 
 .(* 
 
 14. 
 
 Aor. with av » {imperf. oi 
 pluperf. if necessary). 
 
 The work is to-be-set-about 
 (verbal in riog). 
 
 with f.). The condition is then expressed in a more positive way, as a 
 contempl.tted event: a construction which is often adopted when the 
 condition expresses an event hoped for or feared (R.) ; as, el n iret- 
 eovrai \USoi tii Ilipffag rd ieivdv fiiti. ,..1 
 
 • As in the consequence of the fourth form of conditional propow^ 
 tiooi. 81. d. 
 
 % 
 
 li 
 
 ' A 
 
174 
 
 TABLE OP 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 ! 
 
 
 English. 
 
 The work should he 
 
 set-about. 
 We must set-about 
 
 the work. 
 The work must be 
 
 set about. 
 
 39. (^21.) I should have 
 
 died but for the dog. 
 
 40. The all hut present 
 
 war. 
 
 41 . (^ 22.) Having had his 
 
 government taken 
 
 away. 
 Having been entrusted 
 
 with the arbitration. 
 Having had his eyes 
 
 knocked out. 
 
 42. To conquer him in the 
 
 battle of Marathon. 
 
 43. To flow with a full {or 
 
 strong stream). 
 To flow with milk. 
 
 44. {^ 24.) Till late in the 
 
 day. 
 
 45. Willingly at least. 
 Willingly. 
 
 46. So to say. 
 
 To speak generally. 
 
 47. Sensible persons. 
 
 48. To drink some wine. 
 (Not) todrink any wine. 
 
 Greek. 
 
 It is to-he-set-about {neut 
 of verbal in t«oj?) the 
 work.p 
 
 I should have died, if not 
 
 thrmgh the dog {d nn 
 
 did, with ace.) 
 The as-much-as not {oaop 
 
 ov) present war. 
 Having been taken away 
 
 his government. 
 
 Having been entrusted the 
 
 arbitration. 
 Having been knocked out 
 
 his eyes. 
 To conquer him the battle 
 
 at («V) Marathon. 
 To flow much (noXvg adj.) 
 
 To flow milk. 
 Till far-on {n6i}Q(a) of the 
 day. 
 
 > To be willing (fixwy (hai). 
 
 As to say a word {o)g e/rog 
 
 eiTfelv). 
 
 The sensible of persoris (oi 
 cpQonuoi rav av{>Q(6n(OP, 
 sometimes ; but very 
 often 01 cfQivifioi only). 
 
 To drink of wine. 
 
 (Not) to drink of wine. 
 
 P The * work' is to be in the case governed by the verb from which 
 he verbal is derivei 
 
 DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &C. 
 
 175 
 
 English. 
 
 49. My property, wretched 
 
 man that lam! 
 
 50. What misery! 
 
 51. (§ 25.) Who in the 
 
 world . . 7 
 
 52. To be nearly related to. 
 
 53. (^ 26.) You shall not 
 
 do it with impunitp. 
 
 54. I would not have done 
 
 it at all (132). 
 
 55. (<^28.) It is thepaH^f 
 
 a wise man. Vj 
 
 56. It is not a thing thai 
 
 everybody can do. ^ 
 It is not every one that "> 
 can do this. ^ 
 
 57. To be one^s own mas-^j 
 
 ter. 
 
 58. (§ 29.) More powerful'^^ 
 
 than ever. ^ 
 
 Greek. 
 My (property) of (me) the 
 
 wretched! 
 
 [za ificc Tov Tiaxodaifwvoii,] 
 The misery (in the geji.) 
 Who ever? {rig note;) 
 
 To be near to a person {in 
 respect) of family. 
 
 You shall not do it rejoic- 
 ing {xo^^Q^^y 
 
 I would not have done it 
 the beginning {oQxnr or 
 tTiv aQxnv). 
 
 It is of a wise man. 
 
 59. Afl[lictions toogreatfor 
 
 tears. \j 
 
 Of superhuman size. 
 
 More than could have 
 been expected from 
 the small number of 
 the killed. 
 
 60. Too young to know, 
 
 <Scc. 
 
 It is not every man's {nav 
 
 tog). 
 It is not every mane's to do 
 
 this. . ' 
 
 BavTOv eJvat. 
 
 More powerful himself'^ 
 \ than himself {avzog 
 \av'T0v). 
 Afflictions greater than in- 
 
 proportion-to (? -AaTo) 
 
 tears. 
 Greater than accordins:-to 
 
 man (? xar av&Q(onov). 
 More than in-proportion- 
 
 io the dead (? vara rovg 
 
 i'SXQOvg). 
 
 Younger than so as to 
 know {tj mars). 
 
 i 
 
 w 
 
 4 Of cour*» '*J»e7Melvf ,nan themselves: when more than one ar» 
 
176 
 
 TABLE OF 
 
 DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &C. 
 
 177 
 
 English. 
 61. (§30.) With more haste 
 than prudence. 
 Hastily rather than pru- 
 dently. 
 More hastily than pru- 
 dently. 
 62 The greatest )possi- 
 As great as ^ble, 
 ** " as he couldy 
 As many as he possi- 
 hly could, 
 63. If any other man can 
 do it, you can. 
 If any man is temper- 
 ate, it is you. 
 64. 1 have injured you more 
 than any other indi- 
 vidual has, 
 
 65. (§31.) To charge a man 
 
 with a crime 
 
 66. (§ 35.) If it is agreea- 
 
 ble to you. 
 If you are willing. 
 
 67. And that too . . . 
 
 68. For the present at 
 
 least. 
 As far as they are con- 
 cerned. 
 
 69. (§ 36.) I offer myself to 
 
 be interrogated, 
 ^0, (§37.) It was done /Aa^ 
 robbers might not 
 commit depreda- 
 tions^ d^c. 
 •1. Nothing was done he- 
 cause he was not 
 here. 
 
 Greek. 
 
 More-hastily than m<»e 
 prudently. 
 
 ^g or ou with superlat 
 
 As many as he could most 
 
 {oaovg rjdvvato nXeicrovs), 
 You, if any other man [el 
 
 Jig not aXXog), can do it. 
 You, if any other m>an^ 
 
 are temperate. 
 I one man have injured 
 
 you the most (nXeiata tig 
 
 avriQ at e^Xaxpa), 
 To charge (eyxaXcii') a 
 
 crime to a man. 
 
 If it is to you wishing it 
 {ei aoi ^ovXonsfcp iari), 
 
 xai tavta. 
 
 to yt VV9 thai, 
 
 to inl fovtotg ehai, 
 
 I offer myself to interro* 
 gate. 
 
 It was done tov firi X^^i 
 %ay.ovQytiVf &c. 
 
 Nothin^Bts done dia tl 
 wtXvof fiT} naqzXfau 
 
 aroi 
 
 English. 
 
 72. He said that he was in 
 
 a hurry. 
 
 73. (§ 40.) He is evidently 
 
 hurt. 
 I am conscious of 
 
 thinking so. 
 I am conscious that I 
 
 think so. 
 
 74. I know Ijj^^j I 
 -remember 1,^^^^ 
 
 -rejoice [done it. 
 
 — am aware J 
 
 lam ashamed (j^^° J 
 I repent ^ j^„gj° 
 
 Know that you will be 
 
 punished. 
 1 perceived that he 
 
 thought, <fec. 
 He will not cease to do 
 
 it. 
 
 75. He knew that the son 
 
 he had begotten was 
 mortal. 
 
 76 (§ 41.) I did it uncon- 
 
 sciously. 
 
 I did it unk7i^n to 
 myself. ^--' ^^ 
 I did it without being 
 seen, or discovered ; 
 secretly. 
 
 77 I anived first (or before 
 
 them). 
 
 You cannot do it too 
 soon. 
 
 8* 
 
 Greek. 
 He said to be in a hurry 
 
 (pron. omitted). 
 He is evident {pifiXog) being 
 
 hurt. 
 
 I am conscious {avvoi^a) to 
 myself thinking so (nom. 
 or dat.) 
 
 I know 1 
 
 — remember 1 havingdone 
 
 — rejoice [ it (part.) 
 
 — am aware J 
 
 I am ashamed having done 
 it. 
 
 It repenteth to-me having 
 done it. 
 
 Know about-to give pun- 
 ishment. 
 
 I perceived him thinking, 
 (fcc. 
 
 He will not cease doing it 
 {part.) 
 
 He knew having begotten 
 a mortal son. 
 
 I was conqealed-from (sAa- 
 •Oov) myself, doing it 
 {iiom.) 
 
 I was concealed (iXadov) 
 doing it. 
 
 (or) I did it being unob- 
 served (Xa&cov). 
 
 I having arrived antici- 
 pated them {sq)&Tjv, or 
 icp^Tjv avzovg). 
 
 Doing it yon will not anti 
 cipate [ol'A lkv cpOdvoig). 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
178 
 
 TABLE OF 
 
 DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &C. 
 
 179 
 
 English. 
 Will you noi do it di- 
 
 TGCtlv ? 
 
 78. He held his tongue, as 
 
 supposing that all 
 knew. 
 
 79. {% 43.) You act strange- 
 
 ly in giving us, <fec. 
 
 80. They pronounced her 
 
 happy, &c. in hav- 
 ing such children. 
 They have arms^ de- 
 fend themselves 
 with. 
 
 81. First of all (259). 
 
 82. [% 44.) From sonie of 
 
 the cities. 
 
 Greek. 
 
 Somewhere, 
 Sometimes, 
 83. I feel thankful to you 
 for coming, 
 
 85. They destroyed every 
 
 thing of value. 
 
 86. [% 45.) Such a man as 
 
 you. 
 
 (Of) such a man as 
 you are. 
 
 For men like us . . . 
 
 To make astonishing 
 progress. 
 
 Surprisingly misera- 
 ble. 
 
 ovx civ q)&dvotg noim ; 
 
 He held his tongue, as(c»tf' 
 all men knowing it (ace, 
 or gen.) 
 
 You do a strange thing, 
 who give us, &c. 
 
 They pronounced her hap- 
 py, &c. what children 
 she had, (258. h). 
 
 They have arms xcith 
 which they will defend 
 themselves. 
 
 First among the (fV jol^ 
 
 TTQ^TOi TtQmTt], TlQbiTOI, 
 
 &C.) 
 
 From the cities there is 
 which, 
 [« which' in same case as 
 
 ' cities.'] 
 There is where. 
 There is when. 
 I know you eratitude, /or 
 
 what {av{y ojv) you came. 
 They destroyed if there 
 
 was anything of value 
 
 {ei ti, &c.) 
 
 ^ * 
 
 oiog av avriQ, 
 
 oiov 60V ardgog, &.C. 
 
 70ig oioig {or omg neg) rifilv. 
 To advance ^avf*aato9 
 vaov. 
 
 ^avfiuato)g ojg aOXiog. 
 
 English. 
 
 i6. (§ 46.) There was ' 
 nobody whom he 
 did not answer. 
 He answered every 
 body. 
 
 87. Especially. 
 
 As fast as they could. 
 
 88. (§ 47.) I am able. 
 It is possible. 
 
 Are adapted for cut- 
 ting. 
 
 Am of a character 
 to . . . 
 
 89. Eighteen. 
 
 90. Far from it. 
 Am 
 
 Greek. 
 
 Nobody whom he did riot 
 
 answer. 
 
 [^nobody' under the 
 
 government of ^ aft- 
 
 swered ;' oangy who,\ 
 
 3oth otherwise and also 
 
 {aXXmg it xai). 
 As they had speed. 
 
 Is 
 
 to be. 
 
 91. (^ 48.) Be sure to be . . . 
 Take care to do it. 
 
 92. (<J 49.) I fear that I shall. 
 
 I fear that I shall not. 
 
 93. What prevents us 
 
 from . . . ? 
 To prevent them from 
 coming. 
 
 94. (^ 50.) I had a narrow 
 
 escape from death. 
 I had a narrow escap ^. 
 
 95 (§ 61.) Immediately on 
 his arrival. 
 
 oiog Tfi dfii. 
 
 oloV T£ iatL 
 
 Are such as to cut. 
 
 Am such as to . . . 
 
 Twenty wanting two (283. 
 
 d). 
 TToXXov dnv. 
 
 ^,1 } vevta^ai ( when ^am 
 ^*^~( to be'=^am tn- 
 ^''^^'" ) tended to be.' 
 That {o7Z(og) you shall be 
 
 [^see^ understood.] 
 Take care how {onrng) you 
 
 shall do it. 
 I fear fit] . . . (subj. or fut. 
 indie.) 
 
 " fJlTJ OV . , , 
 
 ri ifinodmv fiij ovxi . . / with 
 injin. 
 
 To prevent them (irj iX&eTv. 
 
 I came naga fiingov to die. 
 
 1 escaped by a little {fgctQ 
 
 oXiyov). 
 Immediately having ar- 
 rived {tvOvg ^xoor). 
 
 i i 
 
 'f 
 
 i 
 
180 
 
 TABLE OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &C. 
 
 English. Greek. 
 
 A^soon as we are j i„,i^ediately being bom 
 
 From our very birth. 3 \^^ ^^/^r ;• 
 96. (^52.) What posses- Having suffered what, do 
 
 ses you to do this? 
 What induces you to 
 
 do this? 
 97. (319.) To be wholly 
 
 wrapt up in this ? 
 98. 
 
 0) 
 
 (3) 
 
 you do this? {tina&mf;) 
 Having learnt what, do 
 you do this? {ri ua^w ;) 
 
 ftQos tovtq^ oXog ehau 
 
 To be consistent 
 with. 
 « " like. 
 " " character- 
 istic of. 
 (2) '^ To be on a man's 
 
 side. 
 
 ' To make for a 
 
 man. 
 
 " be for a man's 
 
 interest. 
 
 " good for a 
 
 man. 
 
 99. By what conduct. 
 With what view, 
 
 100 (§ 57.) He vmnt and 
 gave (when used 
 contemptuously or 
 indignantly)b 
 
 > ehai nqog tipog* 
 
 J 
 
 Doing what. 
 Wishing what 
 
 He qitQmv gaTOi 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 Obs. Words in small capitals are to be translated into Greek. 
 
 ^ 1.— 1. What is the difference between the imperf. and the 
 bor, ? [The Aorist is used of momentary and single actions : the 
 Imperfect of continued and repeated ones.] 2. What English tense 
 does the aor. most nearly answer to? [Our perfect indefinite 
 (the perf. formed by inflexion)^ 3. Is the aor. ever used for the 
 per/, ? [Yes,* when the connection of the past with the present 
 J6 obvious from the context.] 4. Where is a governed gen. often 
 placed ? [Between an article and its noun.] 5. How do you 
 render 04 nQdrtovtegl [TAose who do.'] 6. To what is tlie 
 artic, with a participle equivalent ? [To a personal or demon- 
 Btrative pronoun with a relative sentence.] 
 
 ^ 2. — 7. Do proper names ever take the artic 7 [Yes.] 
 
 8. When ? [When they are the names of persons well knovm.'] 
 
 9. When is a proper name generally without the art. 7 [When 
 it is followed by a description which has the article.] 10. Is 
 there an indef. art. in Greek? [No.] 11. By what pron. may 
 
 a' sometimes be translated? [By t»V.] 12. When? [When 
 we might substitute ' a certain^ for *a.'] 13. Which generally 
 has the art., the subject or the predicate (i. e. the nom. before or 
 the nom. after the verb) ? [The subject.] 
 
 ^ 3. — 14. YoDR SLAVE. [6 aog dovXog.] 15. Is the art. evei 
 equivalent to a possessive pron. ? [Yes, when it is quite obviouk 
 whose the thing in question is.] 16. When must the pronouns 
 he used ? [Whenever there is any opposition (as, when mine is 
 opposed to yours or any other person's)]. 17. When an adj. 
 without the article stands before the art. of the substantive, from 
 what does it distinguish that substantive? [^From itself under 
 other circumstances.] 18. My father and my friend's, [b 
 ifibg natTjQ, xai 6 rov qjiXov.] 
 
 • And even for the pluperfect. 
 
182 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 !!i 
 
 Ml 
 
 <^ 4. — 19. The son of Philip. [6 ^iXitittov: viog, son, un* 
 derstood.] 20. Into Philip's country, [eig rTjv ilhllnnov, 
 rmQar, country, understood.] 21. How does it happen that the 
 article often stands alone? L^n consequence of the omission ol 
 a noun or participle.^ 
 
 ^ 5. — 22. What is often equivalent to an adjective ? [An 
 adverb with the article.] 23. The men cf old. [oi nd).ai, the 
 
 Long ago men.] 
 
 ^ 6.-24. How did the Greeks express 'she has a very beau- 
 riful head?' [She has the head very beautiful.] 25. Distin- 
 guish between to aalov and ra HaXd. [to naXofy is: 'the 
 beautiful,' 'the honorable,' in the abstract; beauty, ra xaKa, 
 are : beautiful (or honorable) things ; whatever things are beau- 
 tiful ; what is beautiful ; or simply, beautiful things.] 26. How 
 is the first pers. pi of the subj. often used? [In exhortations.] 
 27. What is ' not ' in an exhortation of this kind ? [fiq.] 28. How 
 may the infn. become (virtually) a declinable subitantive? [By 
 beintr used with the article.] 29. Do abstract nouns and names 
 of materials generally take the art. ? [Yes.] 30. When does a 
 noun (whether ^ng. or plur.) always take the art. ? [When a 
 whole class, or any individual of that class, is meant.] 
 
 ^7.-31. ofxer-odt: oi fitf— ol de. [{this^thal ; the 
 me-^the other) {these— those ; some-mothers.)] 32. How does 
 6 dt stand once in a narrative? [For but or and he or it:^ the 
 article being here a pronoun.'] 33. How y.ai og ? [For and 
 he •' but only when the reference is to a person.] 34. When /s 
 avtos self? [aviog is 'self,' when it stands in the nom. without 
 a substantive, or in any case with me.] 35. When is it him, her, 
 it, &c. ? [avtog is him, her, it, &c. in an oblique case without a 
 substantive.] 36. When is avtog same? [6 aviog is 'the 
 same.'] 37. Does avzog standing alone in an oblique case, ever 
 mean self? [Yes, when it is the first word of the sentence.] 
 
 ^ 8. 38. Does a noun with oJto^, o5f, ixeivog, take \hcart. 
 
 or not? [Yes.] 39. Where does the pron. stand ? [Either 6^- 
 fore the article, or after the noun.] 40. What does nag in the 
 sing, mean without *lhe art. 7 [' each,' ' erery.']— what with the 
 
 art.l [' the whole :'' all.'] ^ ^ %• u » 
 
 A 9, — 41, In the reflexive pronouns (s/iarTov, &c.) \s the av- 
 -OS emphatic? [No.] 42. How must thyself im ace) be traxif 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 188 
 
 ated when it is emphatic? [avrog must precede the pronoun, 
 avTor (je, &c.] 43. How do you translate 'own' when it is em- 
 phatic ? [By the genitive of the reflexive pronouns f^avToy, 
 amvTOV, iaviov.]—hovf his, theirs, &c. ? [By the gen. of av- 
 Tog.] 44. Does iavtov ever stand in a dependent sentence for 
 the nom. of the principal one ? [Yes.] 45. What pronouns are 
 often used instead of a case oNavrov, to express, in a dependent 
 clause, the subject of the principal sentence? [The simple av- 
 *oV, or £, (of, 01, — (Jcpeig, acpag, &c.)] 46. Is ov ever simply 
 reflexive in Attic prose? [No.»] 47. To what Attic prose- 
 writer are the forms, o J, £ confined ? [To Plato.] 
 
 ^ 10.— 48. How is the neut. plur. of an adjective, standing 
 without a noun, generally translated into Enghsh? [By the 
 singular.] 49. How is the neut. art. with a g-ew. ccwe, used ? [To 
 denote any thing that relates to, or proceeds from, the thing in 
 question.] 50. How are neut. adjectives often used? {Adverb- 
 tally.] 51. When is the neut. singular generally used adverb- 
 ially? [When the adj. is of the comparative degree.] 52. When 
 the neiU. plur. ? [When the adjective is of the superlative de- 
 gree.] 53. Does a predicative adjective ever not agree in gen- 
 der with the substantive it refers to? [Yes; when the assertion 
 is made of a class or general notion; not of a particular thing.] 
 &4. In what gender do noUg (nXf'mv, nXeiaiog) and ^fiiavg 
 stand, when followed by a gen. ? [In the gender of the gen. that 
 
 follows them.] 
 
 ^ 11.— 55. In what number does the verb generally stand, 
 when the nom. is a neut. plur.l [In the singular.] 56. What 
 exception is there ? [When persons or living creatures are spok- 
 en of.] 57. Mention some predicates with which the copula is 
 very often omitted? 
 
 {uliog and xaXmov, Ot'fiig, ojqu, cfQovdog, dvdyxrj,^ 
 Qccdiovy and dvratog (with its opposite word), and iroifiog.) 
 «^* 1 2.-58. Do the moods of the aor. refer to past time ? [No.] 
 59. How do the moods of the aor. differ from the moods of the 
 vrcsentl [The moods of the aorist express momentary actions; 
 
 • That is, ov, I, &,c. is not used by prose-writers in a principal sen- 
 rence, to express the subject of such sentence : its place is i» a de. 
 pendent or accessory clause, to express the subject of the principa 
 clause. 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 
184 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAJt. 
 
 QUESTIONS OK THE SYNTAX. 
 
 189 
 
 those of the present, continued ones.] 60. Does the part, of the 
 aor. refer to past time 7 [Yes.] 61. Are the moods of the aor, 
 rendered by the pres. in English? [Yes.] 62. When fi?//or- 
 hidSj what moods does it take 7 [fitj when it forbids^ takes the 
 imperative of the present, the subjunctive of the aorist.] 63. 
 What is the diflference between f<i/ with imperat. pres. and fcjj 
 with the subj. aor,? [With the subj. aor. a definite single act is 
 forbidden ; with imper, pres. a course of action. The imperat..^ 
 therefore, often forbids a man to do what he has already hegun-l 
 64. Of what tense is the optative the regular attendant? [The 
 optative is the regular attendant of the historical tenses*^ 65. 
 What mood is the subj. after a pres. or fut. turned into, when in- 
 stead of the pres. or fut. an historical tense is used ? [The opta- 
 tive^ 66. When do the particles and pronouns, which go with 
 the indicative in direct narration, take the optative 1 [The parti- 
 cles and pronouns which go with the indicative in direct, take 
 the optative in oblique narration.^^ 
 
 ^ 13. — 67. How is an assertion modified by the use of af, or 
 in Epic poetry xe, x«V. [af gives an expression of contingency 
 and mere possibility to the assertion.] 68. What is the principal 
 use ofay? [The principal use of av is in the conclusion of Si 
 hypothetical sentence.] 69. When av stands in a sentence 
 which is not hypothetical, to what does it often refer? [To an 
 implied condition.] 70. What particles are formed by the addi- 
 tion of av to H, oTf , hsidrj ? [idf, riv, av,—orav, insiddv.'] 71. 
 How is av—el av distinguished from the simple av ? [ai'= iaVy 
 £1 av, regularly begins the sentence.] 72. What are the two 
 meanings of fi? [ti is *t/;' but like our *i/,' it is often used for 
 * whether. ^'^ 
 
 Hypothetical Propositions. 
 
 73. 1) How is possibility without any expression of uncertainr 
 (ainty, expressed ? [« with indie, in both clauses.J] 
 
 * Or: * Historicum eequitur tempus modus optativuB.' 
 + This is the general rule : but the indicative is frequently used ia 
 •bliqae narration. 
 
 I The consequent clause may have the Imperative. 
 
 74. 2) How is uncertainty with tlie prospect of ..ecisi* n ex- 
 pressed ? [By idv with subjunctive in the conditional, and the 
 tndic. (generally the future) in the consequent clause.*] 
 
 75. 3) How is uncertainly expressed, when there is no such 
 accessory notion (as the prospect of decision) 7 [By ei with the 
 optative in the conditional clause, and dv with the optative in the 
 consequent clause.] 
 
 76. 4) How is impossibility, or belief that the thing is not so, 
 expressed ? [ei with imperfect or aorist indie, in the conditional 
 clause ; av with imperf. or aorist indie, in the consequent clause.] 
 77. When is the imperfect used in this form of proposition? [For 
 present time, or when the time is quite indefinite.] 78. Can the 
 condition refer to past time, the consequence to present ? [Yes.] 
 79. Which clause has av, the conditional or the consequent clause ? 
 [The consequent clause.] 
 
 ^ 14.— 80. To what is the optat. with dv equivalent? [The 
 optative with dv is equivalent to our may, might, would, should, 
 &c.] 81. By what may the optat. with dv often be translated ? 
 [The optative with dv is often translated by the future.] 82. 
 What force does dv give to the infin. and participle? [The 
 same force that it gives to the optative.] 83. To what then is an 
 infinitive with dv nearly equivalent? [To an infinitive future] 
 84. After what verbs is the future frequently so expressed? 
 [After verbs of hxyping, thinking, trusting, praying, knowing, con- 
 fessing, &c., when a condition is expressed or implied."] 
 
 ^ 15.— 85. What mood do the compounds ofay,tand rela" 
 /ii?e«with dv regrdarly take 1 [The subjunctive.] 86. What 
 changes take place, if any, when these compounds or relatives 
 with dv come into connection with past time, or stand in oblique 
 narration? [They either remain unchanged, or the simple 
 words— €«, otf, ineiSi^ : of, oarigt oaog, &c.— take their place 
 with the optative.] 87. To what Latin tense does the aor. sub- 
 junct. answer, when it stands with the compounds ofdv, or with 
 relatives and dv ? [To the Latin future perfect, fulunnn ex- 
 w:ium\ 
 
 ^ 16. — 88. How is what ofte:n happened, in past time, expres- 
 
 ♦ The consequent clause may have the Imperative. 
 t That is, idvf Sravt iirei6av, Slc. 
 
 
 I ..l,J 
 
 
180 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THB SYNTAX. 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 187 
 
 
 Bed?* [By the optative.] 89. What mood and particles would 
 be used to express this sort o^ indefinite frequenq/ for pres. or Jut 
 time? [The relatives with av and compounds ofaf.] 90. What 
 force does av thus give to otf and other relatives ? [The force of 
 our — ever, — soever.] 
 
 ^ 17. — 91. What mood is used m doubting questions? [The 
 subjunctive.] 92. After what verbs is it sometimes thus used? 
 [Aher ^ovXei/j ^tlsig-y ovk ex^ or olda, anoQa, f^corco, ^rjTm.] 
 
 ^ 18. — 93. When conditional propositions depend on another 
 verb, in what mood will the consequent clause stand ? [In the 
 infnilive.] 94. What will stand in a dependent conseq^uent clause 
 for noii]6(ol [;roir;(T«r.]— for noioTfi av, inolovv «r? [noiBiP 
 ^y.]_for noiri<5aiu av, inoirjaa avl [noirjaai ay.]— for nBitoi- 
 tjxoif* dv, insnoir^nBiv avi [nsnoirjiierai av.] 
 
 ^ 19.— 95. Does ov or ^ij deny independently and directly? 
 [ov.] 96. When should not be translated by {ati ? [Miy is used 
 in prohibitions ; with conrfiao72a/ particles ; ajid particles expres- 
 sing intention or purpose.] 97. When do oxf, o;roT£, take fi^^l 
 [When 'icAen' implies a condition.] 98. Is ov or fitj used after 
 on, mg, imi, ifisidql [ov.] 99. Isov or ^fused (generally) to 
 express the opinionsofano/Acr person in oblique narration? [ov.] 
 
 100. How should you determine whether ovdeig, olds, &c. are to 
 be used, or ^tidsig, fiti^sl [Wherever * wo/' would be translated 
 by ^jf, we must use not ovdng, ovdfy &c., but ^)/^«V, ^»?^«, &c.] 
 
 101. How must the positive adverbs and pronouns generally be 
 translated into Greek in negative propositions? [By the corres- 
 ponding negative forms.f] 
 
 |, 20. 102. Are the verbals in TEog act. or pass.? [Passive.] 
 
 103. What case of the agent do they govern ? [The daUve.] 
 
 104. What case of the object? [The same case as the verbs from 
 which they come.] 105. To what are these verbals in.T«Off 
 equivalent, when they stand in the neut. with the agent, in the 
 
 » Hermann properly observes, that the optat. does not itself exprew 
 the repetition of the act, but only carries with it the notion o( xndefimte- 
 ness, the repetition being marked by the other verb e. g. either a f re- 
 quentative verb, or the imperf. or pluperf. tense (which both expreM 
 duration), or by an aorist with 7roXXa««j, Slc. 
 
 t Thus for either— or ; anywhere, at any time, any thing, we mual 
 ase neither— nor ; nowhert ; never ; nothing, &c. Rule 110. as a gen 
 tral assertion, is absurd. 
 
 dat., omitted ? [To the participle in dus used in the same way.] 
 106. When may they be used in agreement with the object? 
 [When formed from transitive verbs.] 107. Express "yod 
 SHOULD CULTIVATE VIRTUE," in two ways, with aaxijrtog and age- 
 T^. [aanrjitov icfTiaot ttjv dgeTi^v, or danijiea iatiaoi t] a^fir^.] 
 108. What peculiarities are there in Attic Greek with respect to 
 the use of these verbals ? [The neut. plur. is used as well as the 
 neut. sing. The agent is sometimop put in the accus. as well as 
 the object.] 109. Render nsiattov iatlv avT^, and neiatiov 
 iativ avtov. [nBiatiov iativ avrov, we must persuade him. 
 aeiatsov iarlv avt^, we must obey him.] 
 
 ^ 21. — 110. What verbs govern two accusatives ? [Verbs of 
 taking away from, teaching, concealing^ asking, putting on or off, 
 take two accusatives.] 
 
 ^ 22. — HI. What case does the ace. after the active verb 
 become, when the act. verb is turned into the passive? [The worn.] 
 112. When the act. verb governs two accusatives, may either of 
 them (and if so, which?) remain after the pass, verb ? [The ace. of 
 the person becomes the nom. ; that of the thing continues to be 
 the object of the passive verb, as in Latin.] 113. May the dot. 
 df the act. become the nom, of the passive ? [Yes ; sometimes.] 
 114. Will the ace, after the act. then remain as the ace. after the 
 passive? [Yes.] 115. Render (iym) Tzemazsvfiai tovto. [lam 
 entrusted with this: or, I have had this entrusted to me.] 116. 
 Do intrans. verbs ever take an ace. ? and, if so, when ? [Intransi- 
 tive verbs take an ace. of a noun of kindred meaning; and some- 
 times of one that restricts the general notion of the verb to a par- 
 ticular instance.] 
 
 § 23. — 117. Does the ace. ever follow an adj.? [Yes.] 118 
 What prepos. might be supposed omitted? [^xatd, as to.] 119 
 What ace, is sometimes found with verbs that do not properly 
 govern the ace. ? [The accus. of the neut. pronoun.] 120. How 
 is the duration of time expressed ? [By the accusative.] 121. 
 Elow is the distance of one place from another expressed ? [By 
 the accusative.] 
 
 ^ 24. — 122. Whatcasedopar/iVire^, &c. govert ? [Partitives, 
 numerals, superlatives, &c. govern the genitive.] 123. What 
 case do adverbs oftime And place govern 1 [The genitive.] 124. 
 What case expresses the material out of which a thing is maie, 
 
 
es 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 
 and Buch other propertiesj circumstances^ &c. as we ehotiid e*» 
 press hy^ op? [The genitive.] 125. Can 'once a day* be trans- 
 lated literally ? [No : it must be, * once the day.'] 126. How doei 
 the gen, stand after possessive pronouns ? [In a kind of apposition 
 to the personal pronoun implied.] 127. How does the gen. stand 
 alonej or after interjections 7 [The gen. is used alone, or after in- 
 ^rjections, as an ea:cla7nation.] 
 
 ^ 25. — 128. What case dp verbal adjectives, in txog, dec, with 
 a trans, meaning govern ? [The genitive.] 129. What case do 
 verbs relating to plenty, wanty value^ &c., govern ? [The genitive.] 
 130. What case do verbs relating to the senses govern ? [The 
 genitive.] 131. What exception is there? [Verbs that denote 
 sight, which take the ace] 132. By what prepos., understood, 
 might the gen. sometimes be supposed governed ? [By tvexa, on 
 account of.] 133. After what verbs does the gen. frequently 
 stand in this way ? [After words compounded with a privative^] 
 
 § 26. — 134. Mention two large classes of verbs that govern 
 the gen. [Most verbs that express such notions as freeing from, 
 keeping off from, ceasing from, deviating or departing from, «&c. 
 govern the gen. Most verbs that express remembering or for- 
 getting ; caring for or despising ; sparing ; aiming at or desir 
 ing; ruling over or excelling ; accusing of or condemning, &c 
 govern the genitive ; but not without many exceptions.] 
 
 ^ 27. — 135. What case does xaTapyvmaxm (condemn) take 
 of the charge or punishment ? and what case of the person 7 
 [xataYtyvtaaxoi has accus. of the charge or punishment ; gen. of 
 verson,] 136. May we say, tovto xarr^yoQeiiai avtov, this ii 
 laid to his charge? [Yes.] 
 
 ^ 28. — 137. In what case does the pnce or ra/westcind? [The 
 price or value is put in the genitive.] 138. In what case is the 
 thing for which we exchange another, put? [The thing for 
 which we exchange another is put in the geJiitive.] 139. What 
 case of a noun of time answers to when ? and what to since or 
 within what tmie ? [The gen.] 140. In what case is the part by 
 which a person is led, got hold of, &c., put ? [The gen. expresses 
 the part by which a person leads, takes, or gets hold of any thing.] 
 
 ^ 29. — 141. In what case is the thing tvith which another is 
 compared, put when r, than, is omitted ? [In the genitive.] 142. 
 Uow is ^greater than evei^ expressed ? [By using aviog beforo 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 189 
 
 the gen. of the reflexive pronoun.] 143. How .s ' too great ' ex- 
 pressed? \_Too great, &c. is expressed by the comparative with tj 
 xard before & substantive ; ij oSictts before a t?er& in the infinitive.] 
 144. Still orsater: much greater? [m fjiei^mv: noXXq^ 
 ueil^mv.] 
 
 § 30. — 145. How are two comparatives, joined together by 
 ^, to be translated ? [By more than, or ratlier than, with the pos- 
 itive.] 140. By what words are superlatives strengthened ? [By 
 «tf, 0T«, oTims, 5, &c.] 147. What force have ii rig xal aXXog, 
 si quis alius, and elg iv^g^ unus omnium maxime 7 [The force of 
 superlatives.] 148. What case do fHQutog, and adjectives in 
 -nXdaiogf govern ? [The genitive.] 
 
 § 31. — 149. What does the dot. express? [The person to or 
 for whom a thing is done.] 150. What words does it follow ? 
 [Words that express union or coming together, and those that 
 express likeness or identity.] 151. In what case is the instrU" 
 ment, &c. put? [The instrument, the manner j and the cause, are 
 put in the dative.] 152. In what case is the definite time-when 
 put? [In the dative.] 153. Does the c/a/. ever express the ag-e?!/ 7 
 [Yes.] 154. After what words is this most common? [After 
 the perfect pass, and verbals in Tfbff, rog.] 155. What case do 
 verbs of reproaching take, besides a dat. of the person ? [Verbs 
 of reproaching, &c. take ace. of the thing, as well as dat. of per- 
 son, especially when it is a neut. pronoun.] 
 
 ^ 32.— 156. What does the middle voice denote ? [That the 
 agent does the action upon himself; or for his own advantage ; 
 or that he gets it done for his own advantage.] 157. What are 
 the tenses that have the middle meaning when the verb has it at 
 all? IPres.^ imperf, perf, and pluperf of the passive form; 
 and the futures and aorists mid.] 158. Has the aor. 1. of the 
 pajss. form ever a mid. meaning ? [Yes.] 
 
 ^ 33. — 159. What verbs of the middle form must be con- 
 sidered simply as deponents ? [Middle forms, of which there is 
 no active.] 160. Mention some aor. 1. pass, with mid. meaning. 
 {xatixXi&riv (?). aTZtjXXdyrjv, ineQaia&tjv, icpo^^^&tjv, ixoifAi^- 
 ^tjv, ^ax^&rjv.] 161. Mention some fut. 1. mid. with pass, mean- 
 ings [(ocpeXijaefiaif ofAoXoyi^aofiai, (fvXd^ofiaij ^gsxpofiat.] 162. 
 How is * 6y,' to express the agent after the pass, verb, translated 1 
 [By vno with gen. ; also by noQa and ngog with gen.] 
 
 i 
 
 
 \i 
 
190 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THB SYNTAX. 
 
 '\i 
 
 ^ 34,-163. What signification does the perf. 2. (comnionW 
 called per/, mid.) prefer? [The intrans. signif.] 164. Has itevef 
 the pure rejiexive meaning of the middle? [No.] 
 
 «^ 35.— 165. Whatdoesthe/w^. 3. express? [A >/ure action 
 continuing in its effects.'] 166. What notions does it express be- 
 sides that of a future action continuing in its effects 7 [The 
 speedy completion of an action, or the certainty of its completionJ] 
 167. What verbs have the fut. 3. for their regular future ? [Those 
 perfects that are equivalent to a present with a new meaning: 
 e. g. fiffiprjfAat, niTitrjfiai,] 16S. What answers to the fut. 3. in 
 the active voice ? [saofjiai with perf. participle.] 169. What is 
 generally preferred to the opt. and subj. of the perf ; [The perf 
 part, with sirjp or a.] 170. In what verbs is the imperat. perf 
 principally used ? [In those verbs whose perfects have the mean- 
 ing of a present: ftsftrrjaOj &c.] 17L What does the 3 pers, 
 imperat. o^ the perf pass, express? [It is a strong expression 
 for let it be done^ &c.] 172. How is a wish expressed in Greek ? 
 [siOe with the optative— the optative alone— or w(f£Xor* eg, «, 
 alone, or with siOs, et ydg or w^, and followed by the infinitive.] 
 173. What mood and tense are used with eiOs, if the wish has not 
 been, and now cannot be, realized 7 [The tndic. of aorist or im- 
 perf, according as the time to which the wish refers is past or 
 
 present.] 
 
 ^ 3(5,_174. Mention a use of the infinitive that the Greek and 
 English have, but the Latin has not. [Itjs used to express the 
 purpose.] no. What does the particle man express ? [A con- 
 sequence.] 176. How is so— as to expressed ? [So— as to; wcyre 
 with infnitice.] 177. How is so— that expressed? So— that; 
 McTTfi with infinitive or indicative.] 
 
 4 37.— 173. What does the infin. with the article in the gen, 
 express ? [The infinitive with the article in the gen. sometimes 
 denotes a mjotive or purpose.] 179. When the xnfin. has a subject 
 of its own, in what case does it regularly stand ? [In the accusa- 
 tive.] 180. What prepos. with the infin. is equivalent to a sen- 
 tence introduced by becausel [did.] ISl. When is the subject 
 of the infinitive generally not expressed ? [When the subject of 
 the infinitive belongs to, and is expressed with, the former verb.] 
 
 • Dehuit. 
 
 lii 
 
 aJESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 19] 
 
 182. When the subject of the infin. is omitted, because expressea 
 with the former verb, in what case is the noun after the infin. 
 generally put? [In the same case that the subject of the infini- 
 tive stands in in the other clause.] 183. What is this construction 
 called ? [Attraction.'] 
 
 ^ 38.— 184. May attraction take place when the infin. is in- 
 troduced by the art. or oiais 7 [Yes.] 
 
 ^ 39.— 185. What kind of sentences may be translated into 
 Greek by a participle ? [Relative sentences, and sentences in- 
 troduced by when, after, if, since, because, although, &c.] ..86. 
 How may the English participial substantive, under the govern- 
 ment of a preposition, often be translated? [By a participle in 
 agreement] 187. How may the first of two verbs connected by 
 and, often be translated into Greek 7 [By a participle.] 
 
 ^ 40.— 18S. What participle often expresses a purpose 7 
 [The participle of the future often expresses a purpose.] 189. 
 Mention some verbs that take the participle where we should use 
 the infin., a participial substantive, or ' that.'* [Many verbs that 
 signify emotions, perception by the senses, knowledge, recollection, 
 cessation or continuance, &c., take the participle, where we should 
 use the infinitive mood, the participial substantive, or ' that.^] 
 
 ^ 41.— 190. By what are qi&dvoD, come, or get before, and 
 XavOuKOy am concealed, generally rendered? [By adverbs.] 
 191. Mention the adverbs and phrases by which XavOdroa may 
 be rendered. [Without knowing it; unconsciously, unknown to 
 myself; without being observed; secretly; without being seen or 
 discovered.] 192. How may Xa&(6p be rendered ? [By secretly, 
 without being observed, seen, &c.] 193. How cp&daas or dpvaag ? 
 [Quickly; at once, immediately.] 194. When cpOdva) and Xav&dpoa 
 are translated by adverbs, how must the participles v;ith which 
 they are connected, be translated ? [By verbs.] 
 
 {Genitive Msolute, (^•c.) 
 
 ^ 42,— 195. Which case is put absolutely in Greek ? [The 
 jr< nitive.] 196. What does the participle, put absolutely, express? 
 [The time, or generally any such relation to the prmcipal sen- 
 'ence, as we should express by when, after, since, as, because^ 
 though, if, &c.] 197. In what case do the participles of imper- 
 
 
 ■ <l 
 
102 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 ti't 
 
 Eonal verbs stand absoltUelyl [In the nominative; of C9urae 
 without a noun, and in the neuter gender.] 198. When the time 
 relates to a person^ what construction is used instead of the gen. 
 absolute? [«W is then generally expressed.] 199. How is a 
 motive^ which is attributed to another person, generally expres- 
 sed ? [By the particle mg with the gen. or ace. absolute.] 
 
 ( The Relative.) 
 
 ^43.-200. What does the relative often introduce? [A 
 cm<5e, ground, motive, or design of what is stated.] 201. What 
 use of the relative is less common in Greek than Latin ? [That 
 of merely connecting a sentence with the one before it.] 202. In 
 which clause is the antecedent often expressed ? [In the relative 
 clause.] 203. Where does the relat. clause often stand, when 
 this is the case ? [Before the principal clause.] 204. With what 
 does the relative often agree in case ? [With the antecedent in 
 the principal clause.] 265. What is this called ? lAitraction of 
 the Relative.'] 206. When the relative is attracted, where is the 
 antecedent often placed ? [In the relative clause, but in the case 
 in which it would stand in the principal clause.] 
 
 <^ 44.— 207. In such a sentence as "the fear, which we call 
 bashfulness,^^ should which agree with fear or with bashfulnessi 
 [With bashfidness.'] 208. Explain iativ oi. [It is equivalent to 
 enoiy some, and may be declined throughout] 209. What is the 
 Greek for sometimes ? [iaiiv ote.y-somewhere ? [eojiv onov.] 
 210. What is the English of icp q5 or ^V ^^^'^ [^ condition 
 f Aa^]— of av{f mv ? [Because, for.]— of ei ttg ? [ Wh(^oever ; 
 lit I, whatsoever.] 211. By what parts of the verb is fqp* ^ or 
 q)T€ followed ? [By ihQ future indie, or the infin.] , 
 
 ^ 45.— 212. Give the English of tov olov aov af^Qog. [Of 
 such a man as you.] 213. How may this construction be ex- 
 plained ? [avd()og toiovtov, olog av el] 214. What words does 
 oaog follow, when it has the meaning of rery? [Such words ai 
 ^avfiaarog, nXeiatog, acpOovog, &c.] , , r » 
 
 4 46.— 215. What is the construction of ov^tig oor^'pv'? 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 19a 
 
 [The declinable words are pui under the immediate government 
 f ' the verb.] 
 
 § 47.— 216. What tenses follow fiiklm in the infn.? [The 
 future, present, or aorist.] 217. Which infin. is the most common 
 after fitXXo), and which the least ? [The future infin. is the most, 
 the aorist the least common.] 
 
 § 48. — 218. What mood or tense follows onmg, when it re- 
 lates to the future? [The subj. or the future indie] 219. May it 
 retain them in connection with past time? [Yes.] 220. Is the 
 verb on which oncog dec. depends, ever omitted ? [Yes : the con- 
 struction is equivalent to an energetic imperative: — oga or ogazt 
 may be supplied.] 221. With what mood or tense is ov fii^ used ? 
 [With the fiU. indie, or aor. subj.] 222. In what sense ? [As an 
 emphatic prohibition or denial] 223. According to Dawes, 
 what aorists were not used in the subj. with ontog and ov [i^ ? 
 [The subjunctive of the aor. 1. act. and mid.] 224. Is this rule 
 correct ? [No.] 225. What is Buttmann's opinion ? [That the 
 subj. of the aor. 2. was employed with a kind of predilection, and 
 that, when the verb had no such tense, the fut. indie, was used 
 in preference to the subj. of the aor. 1.] 
 
 § 49. — 226. How is^ij used after expressions oC fear, &c. > 
 With the subjunctive or indie.] 227. When is the indie, with 
 iiij used in expressions oC fear? [When the speaker wishes to 
 ntimate his conviction that the thing feared, &c. has or will really 
 come to pass.] 228. How does it happen that filj ov sometimes 
 stands with a verb in the subjunctive, but without a preceding 
 verb ? [The notion of fear is often omitted before [iri ov, the verb 
 being then generally in the subj.] 229. After what kind of ex 
 pressions is fttj ov used with the infin. ? [After many negative 
 expressions.]* 229. Is it ever used with the participle or infin. ? 
 and, if so, when? [piij ov is sometimes used with the participle 
 and with worg and infin., after negative expressions.] 
 
 ^ 50. — 231. When is fijj used with relative sentences, parti- 
 ciples, adjectives, &c.? [Whenever the negative does not di 
 reetly and simply deny an assertion with reppect to some parlicu 
 lav mentioned person or thing.] 232. Does the infin. generally 
 takc^i/orov? [/if] 233. When does it take ov? [Wheii 
 ipidons or assertions of another person are stated in sermone qb* 
 
 • See 293. (1) (2) (8). — — •-^^ 
 
 9 
 
 I 
 
 k': 
 
194 
 
 QUESTIOIIS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 m 
 
 liquo.'] 234. When should fii^ follow cjarsl and when #i1 
 [With ooare, the infinitive takes ^jy, the indicative ov.] 
 
 ^ 51. — 235. What case do some adverbs govern? [The 
 same case as the adjectives from which they are derived.] 
 
 236. How is dog sometimes used ? [As a preposition »= ngos.'i 
 
 237. When only can tog be used as a prepos. 7 [It is only joined 
 to persons.'] 238. What mood do oqxi, fifXQ^, (oog, tart take ? 
 [The subj. or opt. when there is any uncertainty; the indie, when 
 not.] 239. Does ngiv civ eX&<o relate to the past or the future ? 
 [To the future.] 240. How is ' before Icame^ expressed ? [ngip 
 5 iX{^eip ifjis: jXQtv iX{^eTv ifte: or frglp 7iX&0f fy*"^-] ^^^' ^^ V 
 ever omitted before the infin. after ttqiv ? [Yes ; in Attic Greek 
 nearly always.] 
 
 <^ 52. — 242. In what kind of questions is a^a generally 
 used ? [In questions that imply something of uncertainty^ doubt, 
 or surprise.] 243. What interrog. particles expect the answer 
 *yes?' [The answer 'Yes' is expected hy^ag oh; ri yuQ ; 
 ov ; ovxovp ; a>l>Lo it 5 >] 244. What expect the answer * A'o'? 
 , [The answer 'A'b' is expected by, — a^a /4J/; ij nov ; num. forte! 
 WkLYi or fA^v ;] 245. What particles give an ironical force to qv7 
 ^dij, dri nov.] 246. Does ov expect ' yes * or ' no ' for answer ? 
 [ov expects yes ; fitj^ no.] 247. In what kind of questions are 
 eZra, STieita uaed ? [Such as express astonishment and dis- 
 pleasure.] 248. What words are used as a simple interrog. par- 
 ticle? [alXo 71 iq.] 249. Render ti naOmv ; — ri fiuOmv ; 
 [ti Jia&oiv ; what possesses you to . . . &c.? — ti fiuOoov ; what 
 induces you to . . . &c. ? 
 
 ^ 53. — 250. What are the proper forms of pronouns and 
 adverbs for indirect questions? [Those which are formed from 
 the direct interrogatives by the prefixed relative syllable 6 — .] 
 251. Are the simple interrogatives ever used in indirect ques- 
 tions? [Yes.] 252. Are the relatives ever so used? [Yes; 
 but very seldom.] 253. When the person addressed repeats the 
 question, what forms does he use? [The forms beginning with 
 I — .] 254. When the pron. or noun is the ace. after one verb, 
 and the nom. before the next, which case is generally omitted 1 
 [The nominative.] 
 
 ^ 54. — 255. By what particles are direct double question! 
 tfked ? [By norsQaVj or noteqa, — ?, less commonly by a^n— ^.J 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 195 
 
 256. By what particles are indirect double questions asked 1 
 
 [h78 — eitt, el — ^, notiqov — 50 
 
 ^ 55. — 257. After what verbs is il used for otif thai 7 [Af- 
 ter ^avfjid^tOj and some other verbs expressive of feelings. \ 
 
 258. After what verbs has %i the force o^ whether 7 [After verbs 
 of seeing^ knowing, considering, asking, sayings, trying, &c.l 
 
 259. When is idp used in this way ? [When the question re- 
 lates to an expected case that remains to be proved.] 
 
 ^ 56. — 260. How can an interrogative sentence be con- 
 densed in Greek ? [By attaching the interrogative to a partici- 
 ple, or using it in an oblique case.] 261. What clause may thus 
 be got rid of? [A relative clause attached to an interrogative 
 
 one.] 
 
 ^ 57. — 262. What is J fifif ? [A solemn form of assevera- 
 tion.] 263. When is the propos. gvv omitted ? [Before avi^, 
 avT j, &c. which then= /o^c/Zier with, with.] 264. How is dficpo- 
 reool used ? [aficpotegov is used adverbially, or ellipticaUy, by 
 the poets, for both ; as well— as, &c.] 265. How dficporsga ? 
 [In reference to two words, without being made to conform^to 
 them in case.] 266. What force has xat, when it refers to aX- 
 Xog ? [The force of especially, in particular.] 267. Explain the 
 use of ihe part. fut. with fQxea&ai, &c. [%€(y^ai, iivai, with 
 part, fut., is, to be going to, or on the point of] 268. How is 
 lyflo sometimes used with a past partic. 7 [As an emphatic cir- 
 cumlocution.] 269. How is it used with Xrjgeiv, &c. ? [«xa> with 
 the second pers. ofXr^geiv, naiXetv, qiXvdgeiv, &c. is used to make 
 a good-humoured observation.] 270. How is cpigcay used in 
 some expressions? [qitgmv appears redundant in some expres- 
 sions, but denotes a vehemence of purpose, not altogether free 
 
 from blame.] ^ rm • ' 
 
 ^ 58. 271. To what is SiKatog nm equivalei*^? [To di- 
 
 %ai6v iauv, f>', <fcc.] 272. How is oaov used ? [oaof is used 
 ellipticaUy with the infn.] 273. What words are followed by ijl 
 [Words that imply a comparison: e. g. q)^dveiv, diacpigsiVy ivav- 
 ziog, dtnXdaiog, idiog, VTieg&ef, ngiv.] 274. After what phrases 
 '8 a tense of nouiv omitted ? [After ovdev aXXo jy— , aXXo u 
 w— • T* ttXXo ri—; &c.] 275. By what are a person's quoted 
 words introduced ? [By on.] 276. How is the aor. used with 
 •4 Qv ? [For the present^ 
 
 % \ 
 
 ■ «■ -I 
 
 ^ 
 
INDEX I. 
 
 |70bs. Look under ' am * for adjectives, phrases, Sec. with to b9» 
 F. M.=future middle. 
 
 (?) implies, that the pupil is to ask himself how the word is con* 
 jugated or declined. ^ 
 
 ii,.*" 
 
 A, = a certain, jig, 12. 
 About (of time), vno (ace), 
 
 326. 
 (after to fear, to he 
 
 at ease, <fcc.), nsQi {dat,\ 
 
 283*. 
 
 (after talk, fear, con 
 
 tend), nsQi {dat.), some- 
 times uficfi (dat.), 283*. 
 — (after to be employ- 
 
 ed), mgif or afjiq)i, with 
 
 ace, 283*. 
 Abrocomas, 229, note q. 
 
 'A§Qoxnfiag, G. a. 
 Abstain from, amionai 
 
 {gen.\ 138. 
 : we must — , 
 
 aqisxttop iari, with gen. 
 Accord ins; to reason, naTcc 
 
 X6yov, 274. 
 Accuse, xatriyoQHvt (proper- 
 
 ly, speak against) rivog, 
 or rivog tt, 156. — syxaXEiP 
 (properly, cite a person; 
 call him into court) rivi 
 and rm n, 183. Both are 
 judicial words, but used 
 with the same latitude as 
 our * accused Of the two, 
 iyxaXelv should probably 
 be preferred, if the charge 
 relates to private matters. 
 
 (V.) 
 Accustom, aWfo), 52. 
 
 (Am accustomed, ei&ta 
 fiai or eioiOuy 52.) 
 Acquire, ntdofiaiy 87. 
 Act, noim, 60. 
 
 — insolently towards, v^qi- 
 
 I^BIV Sig TlVUf 138. 
 
 — strangely, ^avfiaaiot 
 TxoteiVf 259. 
 
 — unjustly (= injure), aSt- 
 
 t The constructions of KaTTiyopeTv are very numerous : KarriyopCt eo^ 
 Ti96i and Ti ; or oi rtvos and n ; or cov (and ae) vcpi nvoi ; and Ka-^yop^ 
 C€ra a0v. 
 
198 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 it" 
 
 XHf tiva a?id ti (also eig, 
 
 TtQog, negi z/f a), 138. 
 Admire, ^avftdtoi, F. M. 
 
 generally, 8. 
 Adopt a resolution, povXevsa- 
 
 Oai, 190. 
 Adorn, xoafisco, 206. 
 Advance, ngoxonQsm, 27 A. 
 Affair, nQuyixa, to, 8. 
 Affliction, nddog, to, 150. 
 Afford, naQfxto, 214. 
 After, lAtid (occ), 293*. 
 a long time, dia noX- 
 
 Xov XQovov^ 270. 
 
 some time, ^laXinoiv 
 
 XQovovj 235. 
 270. 
 
 Sid XQOfOv, 
 
 our former tears, ex 
 roov TTQoa&ev daxQvmVf 231. 
 the manner of a dog, 
 
 xwog dixTjv, 250. 
 Again, ai&ig, 100. 
 Against (after to march), 
 
 int, ace. 24. eig, 259. 
 (=in violation of), 
 
 naQo, 299. 
 
 (after commit an 
 
 injury), eig or neqi, with 
 ace, 138. 
 
 ;7^V (ace), 319. 
 
 - (after verbs of speak- 
 
 ing, dtc), jcaid genit.j 
 
 274. 
 Age (a person's), r^Xixia, w, 
 
 144. 
 Agreeable, r^dvg, 214. 
 
 Agreeable : if it is — , el aot 
 
 ^ovXofisvcp iattf 206. 
 Agricultural population, ol 
 
 dficpl ytjt sxoftsg, 278. 
 Aid, imxovQ8(o, dat.y also ace, 
 
 of the thing, 239. 
 Aim at, ctoxd^ofiat, gen,^ 
 
 156. 
 Alas, qisv, — oiftoi, 144. 
 Alexander, *AXi%avSqog, 24. 
 All, 6 nag, or nag 6 — . PL 
 
 ndvteg. See note on 44, 
 
 46. 
 
 — but {as-much'as-not\ 
 oaov oVf 125. 
 
 — day, dm ndaav thv ru«- 
 gav, 259. 
 
 Alliance. See Form. 
 Allow to taste, yevoa, 150. 
 
 to be done with im- 
 punity, negiogaf {-ideiv, 
 -oipsaxyai), with inf, of 
 thing to be prevented; 
 the par tic. ot a wrong to 
 be revenged, 331. See 
 note •. 
 
 Almost, oXiyov delr,OT oXiyov 
 
 only, 283. 
 Already, i^drj, 65. 
 Also, xa/, 92. 
 Although, xamsQ, 175. 
 
 (a.) 
 
 Am able, dvvnfiai (possum) 
 87. — olog T« eifiit (^'weoj^ 
 283. /S'cc Can. 
 
 t Or oUvTC (oi6<rr% 
 
 i\ 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 199 
 
 Am (an) actual murderer, 
 
 avroxBiQ eifiit 299. 
 . — adapted for, olog elfii, 
 
 283. 
 
 — angry with, ogyiXof^ai, 
 dat. 183. di oqyrig ix^iv, 
 
 270. 
 
 — ashamed, ahxvvofiai, 
 
 239. 
 
 — at a loss, dnoQtoDf 100. 
 
 [See 98, 99.] 
 
 — at dinner, Semvt<a, 288. 
 
 — at enmity with, di ex- 
 ^gag yiyvEO&ai rivi* 270. 
 
 — at leisure, oxoXd^co, 112. 
 
 — at liberty. See 249. 6. 
 
 — awake, iygiyoga, 193. 
 
 — aware, fiav&dv<o (?), 239 
 
 (b.) ^ 
 
 Am banished, (fsvym, 270. 
 ^— broken, xatmya, 193. 
 
 — by nature, mcpvxa, eqivf, 
 214. 
 
 (d.) 
 
 Am dishonoured by, dnnd 
 ^ofjiai ngog tivog, 319. 
 
 — distant from, dn£x<^, 138 
 
 — doing well, ev ngdttca, 8. 
 — ill, xaxwff ngdtto}, 
 
 8. 
 
 (e.) 
 
 (c.) 
 
 Am come, Jxw. ^'^^^ mcan- 
 i/i^ o/ perf. 206. 
 
 — commander, aTgazTjyia), 
 
 62. 
 
 confident, nsnot&a, 193. 
 
 -— congealed, nenrjya,!^^* 
 
 — conscious, avvoida ifiav- 
 
 jq), 239. 
 i^- contemporary with, xa- 
 
 la Toy a^Toy XQ^^'^^ yevia- 
 em, 183. 
 — contented with, ayanaco, 
 with acc. or dat., 52. 
 
 Am evidently, &c. See 239. 
 
 Am far from, noXXov Sm, 
 283*. 
 
 — fixed, nintjya, 193 
 
 — fond of, dyandco, 52. 
 
 — fortunate, evrvxto), 92. 
 
 (g.) 
 
 Am general, atgarriyi(o, 52. 
 
 — glad, ^doftaf, rfa^, 20. 
 
 — going (to), iitXX(o (aug- 
 ment?), 283*. 
 
 — gone, oixofiai{l), perfect 
 meaning, 206. 
 
 grateful for, x«C'*' o*^<* 
 
 (gen. of thing, dat. of 
 pers.),222. [for oZ5a, see 
 73.] 
 
 (h.) 
 Am here, ndgsijit, 52. 
 
 00 
 
 Am I . . . ? (in doubtfu. 
 
 questions) 137, note e. 
 - ill (of a disease), xaf/ya: 
 
 I; 
 
200 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 {labor o) ; aafiovfiat, ntx- 
 fitiita, sxafiOfy 183. 
 
 — in my right mind, (to9- 
 cpQovtat, 125. 
 
 — in a passion or rage, ;(«- 
 Xsnaivcoj dat., 183. 
 
 — in safety, iv jcp aaqiaXsi 
 dill, 299. 
 
 — in the habit of perform- 
 ing, TiQaxtiaog {elfit), with 
 gen. See 149. 
 
 — indignant, avavaxiea, 
 337. 
 
 — informed of, aiaOdvo- 
 liou (?), 190 
 
 00 
 
 Am likely, ^^01 (?), 283*. 
 — lost, aiSQOvuatf 168*. r. 
 
 (m.) 
 
 Am mad, fiaivofiat (?), 125. 
 
 my own master, ifiav- 
 
 jov elfiif 162*. i. 
 
 (n.) 
 
 Am named after, ovofia fj^m 
 
 im tivog, 288. 
 near, oXiyov dt(o, or oXi- 
 
 yov only^ 283*. 
 next to, eyouai, ffen, 
 
 —not a man to, 283. b. 
 
 afraid of, eaQQtm 
 
 (ace), 138. 
 
 (0.) 
 im of opinion, vofuXm, 52. 
 
 Am of service to, w(fdim 
 (ace), 82. 
 
 a character (to), elfn 
 
 ologf 283. b. 
 — off, otxofiai (?), perf, 
 
 meaning, 206. 
 on my guard, qivXaitea- 
 
 &ai, ace, 190. 
 on his side, eifu ngog 
 
 {gen.l 319. 
 on an equal footing 
 
 with, ofioiog eifit, 227. 6. 
 
 (p.) 
 Am pained at aXyeia, 20. 
 
 persuaded, ;r£;rot^a, 193. 
 
 pleased with, ?fionai, 
 
 dat. 20. 
 
 present, ndgeifitf 52. 
 
 produced. See 214. 
 
 prosperous, dtvxtoa, 92, 
 
 punished, dixr^v dtSofaif- 
 
 or dot/rai : gen. of thing ; 
 
 dat, of person by whom, 
 
 228. 
 
 Am safe, eV t(J) aacpaXet eiftt. 
 slow to, (fee, axoXy {by 
 
 leisure), with a verb, 1 12i 
 suffering (from a dis- 
 
 ease). See * am ill of.' 
 surprised at, Oavfid^a 
 
 (F. M.), 8. 
 
 (t.) 
 Am thankful for, xdQiv olda, 
 gen. of thing, 222. Foi 
 olda see 73, note q. 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 201 
 
 Am the slave of, dov^cvw, I Apart, x«)C&, 309. 
 
 dat. 359. 
 — there, ndgeifn, 92. 
 to, i,aX(o (?), 283* 
 
 (u.) 
 Am undone, oXmXa, dnoXoa 
 Xa, 193. 
 
 ApolLo,'^;roi;Lo()i'(?),341. 
 Appear (with part.), qiolvc* 
 
 ficu, 239. 
 Apt to do, or perform, ngax* 
 
 jiHog {gen.), 160. ^ 
 govern, a^;((xoV(^c».), 
 
 150. 
 
 unseen by, Xav&dvm (?), Arbitration, diaira, 132. 
 
 ace. 154. 
 
 Am vexed, dxOofiai (?) {dat. 
 but Itti in construction ex- 
 plained in 19*. c), 20. 
 
 (w.) 
 
 Am wholly wrapt in, ngog 
 toviq^ oXog eliUf 319. 
 
 wise {= prudent), aoo- 
 
 (fQOPtOi), 125. 
 
 — with you, TzdQEifAiy 92. 
 within a little, oliyov 
 
 5«a), 2S3*. 
 withoutfearof, x>«(>^£w, 
 
 ace. 138. 
 Ambassador, ttq^o^v^^ 259. 
 Ambitious, (piXozTuogj 214. 
 Among the first, translated 
 
 by uQldfiEvog {having be 
 
 gun). See lOiO. 
 And that too,xatTai;ra,206. 
 
 yet, fZra, sneiTitj 315. 
 
 nevertheless, eitaf snei- 
 
 Trt, 315. 
 Ancestor, ngoyovog, 156. 
 Animal, ^eiov, 65. 
 Annoy, XvTTta), 41. 
 Answer, a^oxpiVofiat (?),278. 
 
 Are there any whom . .1 
 269. d. 
 
 Arise, iysiQOfiai {pass.)^ 193. 
 
 Arms, oTzXaj 168*. 
 
 Army, aTgdzevfiaj to, 24. 
 
 Arouse, iyeigoD (perf. with 
 Attic redupL), 193. 
 
 Arrange, rdaaco (later Attic 
 Tttzroj), 96. — xoafjtta), dta- 
 xoa^soi (to arrange, with 
 a view to a pleasing ap- 
 peara7iceofelegance,sym- 
 metry apt arrangement, 
 (fee), 206. 
 
 Arrive, dq}ixvsofiai (?), 144. 
 
 ■ — first, q}Oijvai (?) aqt- 
 
 ix6(jievogf 242. d. 
 
 but only, &c., 
 
 358.6. 
 Art, tsxvtjf 214. 
 As he was, 351. 
 
 — his custom was. See 
 Custom. 
 
 -- many as,ocTo(, 175. 
 
 — possible, 0601 
 
 nXeToTotf 174. c. 
 
 -- silently as possible, atyi 
 (og dvvcTOv, 174. b. 
 
 — faras they are concerned; 
 
 fo in) tovtoig shai, 206. 
 
 y \i 
 
202 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 ikiU' 
 
 As far at least as .his is con- 
 cerned, Tovtov ve EPexa, 
 250. 
 
 A.S far as depends on this, 
 J0V70V ys ivexa, 250. 
 
 — as much as any body. 
 See 100. 
 
 — the saying is, to Xeyofie- 
 pov, 137. d. 
 
 — possible ( af£er superla- 
 tives), 6g, on, 171. 
 
 — he possibly could, 174. c. 
 
 — fast as they could, atg zd- 
 Xovg fjj^of, 278. 
 
 — soon as he was born,fv- 
 Ovg ysvofievog, 309. 
 
 — long as, ears, 306. 
 
 — to, (oaie, with inf., 211. 
 
 — (before particX ate, ate 
 di 242. a. 
 
 Ask, rJQOfitir, aor. 2 : f (>o)t«w 
 used for the other tenses, 
 73. 
 
 for aitm (two accusa- 
 tives), 87. 
 
 Assist in the defence of, j5ojy- 
 ^fw, dat. 121. 
 
 Assistance. SeeFXy or'Rxm. 
 
 Associate with, huiUoi, dat. 
 183. 
 
 Assuredly (in protestations), 
 Ti fitjv, 343. 
 
 (will not), ov uL 
 
 2S7\ 
 
 Astonished (to be), Oavud^m 
 
 (F. M.) 
 At, 319. 
 •— all, ttQx^v 01 thp dgrtjv, 
 
 92,132. 
 
 At. Not at all (oMp ti). 
 
 — a little distance, di oXivop 
 270. ' • 
 
 — a great distance, dta nol- 
 Xol, 270. 
 
 — any time, rxote. 
 
 — ease about, Oaggetv neoL 
 283*. 
 
 — first, dQxofiefog, 235. 
 
 — home, evdov, 125. 
 
 — last, TO reXsvtaiop, 34* ; 
 teXevtcov, 235. 
 
 — least, ye, 73. 
 
 — once, i^drj, 65— How to 
 translate it by the «ar//c. 
 (p&daag, or by ovx av qi&d- 
 voig] see 242. e.f. 
 
 — the beginning, dQxoftevog, 
 
 — the suggestion of others, 
 an dvdgav itegosv, 243. 
 
 Athens, '^Orjvai, 15. 
 
 (O) Athenians, cJ ardgeg 
 
 *j4{^rivaXoi, 337. 
 Attach great importance to, 
 
 77^0 ;roUoi; noietaOat, 243. 
 
 — negi noXXov noieiabai or 
 
 nyeia^ai, 283*. 
 Attempt, Tteigdofiai, 121.— 
 
 ( = dare) toXfidat, 239. 
 Attend to, to^ vow rrgoaexfi^t 
 
 a master, tig dh 
 
 dacxdXov cpoirav, 259. 
 Avoid = fly from, cpevyetv^So, 
 
 Bad, xaxog, 20. 
 
 Banished (tobe), qitvYeip,270 
 
 no. ax I. 
 
 20d 
 
 Banishment, (pvr»/, 156. I Bethink myself, qp^o,Tit«>, 
 
 ^"?:;T^^2I?^ ' Between, ,.r«Jv, 28. 
 
 Z^e^XTlSSiiy Beyond i^^^^^^^^^ 
 Battle, ,«x.; 73. B.d ;.^^^^^^^ HJ ^^^^ 
 
 Base, aiaxQog, o5. . ^""> "^''^ ^. ^ .. A.' . oi a 
 
 Bear, (p^getv (?), 60.--anxo 
 ^at (= endure) refers to 
 
 *'V'"'' 'Oil 
 
 . -.young — ,veoa6og,^i^^ 
 
 Birth, y«Voff, ro, 150. 
 
 our DOM?er of enduring Black, fieXaff,»7. 
 
 (raftorrr^n^uZ^., &c.). Blame, ,.W er>^« 
 
 214.-To;Liti(ia, (== susti' Xeo), da^ 1«^. 
 
 nere\ to bear to do what Body, G(^a, l^b. 
 
 requires coz^ra^e, 239, Boldly, ^a^c^' P^^^^^ 
 
 '^toTr Both,aMg)03,a/<g)orc^o?. i^ 
 
 note y. 
 Beautiful, xaXogt 20. 
 Beauty, xdXXog to, 8. 
 Because (d/a to, &c.), 221. 
 
 6. ayf^' (Sy, 267. 
 Become, yiyvofxai (;))}^ 
 Before,t ^r^tV or fr^tv 17, oU7. 
 (= in preference to), 
 
 ng6{gen.),2i2]0Lvtl,gen. 
 
 213. e. 
 
 Beget, yevvdoa, 239. 
 Begin, %o/ia(, 100. 
 Beginning, agxn^ ^^f- 
 Behave ill to, xaxm noteiv, 
 
 ace, 35. 
 
 Behold, ^edofiai, 87. 
 Belong to, gen. with «^'«c. 
 Belly, yaatrigy rj (.')> ^^^• 
 Benefit, mcfeXeco (ace), 8/2. 
 Beseech, dtofiai, 150, (^en. 
 
 149. 6.) 5c)7(To/iat, «5f J?^»?»'. ^ 
 Besides, lm{dat.),^Q>7taQa 
 
 {ace), 299. 
 
 Best, ? see Good, 35. 
 
 Better, S ^^____ 
 
 Both, dficpo}, dficporegog. See 
 
 28. 
 Both— and, xal—aai, or t« 
 
 — xai, 112, 
 Both in other respects— and 
 
 also, aXXmg te xai, 278. 
 Boy, naig, 15. 
 Brave, drdgeXog, 175. 
 a danger, xivdvveveip xiv- 
 
 dvvov, 131. a. 
 Bread, a^ro?, 299. ^ 
 Break, ayyvjiit, xatayvvfAi (/), 
 
 (alaw), ;raea?«t''<»»228. 
 
 Breast, atigvov, 193. 
 
 Bring, ayw, 341. ^ 
 
 assistance to, emxovgi(Ot 
 
 da^. also ace. of the thing, 
 
 239. 
 
 — forth, TixTco, (?), 15. 
 up, rglcpto, 190. — ;rat- 
 
 ^evfo, 214. . 
 
 ToegjtD relates to physi- 
 
 cat, naidevm to moral 
 
 education: i. e. Tgeqpoo 
 
 t How to translate ' before^ by ^Wvo,, see 942, i 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 S-* < 
 
 1,1 
 
 ll 
 
 *s. 
 
t04 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 IW»' 
 
 to the body, naitiiito\ 
 to the mind, \ 
 
 ^ bad nQ^^s, vmnooy u 
 amXXeip, 318. g. 
 Brother, ddeXgiog, 20. 
 Burnout, *xx«/a>, 341. xaiJao,, 
 
 &C. — txav&t^y. 
 But, a/— (a ^fV should be in 
 
 the former clause), 38, 
 note h. ^' ' 
 
 — for, €/ ^^ ^la; with ace. 
 
 Buy, dyoQd^to, 163. 
 
 J'vW, with geti. of 
 
 agent, 326. 
 ^^oV, after to be prais- 
 ed or blamed by. 
 - (-close by), ;r^oV, 319. 
 
 (=- cause), V7i6,gen, and 
 alter passive verb, 326. 
 
 — Jupiter, (fee. ,-^ ^/a,*„A 
 
 torJia,3iL 
 - the hands of, ^;jo', ^ew. 
 
 — the father's side, „ghg 
 
 fOLtQOS, 319. ^ 
 
 — fives, (fee, iiva nittB, 259. 
 
 — what conduct? ri av 
 
 noiovvtig; 340. a. 
 
 — compulsion, In' drdj'xijg, 
 
 326. 
 
 Calculate, XopXea&ai nohg 
 •^VTop, 319. ^ 
 
 Calumniously ; to speak— 
 of, XoidoQiofiai, dat, 1 83. 
 
 t^an, awa^ai (possum), 87. 
 "^«'0« ri £,)4« (qH€0)j 283. 
 
 The former relates r« 
 ^otper, the latter to con 
 dition or qualification. 
 Aug.ofdv*af4at7 
 Can ; that can be ] 
 
 taught, 
 Capable of being p'^«^7oV 
 taught, J 
 
 Care for, xr;^o^«,(^en.), 156. 
 Carefully provide for, ivea^ 
 
 Oai, ge7i. 149. d. 
 Cares, ^gortideg, 150. 
 
 188 (1)"'^"''^^'''''^"''^"' 
 Catch (in commission of a 
 crime), dXiaxofiai (?), 73 
 note s. V /' » 
 
 Cause, arrtoy, 100. 
 
 — to be set before me, 
 
 naqauOEfjiai, 188. 
 
 Cavalry, iWf,^ {pi of /.t- 
 ^«vff), 96. 
 
 Cease, navo^ai of what may 
 be only a temporary, 
 Xtjy(o of a final cessation 
 at least for the time. X^m 
 terminates the aclion; 
 Tccvofiai breaks its cori- 
 
 ^^nuity, but may, or may 
 not, terminate it. They 
 
 govern ^ew., 154. 188(1). 
 navofiai with partic, 239. 
 Certain (a), t,V, 12. </. 
 Character: of a^to, £?.«, 
 
 oiog (tnfin.), 283. 
 Charge (enemy), iXa^rsit elg, 
 sometmies «W, 96. 
 
 with, iyxaXeoj, dat. 
 
 01 peis., flrcc. of thing, 183 
 
 IMD£X I. 
 
 205 
 
 Charge,j<aTjy;'0(>«o),t^cw.l56. 
 
 : prosecute on a — , 
 
 dicoxeiVf gen. of crime, 35. 
 : am tried on a — , 
 
 qstvynv, gen. of crime, 35. 
 
 Chase, ^qa, 154. 
 
 Chastise, xo;i«C«, F. M., 121. 
 
 Chatter, XaXiot, 288. 
 
 Child, nai^iov, 150. 
 
 Childless, dnaig, 150. 
 
 Choose, aiQfOfiai (?), 190. a. 
 
 • : what I choose to 
 
 do, « Soxet (uoi), 96. See 
 Diff. 33. 
 
 Citizen, noXh^g (r). 8. 
 
 City, noXig, rj. 8. — datv, to. 
 24. "Aaiv refers to the site 
 or buildings : noXig to the 
 citizens. Hence datv 
 never means ^state,^ as 
 noXig so often does. The 
 dotv was often an old or 
 sacred part of a nohg. 
 
 Clever, (joqroV, 20. ^f/roV, 214. 
 
 Cleverness, trogj/a, 24. 
 
 Cling to, f;f£(T^«4,^en. 149.rf. 
 
 Close by, «W, rfa^ 288. ngog, 
 
 319. 
 Collect, a^^oit<o, 175. 
 Combat, a disorder, inixov- 
 
 QEiv v6(j(Pf 239. 
 Come, egxofiai (?), 112, note 
 b. 
 
 Come for this (to effect it) 
 iXx^eiv inl rot tat. 
 
 (*to feteh it), 
 
 eXOeiv fni tovto, 
 — - — • off, dnaXXdrros (ex or 
 
 dn6)y 154. 
 Come on or up, ngoaeifit, 175. 
 
 next to, sxea&at, gen. 
 
 : said that he would — 
 
 yt] tj^etp, 91. b, or tlnep ou 
 
 rjloi, 205. e. 
 
 Command (an army), jtqa- 
 
 Ttjym, 52. 
 Cornmence a war, dgaa&ai 
 
 TToXefiov ngog, ace, 188. 
 Commit, inngtnay dat. 132. 
 ^ — a sill, dfiagrdva) (?) 
 
 {eig or negi\ with ace), 154. 
 an injury, ddixstp 
 
 mm 
 
 : am, — ^xw, perf. 
 
 meaning, 206. 
 
 (=be present to as- 
 
 sist), nageipat, 92. 
 
 ddixiaPf 138. 
 Company, o/^U/a, 1 12. 
 .— -: keep—, SfiV.toi, 
 
 dat. 
 Complaint (a),«a^m<a (= a 
 
 weakness, \n infirmity), 
 
 319. -^ ^^' 
 
 Concerned, as ' 
 
 far as this is, 
 as far '^'''^r^^ 
 
 at least as '"'**«' ^^^ 
 
 this is. 
 
 Condemn, xaraYiypaaxaj (?) 
 
 156, obs. 
 Condition: on — , i(p cp oi 
 
 ^TSf 267. 
 Confer benefits on, ev nottXp, 
 
 ace. 35. 
 
 t See note, on Accuoe. 
 
 irii 
 
206 
 
 INDEX r^ 
 
 K*> 
 
 / 
 
 Confess, ofwXoytojy 190. 
 
 Confide to, imrQiTKo, 132. 
 
 Conquer, vTudvt {vmcere; 
 gain a victory over ene- 
 mies ;) nsQiyiynadai (?), 
 overcome {gen.) P3='*In' 
 omitted after conquer 
 when it stands before 
 * battle.' 
 
 Consider, axontoa (of care- 
 fully examining and re- 
 flecting on a point, 100. — 
 (fQovnXo) (of anxious con- 
 sideration), 288. — with 
 oneself, 7ia() taviov (cxott- 
 £iv or axeni£<j\>ai)y 319. 
 
 Considerable, avxvog, 163. 
 
 Consideration, a^itoiia, 144. 
 
 Constitution, nolitua, 206. 
 
 Consult, ^ovXivHv, 190. 
 
 together, ^ovXsvea- 
 
 &ai, 190. 
 
 Consume, avaXi6iii(xi (?), 235. 
 
 Contemporary with, to be. 
 See 183. 182. a. 
 
 Contend with, £(?tt«» ^«^- 
 183. 
 
 Contention, iqig, ij^og, 183. 
 
 Continuous, avxvog, 163. 
 
 Contrary to, TraQci {ace.) 299. 
 
 Contrivance, rfp^* 214. 
 
 Corn, olTogf 259. 
 
 Corpse, vsxQog, 150. 
 
 Country, x^^a (« country), 
 2i,—najQig (native coun- 
 try or native city), 228. 
 
 Crocodile, xQoxo^tiXog^ 28. 
 
 Cross (a river), nsQaiovo&aiy 
 with aor. pass. 188 (1 ). 
 
 Crowded, daavg^ 150. 
 Crown, attqjavog, 144. 
 Cry, xJLatm (?), 150. daxqvm 
 
 283*. 
 Cultivate, acxicoj 121. Aor. 
 
 mid. ? 190. (t 
 Custom : ac- \ 
 cording to — , I xara to 
 : as his f doaOogt 52. 
 
 was, j 
 
 Cut, rffivm (?), 46. 
 
 — out, ixxomo), 132. 
 
 — to pieces, xataxonzet, 
 132. 
 
 Cyrus, KvQog, 24. 
 
 Damage : to inflict the most, 
 nXeiata xaxovQyeip {accU" 
 sative.) 
 
 Damsel, xogtj, 15. 
 
 Dance, j^oqevoj, 168*. 
 
 Danger, xitdvvogy 132. 
 
 (to brave, incur, ex- 
 pose oneself to a), xivdwev' 
 €iv xivdwov. 
 
 Dare, loyL^ao), 239. 
 
 Daughter, ^vydrrjQ (?), 20. 
 
 Dead, vexgog, 150. 
 
 Death, ^dvarog^ 41. 
 
 Deceive, a;7araa}, tJa/raTaou, 
 41. 
 
 Decide, x^iVw (?), 92. 
 
 Defend, dfiiveiv with rfar 
 only, 222. 
 
 Deliberate, ^ovXsiic&at neQi, 
 gen. 190. 
 
 Delight, jiQna), 41. 
 
 Deny, agvioftai^ 293. 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 201 
 
 Depends on you, if ao\ eon, 
 
 259. 
 Deprive of, dnoaTeQscuj 125. 
 
 GTSQsai^ 168*. 
 Desire, im&vfzeony gen. Im- 
 
 ^vfjiia, 156. 
 Desist from, Xi^yaiygen. 154. 
 Despicable, qjavXogy 144. 
 Despise, oAi^oo^eoa, ^cm. 
 
 xaxacfQOVicOy gen. 156. 
 Destroy, diaqt&eiQO) (?), 92. 
 
 «;roZii'fit (?), 193. 
 Determined (when or 
 
 though we have, <kc.), 
 
 dollar tjftiVf 249. C. 
 Die, ^yiJcTxo), a;ro{^f jJ(Txa) (?), 
 
 125. 
 Differ, ^laqpfipo) (?), ^cn. 154. 
 Difficult, xaXsTTog^ 65, 214. 
 Dine, deinvtoa, 288. 
 Dining-room, aywycwy, to, 
 
 96. 
 Directly, ev&vg, 309. 
 
 , by qi&dvoDy 240. 
 
 to, el&v {gen.\ 309. 
 
 Disappear: to make to — , 
 
 dq)aviXoiif 306. 
 Disappeared, (fgovdog^ 65. 
 Disbelieve, dmaimydat. 132. 
 Disease, voaogy ^, 154. 
 Disgraceful, alaxQog, 35. 
 Dishonour, drifid^my 319. 
 Disobey, dmaitco, dat. 132. 
 Disposition, ^^oj;, to', 138. 
 
 T^o';roff, 150. 
 Dispute with, f^<tw» dat. 
 
 183. 
 Do, 8, ngittm {=agere 
 
 and gerere) denotes gen- 
 
 erally the exertion of 
 power upon an object: 
 to do ; to em^ploy oneself 
 about something already 
 existing ; hence, to man' 
 age or adfninister any 
 thing ; to conduct a busi- 
 ness. Hence used with 
 general notions, as ovdiv, 
 fitidev, and with adverbs, 
 Bv, (fee. — noieiv {facere), 
 to make, to prepare, <fcc.: 
 also * do' generally, when 
 the object is a neuter pro- 
 noun, as in ^ what must 1 
 do ?^ — nqdtxHv denotes 
 activity generally ; nomvy 
 productive activity. 
 
 Do the greatest injury, toj 
 fityiara ^Xdnreiv (ace.) 
 
 — : to be doing well or ill, 
 «5 or xaxco^ nqdtJHv. 
 
 — any thing whatever for 
 the sake of gain, dnh nav 
 tog xegdaiveiv, 283. 
 
 — evil towards, xaxovgysm, 
 222. 
 
 — - good to, £v noieiv, ace. 35. 
 
 — harm to, x»xov^y«», 222 
 
 — injustice to, ddixm, 138. 
 
 — kind offices to, ev noieTv, 
 ace. 35. 
 
 — nothing but, ovdev aXXo 
 1] {noisiv often omitted) 
 356. e. 
 
 — service to, (ocpsXeony 82. 
 
 — with (a thing), xgdofAai^ 
 dat. {contraction!) 138. 
 
 Dog, xvm (?), 41. 
 
 \ 
 
 f i" 
 
 1 
 
208 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 Doors : in — , evSor, 125. 
 
 Down, ndioOf 28. 
 
 from, xaid {gen.\ 
 
 274. 
 Downwards, xaTtt), 28. 
 Drachma, dQaxfttj^ 163. 
 Draw up (of an army), rda- 
 
 6(Of 96. 
 , =« arrange, xoff- 
 
 ^£00, 206. 
 Drawn up four deep, im 
 
 rettaQoav Tetdi&ai^ 288. 
 Drink, nivto (?), 144. 
 During the disease, naia trjv 
 
 voaov, 274. 
 Dwell, otWoj, 274. 
 
 Each, nag, 46. 
 Eagle, dsTog, 36. 
 Ear, ovg, coxoV, to, 20. 
 Early in the morning, ;r()(i)i, 
 
 193. 
 Easy, QciSiog. See 65. 
 Eat, ia&io) (?), 144. 
 Educate, TraidsvoHf 214. 
 Egg, woV, 15. 
 Elect = choose, aiQHaOai (?), 
 
 (dpTi), 190. a. 
 Elephant, iXecpag.frog^ c, 35. 
 Empty, fidxaiog, 206. 
 Enact laws: when OElrai 
 
 pofiovg ? when OiaOai ? 
 
 See 188. 
 Endeavour, nsiQaofiai, 121, 
 
 206. 
 Endure, dv^xoficti (?), 214. 
 Enem* , (the), ol nolifuoi, 
 
 46. 
 
 Engage in a war, agaa^m 
 
 noXefiov ngog, ace. 188. 
 Enjoy, dnoXavm (ffenitive\ 
 
 259. 
 Enough: to be — , doMiv, 
 
 175. 
 : more than enough, 
 
 nsgnid tmp doxovpttoPf 
 
 174./. 
 
 , ra aQxovvtei, (i. e. 
 
 things that suffice). 
 
 Entrust, imtoiTtoi, niatevoDf 
 132. 
 
 to, ImjQfTico, (lays 
 
 more stress on the entire 
 giving up of the thing in 
 question, so that it is now 
 quite in the other person's 
 hands). — niaTsvo) (gives 
 more prominence to the 
 fact that I put sufficient 
 confidence in the other 
 person to entrust the thing 
 in question to him), 132. 
 
 Envy, qp^oVoi?: {v.) qi&ovim, 
 dat. 183. 
 
 Equestrian exercises, ta in- 
 ntxd, 163. 
 
 Equivalent to, dvri, adv. 
 
 Err, dfiaQtdpoo (?), 154. 
 
 Escape from, g/ciJyoj, ace, 87. 
 
 Especially, dXXmg re xatf 
 278. 
 
 : and — , xa/, re- 
 
 f erring to dXXog, 346. 
 
 Even, xa/, 82. 
 
 Ever, 710 re, 87. dgxt'ip or ? Jt 
 aQxt^Pj 132. 
 
 Every, nde, 46. 
 
 % 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 201 
 
 Every body, nag ttg, 52. (ov- 
 
 deig oatig ov, 277.) 
 day, dva ndaav, rjfis- 
 
 Qup, 259. 
 
 five years, dia nivts 
 
 iimv, 269. 
 Evidently. See 239. 
 Evil-doer, xaxovgyog, 222. 
 Evils (= bad things), xaxd, 
 
 20. 
 Exact (payment), ngdiiia- 
 
 &ai, 163. 
 Examine (a question, (fcc), 
 
 (jxoneaif 100. 
 Except, nXi^v {gen.) 
 
 if, TtXrjv ei, 309. 
 
 Excessive, 6 ayav {adv. with 
 
 ar^), 228. 
 Excessively, ayar, 228. 
 Exclude from, eigyoi, 154. 
 Exercise, affxcoo, 121. 
 Existing things, ra ovta, 65. 
 Expediency, to cvficpsgov, 
 
 228. 
 Expedient, 228. Vide It is. 
 Expedition (to go on an), 
 
 (STgatevcOy 65. 
 Expose myself to a danger, 
 
 xiv^vvevEiv xivdvvov, 132. 
 External (things), rd fjco, 
 
 125. 
 Extremely (like). See 87. 
 Eye, 6(f\yaX^6g, 132. 
 
 Failh; mang, Ij, 132. 
 Faithful, niatog, 87. 
 
 Fall, mWrco, (?), 293.^ 
 in with, ipTvyx^^^* (*) 
 
 dat, 183. 
 Fall into a person's power 
 
 pyvsa&ai ini tivi, 293. 
 Family, ykfog, to, 150. 
 Far, far on, no^gca : = muchf 
 
 noXvy 144 
 
 from it, rroXXov d£TVf283*^ 
 
 Fast, Ttt/v?, 35. 
 Father, natrigy (?), 20. 
 Fault : to find — with, imti- 
 
 fidoa, dat. 183. 
 Fear, q)o^eofiaiy (fut. mid. 
 
 and pass. : aor. pass.), 41. 
 
 — dsido) (of a lasting ap- 
 
 prehensionordread),293*. 
 
 {subst.) qio^og. 
 
 deogj TO, 326. 
 
 Feasible, dwatog, 175. 
 Feel grateful or thankfulj 
 
 xdgiv eldhaift gen. oi 
 
 thing, 222. ^ 
 
 pain, dXyeojt 20. 
 
 sure, ninoi&a {nei&(o\ 
 
 120. 
 Fetch (of thing sold),fiv^£(Tx<» 
 
 (?), 87.^ 
 Fight, fidxpftai (?), 73. 
 
 again si, ngog tiva, 319 
 
 on horseback, «gj* Ttt- 
 
 ^roof, 243. 
 
 with; fAaxofJiai t dat. 
 
 183. 
 
 Find, evetffxw, 87; to be 
 yb?^7irf guilty, dXmvaifWith 
 gen. 73. 
 
 1 For conjug. of clStvat, see p. 36, note ». 
 X For conjug. see 73. 
 
210 
 
 INDEX I, 
 
 ^]- 
 
 ^ 
 
 i 
 
 Find a man at home, erdov 
 
 xaraXa^tiv, 125. 
 fault with, imttfidoo, 
 
 dat. 183. 
 
 out, EVQiaxeiv (?). 
 
 Fire, nig to, 41. 
 
 First^ (the— of all), «V rots 
 
 ngmros. Sec 259. 
 Fit to govern, cigxixog, gen, 
 Five-and-five, ava nkvie. 
 Fix, nriyvvfAiy 193. 
 
 : am fixed, ninriya, 
 
 perf. 2. 
 Flatter, xoXrtxci'w, 87. 
 Flatterer, xoAaJ, 87. 
 Flesh, xoiag, to, (G. aog. cog,) 
 
 144. 
 Flog, fiaatlyocoy 235. 
 Flow, ^Eco (?), 132. 
 with a full or strong 
 
 stream. See 132. 
 Fly from, (pcvyco, 35. 
 for refuge, xataqssvyoi, 
 
 41. 
 • — to the assistance of, 
 
 ^ori&m, dat, 121. 
 Follow, sno^ai, dat, 1S3. 
 Folly, (jLfOQia, 156. 
 Fond of honour, qnXotjuog, 
 
 214. 
 
 319. 
 
 Food (for man), aXtog, 259. 
 
 FjOOt, novg, frodog^ 6, 20. 
 
 For (=in behalf of), ngo, 
 243. 
 
 For, ydg, 41 ; for one's inte- 
 rest, 319. 
 
 — such a man as me at 
 
 least, 01^ y« t'fioi, 279, 
 
 note t. 
 For the sake of, Evexa gen, 
 
 214. ^dgiv gen. 250. 
 For my sake, xagiv ifi^r, 250. 
 
 praise, eV «;ratVQ), 288. 
 
 the present at least, to 
 
 y« vvv shatj 206. 
 this cause or reason, 
 
 ix ravTTjg jtjg aiiiag, ix tov- 
 
 Tov, 224. 
 
 your years, ngog to, h^, 
 
 1 1 o, 
 
 a long time, gen, xqovov 
 
 cvxvov, noXl^v Vfifowv, 
 
 162*. c. 
 ForcejX^aTOjr, T(f, 41. 
 Forefather, ngoyovog, 156. 
 Foresee, nQoyiyvcoaxEiv, See 
 
 235. 
 Forget, imXav&dvofiai, (?) 
 
 gen. 156. 
 Form an alliance, avfAfiaxov 
 
 noiEiaOai jiva, 188 (2). 
 Former, 6 nqlv, 156 (27). 
 Formerly, ndXai, 28. 
 Forth from, ix, ik, gen. 
 Fortify, tEixZoi, 222. 
 Fortune, rvxri, 92. 
 Forwardness, to nQoOviiOPf 
 
 adj. 60. 
 Fountain, nTjy^, 132. 
 Fourth, Tttagjog, 52. 
 Fowl. See 15, note g. 
 Free, iXEv&Egog, 150. 
 
 from, a;raXilaTTO}, gen. 
 
 154. 
 
 Freedom, iXEv&Egia, 150, 
 Fiec^uently, ftoXXdmg, 8. 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 21 J 
 
 Friend, q)lXog, 20. 
 
 Fiom (after receive, learn, 
 
 bring, C07ne\ nagd, 299. 
 
 vno {gen.), 326. 
 (after hear,) ngog 
 
 {gen.), 319. 
 
 our very birth, sv&vg 
 
 ytvofiEvot, 309. 
 — fear, vno dtovg, 326. 
 - (of cause), sign of dat. 
 
 Front, 6 ;t^o(J^«i', 283*. 
 
 Full of, fiEOTog, 150. 
 
 Full speed (at), dva xgdrog, 
 
 41. 
 Future (the), to liiXXov; 235. 
 
 Gain, x€^5aiVoo, xigiog, to, 
 283*. 
 
 Gate, ;ivij/, 193. 
 
 General, atgarriyog, 52. 
 
 Gentle, ngaog (?) 138. 
 
 Geometer, yEODfihgrjg, ov, 24. 
 
 Get, xrdofiai (of what will 
 be retained as a posses- 
 sion), 87. — TvyxdvEiv with 
 ^ew. (of what is obtained 
 accidentally, by ^oorf 
 Z?icA:, &c.) 183, note b.— 
 evgiaxEO&ai (to get posses- 
 sion of an object sought 
 for). 
 
 — fvyxdvoD, gen. 183, note 
 
 b. EVQl6X0[Aat, 188. 
 
 — hold of, xgatico, 1 63. 
 
 — off, dnaXXdrraj ix or dno, 
 154. 
 
 Get (teeth, (fee.) g)voi, 214. 
 
 — taught, dtddoxofiai, 188. 
 
 Get tl.e better of, nEgiyiyvoftcu 
 {gen.), 87. nEgiEifn {gen.), 
 156.^ 
 
 Gift, dmgov, 175. 
 
 Give, didoifjit, 41. 
 
 — one trouble ; novov or 
 ngdyfiata jiagix^^^f ^14. 
 
 — orders, imtdttmj 359. 
 
 — a share of, fiEzadidoDHi, 
 
 175. 
 
 some of, fisraSidmfii, 
 
 175. 
 
 a taste of, ysvEiv, ace. of 
 
 pers., ^cn. of thing, 
 to taste, yEvm {gen. of 
 
 thing), 150. 
 Given : to be — , doziog, 144. 
 Gladly, ^diojg. 
 Go, sgxofiai (?), 112. 
 
 — away, dnEifii (= will go 
 away. See 65, note g). 
 — aTregxofiai, 112. 
 
 — in to, EiaigxoiioLi, nagd 
 \\\.d, 
 
 — into, eiasgxofiait 112. 
 
 — on an expedition, arga* 
 
 JEVCOy 65. 
 
 — and do a thing, 350 (A)k 
 349. 
 
 God, Qsog, 
 
 Gold, XQvoog, 6, as a sum ot 
 gold money, xQvaiov, 35. 
 Golden, xgvoEog, ovg, 144. 
 Good, dya&og—diisiraiv, dgts 
 
 tog, 35. 
 Govern, %a) (5*ew.), 150. 
 Government, dgxri* 1^2. 
 Gratify, x«^*tof<a«i 273. 
 Great, fi«yaff (?). 
 
212 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 
 Greater, greatest, fieitwr, 
 fiiy^aios^ 46. 
 
 Greatly (with injure, bene- 
 fit, &c.), n^ya. 
 
 =fcir, noli, 156. 
 
 Greece, 'EXXdg, ddos, jJ, 144. 
 
 Greek, "EXXrjv, rivog, 144. 
 
 Grudge, qi&ovsooy gen. of ob- 
 ject, rfa^. of pers. 183. 
 
 Guard, gjrAarrw, 190. e. 
 
 against, (^vXcLtnaOai, 
 
 2CC. 190. 
 Guard, 
 Guardian 
 
 Have an opportunity; when 
 or though you have, &c. 
 naQov, 250. 
 
 a narrow escape, TruQa 
 
 fiixQov iX&sTv, 299. 
 
 nuQ oXlyof 
 
 diaq}svyeiv, 299. 
 
 any regard for, x//^o 
 
 > (fvXa^ (x). 
 
 H.— 
 
 Habit: in the—of perform- 
 ing, 7TQaxTix6g,genM9. a. 
 
 Hair, fgil rgixog, ^, 175. 
 
 Half, i^fiiavg. See 59. 
 
 Hand, xeiQ, ^, (?) 20. 
 
 Hang oneself, andyxonai, 
 188, (1). 
 
 Happen, Tvyxdv(o,'\ 242. h. 
 
 Happened: what had — ^rh 
 ysyovog. 
 
 Happy, evduifzm; ovog, 20. 
 
 Harass, novow or nQayfiara 
 TTaQsxsiVj 214. 
 
 Hard, x^^smg, 65, 214. 
 
 Hare, Xayoig, See 15. 
 
 Harm : come to some — , 
 
 fiai, gen. 156. 
 
 confidence in, mnmifa, 
 193. 
 
 — done supper, dno detrr 
 vov ysrsaOat, 243. 
 
 — in one's hand, dta x^i 
 Qog Exstv, 269. 
 
 — lost, atsQtco, 168*. 
 no fear of, eanQtm, ace. 
 
 138. 
 
 — slain a man with one's 
 own hand, avforeiQ thai, 
 299 
 
 the tooth ache (= suf 
 
 fer pain in my teeth), 
 
 aXyta jovg odovtag. See 
 
 19*. b. 
 Head, xeqjaX^, 20. 
 Hear, dxovm, F. M. 92.— on 
 
 its government, see 148. 
 Hearing: there is nothing 
 
 like — , ovdev olop dxovaai 
 
 278. 
 , Heavy, paQvg, 183. 
 
 fiJ^^lT^' ^^^^^^^ ^°^^' Heavy-armed soldier, 6nXi\ 
 
 Ttjg^ 154. 
 
 Hen, oqvtg. See 15, note g. 
 
 thing). 
 Haste, 67Tovdi^y 183. 
 Have, Ijfoj. See 15, note i. 
 
 — a child taught, didda 
 
 xofiai, 125, t. 
 
 Henceforth, to dno rovde, 
 34./. 
 
 Hercules, *HQaxXijg, 183. 
 
 t For conjog. o^^vxavu, see 183. 
 
 INDEX 1. 
 
 213 
 
 Here, if&dde, 28. 
 Hide, dogd, 35. 
 
 yQVTTTOi, anoxQvmoij 
 
 125. 
 Hill, Xoqjog, 288. 
 Hinder, xoiXvto, dnoxtoXvoij 
 
 293. 
 Hive, fita&ovfiai, 188. 
 Hit (a mark), rvyxdvo), 183, 
 
 note b. 
 Hold a magistracy or office, 
 
 CLQX^iV OLQXfiV^ 132. 
 
 cheap, 6Xiy(x)QE(o {gen.) 
 
 156. 
 
 — my tongue about, 
 (TKOTrdoa, F. M. 87. 
 
 (without ace). 
 
 <y,yao3, F. M. 270. 
 Home : at — , evdovy 125. 
 to find a man at — , 
 
 svdov xazaXa^eiVf 125. 
 Honey, fisXi, ttog, to, 132. 
 Honorable, xaXog^ 32. 
 Flonour, tj]u??, 150. 
 Hope, iXni^to, 87. 
 Hoplite, onXltng, 154. 
 Horn, xiqag, rop (?) 35. 
 Hor?e, iTinog, 15. 
 
 soldier, InnEvg, 96. 
 
 House, olxog, 41. 
 How much, noGov, 87. 
 Hunting, &^Qa, 154. 
 Hurt, ^Xdnto), 82. 
 
 I at least, eywyt, 1^. 
 I for my part, iycoye, 156. 
 Idle, %oV, 299. 
 
 If any body has ... it is you, 
 ei 7tg xal dXXog {sxstg, &c.) 
 174. d, 
 
 — it is agreeable to you, a 
 Goi ^ovXof*sv(p iotij 206. 
 
 — it should appear that I. . . 
 iav cpaivcofjiaif &c. with 
 partic. 239, note c. 
 
 — you are willing, ei aoi 
 ^ovXofisv(p iaii, 206. 
 
 Ill, xaxojgf 8. 
 
 — adj.= weak)jda&£VTig,3l9. 
 Imitate, fnfiioijiai. 
 Immediately, sv&vg, 309. — 
 
 how to translate it by 
 
 (p&dacig, &c., see 242. /. 
 on his arrival, 
 
 ev&vg ijxojv, 309. 
 Immortal, d&dvatog, 125. 
 Impiety, dat^sia, 156. 
 Impious, dvooiogf 299. dae- 
 
 ^^V,156. 
 Impossible, ddvvaTog, 65. 
 Impudence, dvaideiay 87. 
 Impunity: with — , x^^Q^* 
 
 (rejoicing). 
 In addition to, lm{dat.) 288. 
 
 TiQog rovToig, 319. 
 
 — (in answer to where 7) eV, 
 da^259. 
 
 — (a man's) power, miwith 
 dat. of the person, 65. 
 
 — (after to conquer)^ omit- 
 ted, 131. e. 
 
 — all respects, ndvra^ 134 
 xata ndvta, 274. 
 
 — an uncommon degree, 
 ^laqiiqovttag, 235. 
 
 ■* 
 
 t For conjsi^ of rtiyxdvw, fee 183. 
 
 -7 
 
zu 
 
 INOBX I. 
 
 \0> 
 
 m 
 
 Inbehalfof, ;reo,243. 
 
 — comparison of, ngog, 31.9. 
 
 — (= in doors), tvdovj 125. 
 
 — preference to, arxt, 214. 
 
 — proportion to, ycajd (acc.)^ 
 274. 
 
 — reality, r^ orti, 65. 
 
 — reference to, ciV, 259. 
 fTQog, ace. 319. 
 
 — (space of time), avd, 259. 
 
 — the time of, ini with gen 
 65. 
 
 habit of doing, ;i^ax- 
 
 Tixoff, 150. 
 
 - world, who ? tig nors, 
 
 eari ngog 
 {tivos)) 319. 
 
 150. 
 Incur a danger, mvSvvevsiv 
 
 xifdvvov, 132. 
 
 danger, xivdvv£veiv,131. 
 
 Indeed, jm«V, 38, note f. 
 Infinitely many, fiVQioi, 228. 
 Infirmity, da&svsia, 319. 
 Inflict damage on, xuxovq- 
 
 7«c», 222. 
 Injure = AMr/, ^XaWw, 82. 
 
 ddixsojy 138. 
 Injury ; do an — to, ^Xdntoi. 
 Injury: to commit an — , 
 
 ddixEiv ddixiapj 138. 
 Injustice, ddixia, 82. to don- 
 
 to, ddixtto, 138. W^ 
 
 Insolence, v^gig, ij, ^^ ^ 
 Insolent person, v^qiariqg. 
 Instead of, dvti, 214. 
 Insult, v^QiXoa, ace. vBoig, i}, 
 
 138. 
 Interest for a man's — to be 
 
 translated hy ngog, with 
 
 the gen, ofpersoUj 319. 
 
 Intermediate, fitra^v, 26. 
 Into, «V, ace. 
 Intoxication; /4«^»/, 326. 
 Is a good ] 
 thing for, 
 
 — advantage- 
 ous to, 
 
 — character- 
 istic of, 
 
 — consistent 
 with, 
 
 — like, 
 
 — enough, or sufficient for, 
 dgxEi, 175. 
 
 — to be, fiiXXet eaea&cu, 
 283. h, 
 
 — of a character to, iaup 
 olog, 283. b. 
 
 It being disgraceful, aiargop 
 or, 250. 
 
 — being evident, dqXop or, 
 250. 
 
 — being fit, ngoaTjxop, 250. 
 
 — being impossible, ddvpa- 
 10V 6v, 250. 
 
 — being incumbent, ngoaT^- 
 xov, 250. 
 
 — being plain, dJjXov o»','250. 
 
 — being possible, dvvatov 
 oy,^0, 
 
 nds on you, ip ad 
 
 — is allowed {licet\ t^eau, 
 112. 
 
 — is expedient, avftqiigtt^ 
 dat. 228. 
 
 — is necessary, arayxij 
 {omitting the verb), 65. 
 
 — is not a thing that «very 
 
 niDBX I. 
 
 215 
 
 body can do, ov namog 
 
 icti, 158. 
 It is not every body that 
 
 can, 163, 283. 
 —is possible, olopTe €(TTt,283. 
 
 — is profitable, avfjKpigei, 
 dat., 228, ^ 
 
 — is right, og&mg l^fi, 222. 
 ^ is right that, dixaiov icti, 
 
 358. a, 
 
 — IS the nature of, nicpvxa, 
 Bcpvv, 214. ' 
 
 — is the part of, ecu (gen.), 
 U2r,h. 
 
 Jaw, yyav^Off, ^, 20. 
 
 Journey (v.), nogevofjiai, 24. 
 6t6XXofiai{l), 188 (1). 
 
 Judge, xgitrig (general term), 
 8. — dixaati^g (only of a 
 judge in the strict sense), 
 239, X : {verb) xgivoa, 92. 
 
 Jupiter, Zevg, Jiog, <fcc. voc. 
 Zcv, 193. 
 
 Just, dixaiog, 87. 
 
 Just as he was, ^neg or (oa- 
 
 71 fg e7x^^* ^^^* 
 
 Keep company withr.o/it- 
 
 Xto), dat. 183. 
 (for one's self), aigea- 
 
 {^ai, 188. ^ 
 Kill, a;roxT£iVa) (?), 82. 
 King, ^aaiXevg, 24. 
 Knee, yopv, yopar, to, 20. 
 Knock out, ixxoTxtm (aor 2 
 
 pass.), 132. 
 
 Know, oJda (of positive 
 knowledge), 73. — yiyvma* 
 x<o (seek to become ac- 
 quainted with), aor. ty. 
 vmp, know (from ac- 
 quaintance with it) : 
 (with par tic, 229.) 
 
 {yiyvoaaxa)), 235. 
 
 how, imarafiai (?), 
 
 293. 
 
 : I don't — , ovx sxot, or 
 
 ovx olda, 67. 
 
 Labour, novog, (v. nopiao^ 
 
 154. 
 Laid myself down, xarcxXi- 
 
 Q^p, 19G. 
 Lamb, dfipog, 41. 
 Large, fityag. 
 (At) last, TO TsXevtaiOP, 34* 
 
 Laugh, ysXdoo, uaofiai, 1 
 
 222. ^ If. 
 
 at, xarayeXdoD, j M. 
 
 278. J 
 
 Laughter, ytXag, (orog, 278. 
 Law, pofiog, 132. 
 Lawful, Osfiig, {=fas)j 65. 
 
 oaiog, dixaiog, 293. 
 Lay down, xajati&rnii, 163. 
 
 eggs, TtxTco(?), 15. 
 
 to the charge of, xatri 
 
 yogicOf 156. 
 
 waste, Tt'fivm (?), 46. 
 
 Lazy, dgyog, 299. 
 
 Lead, ayoj, 341. 
 
 Lead (of a road), q)iQ», 73 
 
 Leaf, qivXXop, 214. 
 
 ♦i 
 
 fii 
 
216 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 W>' 
 
 ,1 I 
 
 i f: 
 
 Leap, aXXofiai, 273. 
 Learn, (with partic.) nav- 
 
 ^tttw (?), 239. 
 Leather bottle, aaxog, 15. 
 Leave off, X/jo), gen., 154. 
 
 fiuvoftat, 188 (1). 
 Leisure, axoXi^, 112. 
 Let for hire, fnaOoa), 188. 
 Liberty, iXsvOegia, 150. 
 Lie down, xataHXivofiut (xa- 
 
 jeMOriv), 190. 
 Life, ^log, 28. by ivjin., to 
 
 ^v, 150. 
 Lift up, aiQstv, 188 (2). 
 Like a dog, xwog^ dixriv, 
 
 250^. 
 
 ofiotogy {dat.)j 183. 
 
 ayand(xi^ 52. 
 
 to do it = do it gladly 
 
 {ifimg). 
 , should like to. . . ij^e- 
 
 (og aPy 87. 
 , should extremely like 
 
 to . . . r^diar av, 87. 
 Likely, alxog ineiit, partX 
 
 331. 
 Lily, xQivov (?), 144. 
 Little (a little), oXiym, 168*. 
 Live, fao), 131. G^. note b. 
 (= spend one's life), 
 
 SiaTsXmy 60. 
 
 about the same time, 
 
 xaia lov avtov ^qovov ys- 
 
 via&aiy 183. 
 Long {o{time)j ovxvogy 163. 
 
 fiaxQogt 214. 
 ago, ndXatf 28. 
 
 Loss : to be at a—, af99QBe\ 
 
 Love, g:tXeto (of /ore arising 
 froni regard, and the per- 
 ception of good and ami- 
 able qualities), 20.— aya- 
 ndo) (stronger: implying 
 affection arising from the 
 heart, <kc.), 52.~€^«ojt 
 (of the passion of love), 
 274. 
 
 Lover of self, (piXavTog, 222. 
 
 Lower, 6 xdro} {art, with 
 adv.) 
 
 M. ^ l^4A 
 
 Madness, fiavia, 24. 
 Magistracy, dgxi 132. 
 Maiden, xoqjj, 16. 
 Maintain, rgscpm (?), 190. 
 Make to cease, fiavm, gen. 
 
 of that from which, 154. 
 to disappear, dcpan^m 
 
 206. 
 a great point of, ne^^ 
 
 TToXXov TTomaOai or ^ysla 
 
 {>at, 283. 
 progress, frnorcontoo, 
 
 274. 
 
 immense (or aston- 
 ishing) progress, ^avfiaa- 
 tov 060V TZQoxcoQeTVf 273. c. 
 self-interest the object 
 
 of one's Hfe, ngog rb avfi 
 (ffQov f jy, 228. 
 
 for one's interest, elyca 
 
 TtQog (gen.) J 319. 
 
 t Atrial generally of sensual love, but Ipaadai Tvpnvvi6o( common. 
 
 f 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 211 
 
 Male, uQQtiv, 150. 
 Man, 46. (Obs.) 
 : am not a man, 283, 
 
 note a. 
 Manage, Tr^arro), 8. 
 Many, noXvg, 46. the many, 
 
 oi TToXXoif 46. 
 times as many or 
 
 much, noXXanXdaioi {ai, a), 
 
 175. 
 numerous, ;ioX- 
 
 XanXdaiot, 175. 
 March, iXavvta (?), noQevo- 
 
 fiaif 24. 
 of a single soldier, 
 
 elfii (?), 96. ^ 
 r*Iare, innog, ^, 15. 
 Mark, oxonog, 183, b. 
 Market-place, ayo^a, 154. 
 Master, deanotijg, 222. 
 8tSd(fxaXog (= teach- 
 er), 168. 
 
 (v.) xgatsco, {gen.), 
 
 Miserable, a&Xiog, 273. 
 
 Misfortune, dvanqayia, 125. 
 
 Miss, afiaQTdp(Oy {gen.), 154. 
 
 Moderate (in desires^ &c.) 
 atoqjQoyv, 125, u. 
 
 Moderation, ) acocpgoavvr^y 
 
 Modesty, ) 125, u. 
 
 Molest, novov or nqdyiiata 
 naQtxsiVf 214. 
 
 Money, xQW^^^* 1^5. 
 
 Month, fi^v, 0, 138. 
 
 More than (»= beyond), fia- 
 nce (ace), 299. 
 
 — — than, fioiXXov — 5, 
 
 41. 
 
 than any other single 
 person, 174. e. 
 
 enough, nsgnia 
 
 156. 
 
 May (one — ), i^eari, 222. 
 {though or when I 
 
 may), nagoPy 250. 
 Meet, ivTvyxdp(o, dat. 183. 
 Might (one—), ^J^r, 222. 
 {when or though I, 
 
 (fee. might,) nagov, 250. 
 Mild, Tigaog (?), 138. ^ 
 Milk, yaXrt, ydXaxit to, 132. 
 Mina, /ui^a, 82. 
 Mind (as the seat of the 
 
 passions), ^vfiog, 121. 
 Mine, e^oV, 20. 
 Minerva, 'A&rjpa, 341. 
 Misdeed, xaxovgytjfia, to,222. 
 
 10 
 
 imp dgxovPToop, 174, f. 
 could have been 
 
 expected, (fee, 168. d. 
 More (after a numeral,) «*«, 
 
 193. 
 Morning : early in the — , 
 
 ftgmtf 193. 
 Morrow (the), jj avgiov, 26. 
 Mortal, ^yj/ToV, 125. 
 Most, TzXeiaTotf 175. 
 
 of all, fidXtota ndptaoVf 
 
 309. 
 his time, tk noXXd^ 
 
 137. 
 Most men, or people, oi noX- 
 
 lot, 46. 
 Mostly, ra noXXd, 137, 282. 
 Mother, fi^iTjg (?), 20. 
 Move, xTpEoa, 28. 
 Mourn for, tiXXea^ai ((tcc^ 
 
 188(1). 
 
 
 «4 
 
218 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 
 u 
 
 !| 
 
 i}. 
 
 I. 
 
 Much, noXvg, 46. 
 
 (with comj)ar.)j noX- 
 
 X^, 168*. 
 Multitude (the), oi noXXoi, 
 
 46. 
 Murder (to be tried for), 
 
 (fEvyeip gjoVov, 35. 
 Murderer (the actual — ), 
 
 aifToxeiQ, 299. 
 Must (= ought), dti, 60. 
 , how translated by 
 
 verbals in rtog, 1 14. 
 My, f>oV, 20. 
 
 Name (by name), oio/ia, to, 
 
 138. 137. a. 
 Named : to be — after, orofta 
 
 il^iv trri 7ivog, 288. 
 Nation, e&rogy to, 65. 
 Natural. See 331. 
 Nature: it is the— of, <fec., 
 
 213. a. 
 Near, mXag^ 28. nXrialov, 
 
 309. tVy^'^'j ^^'** 15^- 
 Nearly, oP./yoi; ^fir or oXlyov 
 
 a lone J 283*. 
 related to, iyyviaia 
 
 thai ysvovSy 149, e. 
 Necessary : it is — , umyxrj, 
 
 65. 
 , it would be — to, 
 
 (verbal in T«W), 114. 
 
 Necessity, Xyay'*^^ ^^• 
 Ne^, if t)iere is any, idv n 
 
 ^Vt or Mil dtoif 92. 
 
 NeighJ^r, 6 nXijaiov, 28. 
 
 Ne^t||Br — nor, ovte — ovti, 
 
 T£ — fi^re, 112. 
 
 t 
 
 01^ 
 
 Neither — nor yet, oJt« 
 
 de, fi^ie — firide, 112. 
 Neptune, Iloaeidmv, oivog (?), 
 
 341. 
 Nevertheless, o/iw?, 288. 
 Next, 6 ixofterog, geti, 149. 
 
 day, ^ avQioy, 26. on 
 
 the — , tJ vcTegaiat 183. 
 
 Nightfall, about, r^o yrxTa, 
 326. 
 
 Nightingale, atjdc6v{l), 341. 
 
 No, by Jupiter, &c., /la J/a, 
 341. 
 
 — longer, ovxtn^ fitjxtu, 
 112. 
 
 Nobody, ovdsig, ftrjdstg, 112. 
 Nose, ^(V, Qivog, rj, 35. 
 Nostril, 35. 
 Not, 107-111. 
 Not a single person, ovdi 
 elg^ firids eigy 112. 
 
 — at all, ovdtv (Tt), fiTjlitp 
 (tO, 150. 
 
 — even, ovdf\ 82. ^jy5/, 112. 
 
 — only — but also, ovx on 
 — aXXa xai, 82. 
 
 — yet, 01/770), 214. 
 Nourish, tQscfco, 190. 
 Now, fvv, 28. (= already) 
 
 l^dtj, 65. 
 
 O. 
 
 O Athenians, cJ ai'5(>6i; 1^0^. 
 
 fau)!. 
 Obey, Tiei&scfOaif dat. 120. 
 Obtain, rv/j^aVca, ^'cn., 183, 
 
 note b. 
 Occasion : if or when th'^re 
 
 ^1^ 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 219 
 
 is any — , Idf ti 5/^/, or et 
 
 ri d£0(, 92. 
 Of {themselvesj myself, 
 
 <fcc.), d(f iavrmvj 243. 
 Of old, (as acy.) P 6 TrdXai, 
 
 - times. 
 
 26. 
 
 Of those days, 6 Tore, 26. 
 Offer, nciQijoi), 214. 
 
 for sale, TKaXtco, 86*. c. 
 
 Offices : do kind — to. See 
 
 Do. 
 Often, noXldxigy 8. 
 Ointment, fivgov, 1.50. 
 Old, ot ndXcUy 26. 
 On account of, did (ace), 
 
 269. mxa, (^^-en.), 214. 
 
 — an understanding that, 
 Im TO), 288. 
 
 • - condition that, icp 4: 267. 
 Q>T«, 2^8. 
 
 — condition of being . . . , 
 im TcjJ tlvai, &c. 
 
 — - horseback, icp Innov or 
 iTimpy 288. 
 
 — (space or time), dvd, 259. 
 
 — the contrary, 137. d. 
 
 — the father's side, ngog 
 naTQogy 319. 
 
 the next day, tJ vart- 
 QuifCf 183. 
 
 — the plea that, cog o?to)^, 
 86*. e. 
 
 — your account, diet as, 
 269. ^ 
 
 Once a/za^, 341. 
 One fig {fJiiUy tv)y 87. 
 One = a persofi, rig. 
 may, i^fcTTi, 222. 
 
 — might, fj^f, 222. 
 
 One more, iu slg, 193. 
 who has never tasted, 
 
 &c., dyevazog, 150, 
 who has slain another 
 
 with his own hand, alio- 
 
 XsiQi 29. 
 One's neighbour, 6 nXtiaiov, 
 
 28. 
 
 own things, ia eavrov 
 
 Only, fiovov. 
 
 Open, dvoiyaay dreq)xa, Perf 1. 
 stand — , driqiya. 
 
 Perf 2.^ 
 Openly, djib niv Trgocrarovg, 
 
 243. 
 Or, (in double questions), ^, 
 
 after nozegov^ 328. 
 Or both, 5 dfjicpoTsga, 345. 
 Order, x£^ei;oD, (the weakest 
 
 word = bid^ tell,) 112.— 
 
 tnizdtKa, 
 rdaaoi, 96. iniTdtrco 
 
 359. zd'^igj 96. 
 
 (in good), evrdHzoag 
 
 96. 
 Other (the — party), ol htgoi, 
 
 46. 
 Others (the), ol aXXoi, 46. 
 Ought, dsT, xgn (?), 60, 92 
 
 117. 
 : what we — , za di- 
 
 orzttf a XQVy 2^^* 
 Ours, ^utzegogj 24. 
 Out of, £x, fj, gen. 224. t|(», 
 
 309. v;io, 326. 
 the way, f^nodtov^ 
 
 293. 
 Outside, tj« 125 
 
 J, 
 li 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
220 
 
 INDEX X. 
 
 Outside: the people outside, 
 
 Outward (things), t« ejoi, 
 
 125. 
 Overcome, ntqiylyvoiiaiy 
 
 (gen.), 156. 
 Overlook, imatonsoa, 206. 
 Own, to be translated by 
 
 gen, mvtov^avTov.{}avtmv, 
 
 (fcc.) 
 
 P. 
 
 Pain (v.), Xi)ni(a, 41. 
 Pained , to be — , aXyi(Oy 20. 
 Parent, yovtvg, 121. 
 Part (the greater), 59. c, and 
 
 58. 
 (it is the), «(jTi, with 
 
 gen, 163. 
 Passion (anger), dviiog, 121. 
 Passions (the), nd&ia, ^, 150. 
 Pay, (n.), fua&og, 87.^ 
 attention to, top vovv 
 
 7toQ(jixs(v, or nQoaexeiv, dat, 
 
 331. 
 close attention to, nQog 
 
 totg ngdyiiaai ytyveaOai, 
 
 319. 
 Peace, elgrifTj, 214. 
 Peacock, ramg, 341. 
 Peloponnesus, UeXonovvJi' 
 
 aog, ri, 60. ^ 
 
 People, 24; = persons (o* 
 
 — ), see 29, z. 
 Perceive, ah&dvoficu, (?), 
 
 190,239. 
 Perform a service, inQTiBiia), 
 
 52. 
 Perfume, ^y^or, 150. 
 
 Perish, aft'oXXvfiM, 193, »» 
 Permit, eaw (augm. ?), 12t 
 Persian, niQarjgy ov, 24. 
 Person, aoifia, 138. 
 Persuade, nsi^cu {ace), 12Q 
 Philip, 0iXin7tog, 24. 
 Philosopher, g)t>lo(yo()poff, 15. 
 Physician, lajgog, 154. 
 Piety, evai^staf 156. 
 Pious, evae^i^g, 1 56. 
 
 Pitcher, ^v^C"' 1^^* 
 
 Pity (v.), 150 ; ^(phrase) 269, 
 
 oiHtsigm, di oixtov f/ctf. 
 Place guards, xaratTTiJdacT- 
 
 ^ai cpvXanag, 188 (2). 
 Place on, imriOrjfity dat. 144. 
 Plea. See 86*. Examp. c. 
 Pleasant, tidvg, 214. 
 Please, a^ccrxo), dat, 331. 
 : what I — , a not do- 
 
 xa, 96. 
 
 Pleasure, to take, i^Sofiut. 
 
 Plot against, tm^ovXtvio, dat. 
 183. 
 
 Pluck, xiXXEify 188 (1). 
 
 Plunder, SiaQ7id^o},fut. mid, 
 (sometimes dam, B.), (gen- 
 eral term plujider, rob,) 
 144.— Xiyifo/ia* (make 
 6oo^^),235. 
 
 Poet, notritijg, 24. 
 
 Possess, xfixTjyfta/, 87. Fut 7 
 iSee 199. 
 
 Possession, ntqfia, to, 87. 
 
 Possible, dvvatog, 65. 
 
 # > 
 
 283. a. 
 
 84. 283. a. 
 
 It is, o«oi' T« fiijr^, 
 (it is net), ovn ^J-rir, 
 
 T^ 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 2^ 
 
 Pot. ^vT^tt, 193. 
 
 Power: in the — of, im, with 
 dat of person, 65. 
 
 Powerful, dwatog, 168*. 
 
 Practise, daxtot, (general 
 term) 121. — fieXerda), (re- 
 fers to the carefulness 
 with which the thing is 
 practised,) 163. 
 
 Praise, eTiaivea), F. M., 60. 
 
 Praiseworthy, £;ia(y«ToV, 60. 
 
 Pmy don't do this, ov fij 
 with fut. 287*. e. 
 
 Preference : in — of, dvti 
 (gen.), 2U. 
 
 Present, naQcov, partic. 
 
 Present circumstances, con- 
 dition, (fcc, ta naqovTU, 
 52. See 293*. ^ 
 
 , as adj, vvv, 26. 
 
 Prevent, ifinodav ehai fu^, or 
 firj ov, {with itifin,) xatXvoj, 
 dnoxaiXvoi, See 293*. 
 
 Procure, evgiaxofiai, 188 (2). 
 
 Produce (laughter), noiioo. 
 
 Production, egyov, 121. 
 
 Pronoimce happv, evdatfiori- 
 Cw, 150. 
 
 Property : — generally omit- 
 ted, the art, being put in 
 neut, pL See Diff. 10. 
 
 Prosecute, dioixeiv, 35. 
 
 Prosecuted (to be), qjtvynv, 
 35. 
 
 Prosper, ^vri^f m, 92. 
 
 Protect myself, duvvonat^ 
 222 
 
 Provide, nagaaxivdl^m^ 188 
 
 (2). 
 for one's safety, e/- 
 
 icOai a(OTt]giag, 150. 
 
 Prudent, amcpgmv (one whose 
 thoughtfulness and sound 
 sense has become a habit), 
 125, u. — qjgovifiog (one who 
 pai/s attention to his con- 
 duct and character), 144.t 
 
 Punish, xoXaCto, F. M., 121. 
 
 Punished (to be), dUriv dido- 
 fai, or dovvai, gen. of 
 thing, dat. of person by 
 whom, 228. 
 
 Pupil, fia&ijti^g, 168*. 
 
 Purchase, dyogd^co, 163. 
 
 Pursue, di(6x(o {fut, mid. 
 best), 35. 
 
 Put forth (naturally), (pvm, 
 214. 
 
 oflf, ixdva, 125. 
 
 on, ivdvoa, 125. 
 
 to death, dnoxTHvto (?), 
 
 82. 
 
 : to — a man over a riv- 
 er, ntgaiovv {tiva), 188. 
 
 a. 
 
 Quick, taxvg, 35. 
 Quickly, rap, 35. 
 {partic), 242, f. 
 
 R. 
 
 Race, yivog, to, 100. 
 Rail at, Xoidogsofiat, dative 
 183. 
 
 f ^pdytjiov ill ycvcadai riv uQ^Xovra ou<^va latadaif (CjTTOp. lit. 1, 10). 
 
 t 
 
 ^-^^L.^^ 
 
222 
 
 INDEX i. 
 
 Raise a war, lytiQuv n6X((iovy 
 
 193. 
 Rank, tu^ig, rj, 96. 
 Rascal, xaxovQyogj 222. 
 Rather tliaii, fiaXXov /*, 191. 
 
 p. 
 Ravage, r/firw (?); 46. 
 Ready, hol^ogt 65. 
 Reality (in), zw oirt, 65. 
 Really, tqJ orn, 65. 
 Rebuke, inmndoiy dat. 183. 
 Receive, ti;7x«»'w, 183, b. Xa.- 
 
 (3a>, 190. 1 ). bkio^at, 190. 3). 
 Reconcile, ^(a^i;«y, 190. 
 Reconciled: to be — to each 
 
 other, haXv^dx^ai ^zQog 
 
 {acc.l 190. 
 Rejoice, ijdofjiai, (refers to the 
 
 fueling of delight; to its 
 
 sensual gratification), 20. 
 
 — X^tQOif (general term), 
 
 239. 
 Relations, nQoa^xovTsgy 283. 
 Remain, with, naqafitKOf 
 
 222. 
 Remarkably, diaqseQovimgy 
 
 235. 
 Remember, fituvrjfiaitt gen. 
 
 156, 239. 
 Repel, afiVfOfiui (ace), 222. 
 Repent, fisrafielei fioi, 239. 
 Reputation, aj/co/ia, to, 144. 
 Require, see Want. 
 Requite, afAvvoiiai{acc.\ 222. 
 Rest (of the), 6 allogy 46. 
 Restore an exile, nardyojy 
 
 331. 
 
 Restrain by punishment, 
 
 xoXttTw, F. M., 120. 
 Return from banishment, 
 
 yazFQXo^ai, xdrtifn, 269*. 
 Return like for like, toTs 
 
 ofioioig dfivvsa&(ti, 222. 
 thanks for, x^Q'^ 
 
 Eidivai {gen, of thing), 222. 
 
 See 73, note q. 
 Revenge myself, ixuvtoiiat, 
 
 acc.j 222. 
 Reverence, aideofiaty ace, 
 
 138. 
 Rhinoceros, Qivoxegcogy totog 
 
 35. 
 Rich, nXovciog. 
 Ride, ilavvsiv (?), 41. 
 on horseback, icp inn a 
 
 » » ff 
 
 Oaty 288. 
 Right, oaiogy diaaiogy 293. 
 , it is, oQOmg fx^t, 
 
 222. 
 River, norufiogy 132. 
 Road, 686gy ^, 73. 
 home, jj oiHade oSog, 
 
 331. 
 Rock, mzQay 235. 
 Roman, 'Pto^aiogy 293. 
 Rule over, «ex«>» (^^^0 
 Run, rQh'xco {SQafi), 65. 
 to the assistance of, 
 
 PoTjOtto {dat.\ 121. 
 
 away from, ano^i^' 
 
 qda'AOiy ace. 138. 
 Running, the act of, dgofiog, 
 183. 
 
 t FoTfut. see 199 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 S. 
 
 Safe, daq)aXtjgy 299. 
 Safety, dacpdXetay 193. 
 
 (from danger), da- 
 
 q^dXeiUy 299. 
 Said, elnovy 60. 
 Sail away, aTzoTzXtco (?), 1S8. 
 Sale. See Offer. 
 Same, d aviogy 41. 
 Say, &c. X/yoo {= speak, of 
 a connected speech ; also 
 ^e//). — elneip (60, c), gijy/it 
 (= say). — XaXtlv (= cAa/- 
 ter, talk: especially of 
 children who are begin- 
 ning to speak). — qidaxco 
 [=zgive out; intimating 
 that the thing is 7iot so), 
 222. 
 Science, inicTrjfirjy 293. 
 Scold, XoidoQtofiaty dat. 183. 
 Scourge, ^aauyocoy 235. 
 Scythian, 2Jxv&rjgy ov, 24. 
 Sea, ^dXa(Tatt, 154. 
 Secretly, 242. c (2) ; part. 
 
 Xa<>(6vy 241. ^ 
 Security, daqidXeia, 299. 
 See (= behold), Osdofiaiy 87. 
 — (with part.), ogdoa (?), 
 
 73, 239. 
 Seek, ^TjTtoj, 100. 
 Seems (good, videtur), doxeT, 
 
 96. 
 Self, avw, 39 (1). 
 
 love, qnXavua, 228. 
 
 — — loving, cpiXavTogy 228. 
 
 restraint, omqjQoavvrjy 
 
 125. 
 Selfish, ^iXavTog, 228. 
 
 Selfishness, g/Aavria, 228 
 
 Sell, TTcoXsoa, 87. 
 
 Send, atsXXeiVy 188, (1). 
 
 (a boy) to a master, 
 
 f(V didaaxdXov muneiVy 259, 
 for, ^sTanifjiTiofjiaiy 259 
 
 Senseless, afojyro?, 214. 
 Sensible, cfQovifiog, 140. 
 Sensual pleasures, at aaza 
 
 TO amfia rfiovaiy 274. 
 Serve, vnrjQejscOy dat. 52. 
 Service: do a — to, wgie^ioo, 
 
 ace. 
 Set about, InixBtQ^co dat. 121 
 
 — — out, TTOQSVOfittl, 24. 
 
 Severe, |5«()i;<;, 183. 
 Shameless, araf^^'^, 87. 
 Shamelessness, dvaideiay 87. 
 Shed tears, da'AQtxOy 282. 
 Sheep, oi'^, 41. 
 Ship, vavg (I), 125. 
 Should, dti (?), 60. 
 Shown, having, imdedetyfiS" 
 
 vog, 188, 3. 
 Shun = fly from, cpsvyw, 35. 
 Silence, oiconi^y 96. 
 
 Silently, (ity5» IT'^- 
 Sin, df^agrdvoo, eig or tteqI 
 (with accus.),against,\bL 
 Sing, 0^50), F. M. 168*.^ 
 
 better, xaPwAtoy a!iEiv^ 
 
 168*. 
 Single (not a single person^ 
 
 ovdl £tg: t*^8s eigy 112. 
 Slave, dovXogy 20. 
 Sleep (to), Hoifidofiai, sub, 
 
 vnvog, 132. 
 Slow, (igadvg, 175. 
 . am slow to do it =» 
 
 \ 
 
BSS 
 
 224 
 
 [yUyi^CCy 
 
 inDEZ I. 
 
 22a 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 V 
 
 will do it hy leisure^ (X^oXJ, 
 
 112. Diff. 35. 
 Slowly, oxoXIq (literally hy 
 
 leisure: see 112.) — ^qa- 
 
 dttog^ 175. 
 Smell of, 3^(0 (?), 150 
 So — as to, aais with infin.j 
 
 212. 
 
 — gieat, rtjXixovTogj 22S. 
 
 — many, toaos, zoaoads, 
 ToaovTogj 65. 
 
 — powerful, TijXmovtog, 228. 
 
 — that, wcTTc with i7ijin. or 
 indic.y 212. 
 
 — , to be, ovrtag sx^iv, 
 
 — — to say, (og snog dntiVj 144. 
 Socrates, ^flox^ariy^. See 15, 
 
 note f. 
 Soldier, aTQaTixatrigj ov, 228. 
 Solon, 26X(aVt (ovog, 183. 
 Some, scTiv oif moi^ 264. 
 others, ol fitv — oi 
 
 «/, 41. 
 Sometimes, s6tiv ozf, 264. 
 Somewhere, sativ onovj 264. 
 Son, naig (general term, 
 
 15). — vtog, (with respect 
 
 to his parents). — often 
 
 omitted, 23. b. 
 Sophroniscus, £wq^Qonaxog, 
 
 24. 
 Soul, xpvx^' 
 Spare, cfsidofiai {genitive\ 
 
 156. 
 Speak, ytfycD, 35. 
 calumniously of, lot- 
 
 doQtOfiai, dat. 183. 
 
 ill of, xax^g Isyeiv, 
 
 t^cc, 35. 
 
 Speak well of, «? Xsyeif, ace. 
 35. 
 
 the truth, aXj/^£vo), 82l 
 
 Spear, dogv, to, (?) 193. 
 Spend, avaXiaxm (?), 235. 
 Spring, saoj to, gen, r^oog 
 
 341. 
 Stadium, aiddiog, or azddiop 
 
 136. 
 Staff, ^a^dog, fly 138. 
 Stag, tXaqiogy 35. 
 Stand open, dncpya, Perf. 2 
 193. 
 
 by and see, &c., 
 
 nsQioQciix), 331, note o. 
 State, noXig (eoag), ^, 8. 
 Stay (in a town), itargt^utt 
 
 96. 
 Steal, xXtfiTO), F. M., {xtxXo- 
 
 <ya,) 73. 
 Stick, Qd^dog, rj, 183. 
 Still, Ire, 168*. 
 Stomach, yaarr^g^ tgog (?), ^, 
 
 235. 
 Stone, Xt't^Oi*, nhgog, 235. 
 Stop, {trails.) nav(o, {in- 
 trans.) navofiaij 188(1); 
 with yartic, 239. 
 Stove, xdfiTvogy 282. 
 Straight to, evOv {gen.)W£ 
 Strange, Oavunatog, 259. 
 Strangle, dndyyuv, 18S (1). 
 Stream: flows with a full 
 
 or strong — , noXvg (5a. 
 Strength, x^aro^, 41. a&ivo<j^ 
 
 TO, 319. 
 Strife, iqig, tSog, ^, 183. 
 Strike, nXjaam (used by the 
 Attics in the per/, act 
 
 and in the pass, nardaaeif 
 being used for the other 
 tenses), — jvntm, 
 Yomel says ivntoa the 
 general term for strik- 
 ing on any thing: 
 nai(o to strike a per- 
 son: to give blows 
 for correction: con- 
 nected with naXg (!). — 
 nXritt(o is rvnzm and 
 Ttaito strengthened. 
 Strip, ixdviOf 125. 
 Strong, laxvQog, 35. 
 Succour, imxovQt(o, dat. also 
 
 ace. of the thing, 239. 
 Such a man as you, 6 clog 
 
 av dv^Qt 271. 
 Suffer {=allow)y «aw, 121. 
 —ndaxo) (of suffering 
 painful things), 168*. 
 
 a thing to be done, 
 
 fiEQiOQam, 331. 
 
 from a disease, xaV^<»>t 
 
 f ooy ^ xttT apd^QConov, 1 68 
 
 Superintend, eV((yxo;r/o9,206 
 Supply to, nagix^, 214. 
 Surpass, TzsgUifii {gen.), 156 
 Surprised (am), ^aviid^coi 
 
 F. M., 8. 
 S^arprising, Oavfiaatog, 259 
 Surprisingly, ^avfiaaimg mg 
 
 273. rf. 
 Suspect, vnonrtvcoy acc- of 
 
 pers., 293*. 
 Swallow, ;j£Xi5o)V, oVo^ (?), 
 
 341. 
 
 Swear by, ofivviii, ace. {!). 
 
 351. 
 Sweet, Tidvg, 214. 
 
 T. 
 
 Table, rgdne^Uf 188. 
 Take, Xa/i^arco (?), 92. ai- 
 
 ^«>, 190. 
 
 away from, aqjaiQeoHf 
 
 183. 
 
 pain, dXyiosy 20. 
 
 punishment, dixijv dido- 
 
 fai, ^cn. of thing, dat. of 
 person by whom, 228 
 
 Suffering, nd&og, 150.^ 
 
 Sufficient: to be—, aQxeiv, 
 175. 
 
 Sufficient: more than — , 
 
 174, f. 
 Suggestion, 243. 
 Superhuman (of— size), (abi- 
 
 125. 
 
 place. See Happen. 
 
 care, qjQoviiZoit 288. 
 
 hold of, Xa^ea&at, 163. 
 
 in hand, imx^iQiO!), 
 
 dat, 121. 
 - myself off, uTtaXXdr" 
 
 rofiai, 154. ^or. 190. 4. 
 off, ixdvm, 125. 
 
 — — 7 f ^ 
 
 - pleasure in, ^doftai^ 
 
 dat. 20, 
 
 up, aiQSiv, 188 (2). 
 
 Talent, Ta^afTor, 82. 
 Talk, XaXm, 35. 
 
 10* 
 
 : t 
 
■: 
 
 
 226 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 Task, fQyov, 121. 
 
 Taste: give to—, allow 
 
 to — , ysv(o {ace. of person, 
 
 geji. of thing). 
 Tasted, one who has never, 
 
 ayevatogy with ge?i. 150. 
 , to have never,= /o 
 
 be uysvaTog (with gen.) 
 Taught, that can be — , 
 
 dtdaxTogy 293*. 
 Teach, dtddaxco (?), 125. 
 Teacher, diddaHaXog, 168*. 
 Tear, ddnQvov, 168*. 
 
 shed, — , dwAQvoD, 282. 
 
 Temper, {^vfiog, 121. 
 Temperance, coJcpQoavvjjj 
 
 125, 11. 
 Temperate, G(6qQcov, 125, u. 
 Temple, taog (vemg, Att.). 
 
 41. 
 Ten thousand, ftvgtoiy 228. 
 Terrible, dEivog, 214. 
 Thales, Oal^g (?), 183. 
 Than any other single per- 
 son, Eig dvriQ, 174. e. elg ye 
 
 dvriq 0)1', 172. 
 ever, aviog with gen. 
 
 of reciprocal pronoun, 
 
 167. 
 
 Thankful to be or feel, 
 
 XOLQiv eldtvai,^ gen. of thing, 
 
 222. 
 Thanks, to return, x«(?**' 
 
 sldhatyt genitive of thing, 
 
 222. 
 That, ixeii^og, 46. 
 -. — ^ in order that, ira, 73. 
 
 That (after verbs of tel 
 
 ling), oil, 73. 
 The — the, (with compar.)t 
 
 OffQ) TOCTOtZQ), 168*. 
 
 The one — the other, 6 fitt 
 
 — 6 dt\ 38. 
 The morrow (the next day), 
 
 rj avQtov, 26. 
 Thebans, Orj^aToi, 125. 
 Theft, TiXoni 73. 
 Then {time), tore, 92. 
 
 - (of inference), olv^ 
 
 in questions, dix, 
 
 100. 
 
 318. h. eTieira, 318. i. 
 
 {See 315.) 
 There, ixei, 28. 
 
 {3.m), TzaQfini^ ^^. 
 
 being an oj'p nluni- 
 
 ty, naqor, 250. 
 — , to be, TiaQtifti. See 
 
 91. Z^. 
 Tiierefore, ix TavTtjg zTig at- 
 
 Tta?, «x TovioVy 4,4,4,. 
 Thick, 5«oi;i?, 150. 
 Thickly planted with trees, 
 
 baavg dtvSQoov, 150. 
 Thine, o6g, 20. 
 Thing, TTQciyfitt, 8. 
 Things that are ; existing 
 
 things, T« oyra, 65. 
 Think, rofuXto, 52. orojua* 
 
 (2 sing, oiei), 87. 
 happy, evdaifiovi^tat 
 
 150. 
 Third, T()/ro?^, 52. 
 This, ovTogt ods, 46. 
 
 f For ddivat, see 73, note q. 
 
 J INDEX I. 
 
 ^ 221 
 
 This being determined, ho- 
 \av ravra, 249. c. See 
 note o. 
 
 being the case, ix tov- 
 
 tov, 224. 
 Three, jQeTg, tgia, 15. 
 Through (of space, time, 
 and means), dia (tov), 
 269. — (cause), diu {lof), 
 326. vTiOy gen. 
 (the whole coun- 
 try), am Tiuaav r/^y yTjVy 
 259. 
 Throw, QiTZTm, 235. 
 Thy, (To',-, 20. 
 Till laie in the day, fi^xQi 
 
 noQno) TJ^g l^^itQugy 144. 
 Tune, xQ<)*'og. 28. 
 
 , it is, w(;«, 65. 
 
 , in my, (fcc. fV ffwvy 
 
 65. 
 To, 288. 319. 
 
 To Sardis, Chios, &c., im 
 
 ^u()dt(0Vy im rTjg Xtoi'}288. 
 
 To speak generally, ag tnog 
 
 tiTztlvy 144. 
 Together with, avv (omit- 
 ted before airw, a'niQy (fee.), 
 345. 
 Toil, ^zo'iOi,*, 154. 
 To-morrow, avQiov, 28. 
 Too (and that — ), xul ravia, 
 
 206. 
 — great for, &c., compar- 
 ative with 5 xard before a 
 suhst.y Ji ware before in- 
 fui., 168. 
 
 . — soon (after cannot), , 
 242. e. 
 
 Tooth, odovg, G. odovtog, 6, 
 
 20. 
 Touch, antofiai, 150. 
 Towards, after */o act in* 
 
 solently,^ elg, 319. 
 
 - nqogy 319. «iv, 
 
 259. 
 
 home, in o'xovj 
 
 288. 
 Town, dcTVy TO, 96 
 Transact, TiQazTOD, 8. 
 Transgress, nana^aivco, 
 
 228. 
 Treat ill, xaxwi? ;roiai', ace. 
 
 35. 
 
 well, tvnoiHv^ acc. 35. 
 
 Treaty, anordaf, pL 228. 
 Tree, dtrdQov (?), 144. 
 Trick, T<-x»''7, 214.^ 
 Trouble, tto'i-o?, 154. 
 True, «?.]?0^fe 274. 
 
 - happiness, tj dog dlrj 
 
 d^g slSaifiOviuj 274. 
 Trust (1) (=am confident) 
 
 ;^t;70f{^a, 119, note i; 193. 
 (hare confidence in), 
 
 niarevo), with dat. only, 
 
 132. 
 Truth (the), to uXTjOtg, 274. 
 
 , dlriOEittj 274. 
 
 Try (for murder), dirnxstv 
 
 q)6vov, 35 ; (awi tried,) cpev' 
 
 ysiVy gen. 
 , TiEiQciouai (governs 
 
 gen.), 121. 
 Tunic, x/roaV, 125. 
 Turn, TQETTcoy 73. 
 Turned (am — into), ytyvoficu 
 
 (?), 15. 
 
 \ 
 
 /, 
 
J 
 
 228 
 
 INDEX V 
 
 Twice as many, dinXdam, 
 
 175. 
 Two by two, xara dvo, 274. 
 
 U. 
 
 Uncommon degree (in an), 
 
 diarpegovTcagj 23a. 
 Unconsciously, 242. c. 
 
 Uncovered, xpjXog, 235. 
 Under, v;io, 326. 
 Undergo, vnofitvco, 214. 
 Understanding, on an, hi 
 
 T^ fZyai, &c. 227, n. 
 Undertake an expedition, 
 
 noQevoftai, 24. 
 Unexpected, anQoadoHrjiogy 
 
 224. 
 
 Unexpectedly, «! «;r^o(T3ox- 
 
 iJtov, 224. 
 Unfortunate, xaxodaifiojv^ 
 
 144. 
 
 Unjust, adixog, 138. 
 Unknown to myself, 
 
 242. c. 
 Unless, aV*?' ^^^* 
 Until, axQh f^^JQh ^^^'* *^'f» 
 
 306. 
 Up {adv.) J avco, 28. avd 
 
 {prep.)i ace. 259. 
 Upper, 6 aym, 28. 
 Upper-chamber, v/rf^ftJoy, 
 
 96. 
 Upwaras, dvoa, 28. 
 U^*»». XQOLoiiai^ dat. (contr. ?) 
 
 138. 
 Used to, imperf.y 95, t. 
 Useless, fidj aiog, 20(j. 
 Utility, TO avfiqiegofy 228. 
 
 T. 
 
 Vain, fidtaiog^ 206. 
 Value, rifido^atj 163. 
 Value very highly, ngo frol^ 
 
 3lov ;rot«r(Ti^a/, 243. nsQt 
 
 noXlov noiua&ai or ^yeia- 
 
 ^a(, 282. 
 Vanished, cpQovdog, 65. 
 (A) vast number, ai'^toc, 228. 
 Very, ndrvj 214. ;rf(), 78. 
 highly, vXstaTovt 
 
 162*. 6. 
 
 many, fHQioij 228. 
 
 — well, oLQiata, 
 
 Vexed, am — at, axOojiai (?), 
 
 </a^ 20. 
 Victory, i/xjy, 132. 
 Villages, in — , xarcl xw/ia^, 
 
 274. 
 Villain, xaxovgyog^ 222. 
 Villainy, x«xor()y/«, 222. 
 Violet, iV, 144. 
 Virtue, dnsr^, 8. 
 Voluntarily, iOeXovz/jgy ov, 
 
 299. 
 Volunteer (as a), €i>«Xorr*J^, 
 
 209. 
 
 Wall, r. Tffx*t«> {subsC.)iei:' 
 
 Xog^ TO, 222 
 Want, dto^ai, 150. 
 Wanted, if I am, &c., f«r 
 
 Tt 5«g, or ti It d«ot, 91. a. b. 
 War, TTo^ffioff. 
 Ward off, dfivrsiv rl Tirr, 
 
 222. 
 
 from myself, dfi9- 
 
 vo(Jiai, ace 222. 
 
 INDEX 1. 
 
 22» 
 
 Was near (« almost), oXtyov 1 
 d£4>, 283. c. I 
 
 Wash, ;ioi;m, ^188(1). 
 
 Watch over, iyQtjyoQtvai nsgij 
 £en. 193. 
 
 water, v^coq^ roj 15. 
 
 Way, odog, /;, 154. 
 
 Weak, da&evi^gy 319. 
 
 Weakness, da&iveia, 319. 
 
 Wealthy, ^^.ovaio^, 20. 
 
 Weep for, Haraxlaieiv (?),1&8 
 (2), 278. 
 
 Weigh anchor, atgeiv {an- 
 chor^ subaud.), 188. 
 
 Well,£v,8. 
 
 to be, naXmg bx^iv. 
 
 What? Ti; 
 
 kind of? ;roro^; 
 
 is, Ttt ofTa, 65. 
 
 comes from (the 
 
 gods) ta tmv OeaVy 54. 
 comes next (to), ta 
 
 iXOfitva, gen. 149. d. 
 
 induces you to . . ? ti 
 
 fia&<6v ; 3 IS. 
 
 - possesses you to . . ? 
 
 rlnaiytov; 318. 
 
 -, to — place, zror, o;rt'f, 
 
 When it is your duty, dfior, 
 w^o<y?Jxof , 250. 
 
 or whereas it was 
 
 saidj HQriiitvovy 250. 
 
 there is any occasion, tat 
 
 Ti btri (or, after an histori- 
 cal tense, ein deoi\ 91. a.b 
 
 Whence, mO^ev, 100. 
 
 Whenever, 6;roT£, 96. 
 
 Where, ;rov, 144. otiov, 72, p. 
 
 Whether, et, 335. iaV, 336. 
 
 Which way = i: hither, noX; 
 — in dependent questions 
 regularly, onoiy 72, p. 
 
 Whilst, dxQh Bcogy 306. 
 
 he was walking, fis- 
 
 ra^v nzQinat^Vj 288. 
 
 Whither, noXy 73, 144. in 
 dependent sentences, o;roi, 
 72, p. 
 
 Who? tig; in dependent 
 sentences, regularly oatig^ 
 72, note p. 
 
 in the world ? tig note ; 
 
 I 150. 
 
 Whole (the), 6 ndgy or nag o, 
 
 I 45. 
 
 -, oXogy 138. 
 
 144, 72, p. 
 
 we ought, « XQ^* ^^' 
 
 he 
 
 Whosoever, oatigy 92. h tig, 
 
 269. 
 
 Why? tiovdiati; 183. 
 
 Wicked, novTiQogy {immoral, 
 
 vile), ISS.—dvoaiog (one 
 
 who breaks the divine 
 
 and natural laws. See 
 
 -you, ^ may, ) ndgov, otr/o?, in 293*,) 299. 
 
 I, &c. I might, \ 250. | Wickedness, mvrjQiay 188. 
 
 Widow, xVQ^f 235. 
 
 Will certainly, 358. d. 
 
 c. — ta dtovtUy 206. 
 Whatsoever, oatig, 92. ft' tig, 
 
 269. 
 IVhen, oteyensidri,i7Teiddry92. 
 
 ? note; 92. 
 
 you ought, &c., diop, 
 
 250. 
 
 1 
 
 1i' 
 
 J \ 
 
/ 
 
 230 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 Willing: if you are — , ei 
 601 ^ovXo(iEV(a iaJiy 206. 
 
 Willingly at least, excoV mat, 
 144. 
 
 Wine, olvog, 15. 
 
 Wing (214), TutQv^^ala, 
 the wing with reference 
 to the win g-join^ — nitQov 
 ^penna, the wing with 
 reference to the wing- 
 feathers [Doderlein.) 
 
 Wisdom, (Toqp/a, 24. 
 
 Wise, (ToqpoV, 20. 
 
 Wish, 100 [distinction be- 
 tween ^ovlofiat and iOtXm, 
 100]. 
 
 With,(jvi' {dat.\fjis7(i (gen.)^ 
 24. 
 
 (by partic), tx^^'* 
 
 ayaov, qjt'gcoVy XQcojierog, 235. 
 
 W'ith a view to, ngig (ace), 
 319. 
 
 what object or view, 
 
 71 ^ovXofievog, 341. 
 
 impunity, x^k^^'y ^^^• 
 three others, TtzaQTog 
 
 Wolf, Xvxog, 41. 
 
 Woman, yvvi^, R. yvvain, V 
 
 yvvai, 15. 
 Wonder at, ^ai^irfoo, F. 
 
 M.8. 
 Work, eQyor, 121. 
 Worthless, <3p«i;>Lo^, 144. 
 Worthy of, a^iog, 65, 150. 
 Would probably have been, 
 
 ixiv8vvsv<j£v av (with in- 
 
 Ji7i.)y 359. 
 
 rather — than. ^5iof 
 
 av — 1], o/. 
 
 that ! uOSftiO* ^(peXop 
 
 avtcg, 68. 
 - you (us, (fee), to be. 
 
 ^ TTaQeifii. See 91. b. 
 Within, srdov, 125. 
 Without, t^(o,ge7i. 125. «rfi;, 
 
 gen. 150. xw()/V, 309. t'J/^ft, 
 
 309. 
 
 covered 
 
 being dis- "* 
 
 ob- 
 
 served, 
 
 seen 
 
 } 
 
 242. c. 
 241. 
 
 (f?,«), £1 yoLQ ojcpeXov^ag coqe- 
 Xov or (^(peXov alojie, 206. 
 
 Wound, riTQcoaxcaf 269. 
 
 Wretched, naxodatfimv, (ill- 
 fated), 144. axnwg, 274. 
 
 Wrong, «i'Oj/off, 299. See 
 293. 
 
 Y. 
 
 Year, hogy to, 144. 
 
 You are joking. naiXetg fx^r, 
 
 350. 0-. 
 do nothing but, ovdh 
 
 aXXo TJ — , 357. 
 - there ! ovtog {aittj) ! 
 
 knowing it, 
 
 325, d. ^ 
 
 Young, rtog, 168*. ^ 
 
 bird, noaaog, 214. 
 
 Yoiu's, vfitTSQog, 24. 
 Yourself, 48, 49. 
 
 Z. 
 
 Zeal, TO TTQoOvftor, {adj) 
 
 60. 
 ZealoufJ, TTQoOvfJOCy 221. e. 
 
 INDEX n 
 
 List of Phrases and Words explained.! 
 
 j4. 
 
 (o) iyup qo^og, 228. 
 ayannv Toig naqovai or ra 
 
 TiaQovra, 73. 
 ^-'Jj'OJi; (^=with), 235. 
 
 , , ^ ^rofay ^ p. 107, 
 
 alztXaOai {7nid.\ not with 
 two accusatives, 124, note 
 
 p. 
 
 AXh^at'^Qog fhtXlnnoVf 23. 
 
 «i>Lo T( ?; — ; aHoTi ; 318. 
 aXX(og re xai, 278. 
 ttXmai xXoTirjgy 73. 
 dfAqjoTSQOv ( -a), 345. 
 
 «y^' oJy, 267. 
 
 arm, 8. 
 
 «;io aou aQ^dfiSvog, 100. 
 
 — deiTTvov ysvea&ai^ 243. 
 
 ToD Tr^ogpai'OiI?, 243. 
 
 (iTzodidQciaAeiv ttvd, 138. 
 uQXf'jv or T7/I' «^;f'y»', 132. 
 «p;(o/M«roff, 235. 
 avzoig dviqamv, 350. 
 avtog, 39. avTOi" avzov, 166. 
 a^' cavroar, 243. 
 
 jS/oi; cJ 5^f(r, 206. 
 
 J. 
 
 dtSoynt'vov, 249, note n. 
 5i7>OTaTOi; (jai'Toi; ?;(y^a, 168 
 
 note ni. 
 dtov, 249. a. 
 drjXog tlfit, 239. 
 diaXiTiav xQovov, 235. 
 5t' opj'^v; fx^ff, &c., 270. 
 dixaiog tliii, 358. 
 a/xy;i' 5f5oVat [gen.\ 228. 
 dico'Ativ qjorov, 35. 
 ^oxoDr, 249, note n. 
 do^av (do^ap ravra, (fcc), 
 
 249. c. 
 doQi iXeiv, 193, note u. 
 dvraTOOTEQOi avToi avtmv, 
 
 168. c. 
 dvoiv dtovra {not bt6vT0iv\ 
 
 283. 
 
 E. 
 
 iavTov shat, 162*. i. 
 
 t Phrases not found here may be looked for *Ji their /^IphabetifCa. 
 tUce in the last section. 
 
 
232 
 
 INDEX II. 
 
 
 iynaXsiv tl uvi, 183. 
 
 ft (TOi ^ovXc/icVq) etTTtV, 206. 
 
 £1 iilllH yEvt'a&aij 283. 
 
 « II w 5ia, 12o. 
 
 — T«?,268. ^ , 
 
 xai aUoi,', 174. c?. 
 
 €iV ^cpslov {eg, e), 206. 
 
 HQrjfisvov, 250. j 
 
 £14? (iv^C* ^^^* ^' 
 
 Big didaandXov {m'^nfiv, (foi- 
 
 rav), 259. 
 — trjv flHlinitoVf 23. 
 ela'ip otXeyovteg } -263, note 
 
 ol h'yovai ) a. 
 
 «x/i'dvf€i'<Jti' av diaq^OaQ^ivai, 
 
 359. 
 Bxcoy fZytttj 144. 
 ffjinodav thai J 293*. 
 «• Tor»' fr()wro^j 259. 
 tVfxa Twi' ktQOJv, 250. 
 Mor xaraXw^tiy, 125. 
 fg a;r^oa5oxjiTOV, 224. 
 f'Jof, 249. b. 
 in ffioi, 65. 
 «V iiiov, 65. 
 
 f 77* Tf{) fFyw, 227. b. 
 
 inixovQBiv fOGCpi 239. 
 
 ioTtv 01 (== fHoi), 263. 
 
 ovcTivag . . . . ; 269. a. 
 
 d&v tTjg TtoXfcogt 309. 
 
 cvt^rtf ^xcoy, 309. 
 
 f qp* (^ or o)T€, 266. 
 
 fXio&aiJirog, 149. rf. 
 
 ^;foii' {=with)j 235. 
 
 w ai'^for, 27. 
 
 ^ jcctTo, with ace, 168. (2. 
 
 5 coarf, with injin, 168. c.^ 
 ^ noXXrj jTig i^qag (not ri 
 
 noXv)^ 58. 
 ^5«o)i? ay Osaaaifirjv, 86*. 
 i^;rc^ «7x*f, 351. 
 
 0. 
 
 OaviJiaoimg wtf, 273. a. 
 ^avfiucTov oaov, 273. c. 
 
 X. 
 
 xai otf, 40. c. 
 — ravra, 206. 
 yiartQXOfiai. 270. 
 xaro), 28, note x. 
 nvrog dixyv, 250. 
 
 ;Lrtyi>a»'<», with par/ ic. 242. c 
 Xeyeii', («J, xaxw*;, &c.), 35. 
 JLj^^tib; «x*"''> ^^^' 5^' 
 
 Jtf. 
 
 ^a ziia,341. 
 
 fiav&dro) (with par/.) 239. 
 
 u£yaXawqp«X£ri', ^Xdnieiv, <fcc 
 
 82, 065. 
 ^tvLioj yQdcpeiv, <kc., 283. 
 nerafitXei (with par^), 239. 
 ^fira^v nsQiTiaimPf 288. 
 
 lAVQlOl, fiVQtOl, 228. 
 
 y^ Jia, 341. 
 
 N. 
 
 INDEX i:. 
 
 233 
 
 O. 
 
 ' 
 
 5*, 40. 
 
 6 l^fiiavg tov XQovoVf 59. e. 
 
 6 olotf (TV ayjJc* ^^^' 
 
 oi dfiqjl "Avvtov, 283*, note x. 
 
 yriv ex^visgf 278. 
 
 — TToXXol, 45. 
 
 — ^r^offiJxofTfff, 249. 
 oUg te eifitt 283. 
 oiojif (= on TOfovTcoi'), 258, 6. 
 oXiyov deoa, dsTVf (fee, 283. 
 ofivvfii {rovg &£Ovg), 351. 
 o;ra>^' a^jj^ «<t««, 287*. 
 OCTOI' ov, 125. 
 
 ojov^ ^^i;yaTo;rX£/(rrot;i,*,l74.c. 
 o(T(j) — Toaovtqi, 168*. 
 oTi fityiatog, 174. 6. 
 ov fi^ XaX^(r£iff ; (fee, 287*. 
 
 — navtog eJvai, 162*. i. 
 ov, not siinply reflexive, but 
 
 used in dependent sen- 
 tences to denote the sub- 
 ject of the principal sen- 
 tence, 50, p. 29. 
 
 — £ not used by Attic prose- 
 writers, except Plato, 50, 
 p. 29. 
 
 ovx «(iTii», 86*. d. 
 
 — 1^01 (=^ non habeo)y 72. 6. 
 ovdeig oaiig ov, 277. 
 ovdev olov dxovaaij 278. 
 
 Ti, 150. 
 
 ovTog ! 325. d. 
 ovzmg Bx^iVf 72. c. 
 ovx on — dXXa xait 82. 
 
 n. 
 
 ffOQa fttxQov iX-&etv, tfec. 299. 
 
 ttag iXiyop duqievyov, &C.299. ' cpfgoav {with), 235. 
 
 ndaa rj TXoXig, 45. d, 
 
 noXig^ 45. d. 
 
 mumog avTog, &-C., 51. d. 
 TiSQi noXXov Tzoteiad^ai, 283*. 
 
 TieQlOQKVj 331. 
 
 fiegiTta rmv dQxovvtoov, 174.^ 
 
 niqjVHSf 208. 
 
 ;ro(£ry (ev, xaxw^), 35. 
 
 noXXanXdoioi ijfiwp, 174./1 
 
 ^oXv^ QeT, 132. 
 
 /ro^^oo T^ff ^^(xiaff, 143. 
 
 71^0 TzoXXov nouiaOai, 243. 
 
 nQoaix^iv, 331. 
 
 fT^off^xor, 250. 
 
 GvvoiSa ffiavt^ (erogpo? wy 01 
 
 6oq)^ ovTi), 238*. 6. 
 (r;foX5 {noii^aoi}), 112. 
 
 Ta;fVT£^a ? coq)03rsQa, 174. a 
 
 TfXfVTWr, 235. 
 
 71 fia&(ov ; 317. 
 
 — nad^cav ; 317. 
 rig note; 150. 
 TO a;ro roiJ^f, 34*. y. 
 
 — ye yvy eZya/, 206. 
 
 — im Tovtoig ehatj 206, 
 
 TZQO&VfiOV, 60. 
 
 — reXevraiov, 34*. /'. 
 TOV (with injin.\ 216. 
 Tovvavtiovy 137. 
 Tovvofia, 137. 
 tovrov ye mxa, 250. 
 T(p oyT/, 65. 
 
 0. 
 
234 
 
 INDEX II. 
 
 q)8Q(oVf 350. h. 
 qisvyeiv qpofof, 35. 
 
 , = (pvyeiVy 270. g. 
 
 (p{^civ(o (&c.) 242. d. e.f. 35S. 
 b. c. d. 
 
 Si. 
 
 (og tnog slneTvy 444, 
 
 — avveXovTi €i7iHr, 444 
 jdiiaia, 174 h. 
 
 — jdxovg €?;foy, 278. 
 maneo dx^v, 351. 
 
 X«e*»' W^ 250. i wqpeiof, 206. 
 
 XQdouEvog (=with\ 235. | 
 
 INDEX III. 
 
 List of Words that have some irregularity of Declem' 
 
 sioN or Conjugation. 
 
 A. 
 
 ayvvfiiy 193. 
 
 fidcoyF, M., IG8*. 
 drjdm'f 341. 
 aiQtODj 190. 
 
 aiaOttvofiaiy 190. 
 
 dxov(o, F. M., 92. 
 
 dXiaxofxaii 73. 
 
 dXXofiaiy 274. 
 
 »Ma()raroo, 154. 
 
 art/o^af, 214, note i. 
 
 ftttoiya, dvt(pY^aifl9^: noteq. 
 
 dvoiycHy 193. 
 
 uTzoxQivofiaty 278. 
 
 rt;7oXat;w, 259. 
 
 /^.Wnwr, 341. 
 
 «(jf (Txoi, 337. 
 
 tt^vto), F. fffo), 175. 
 
 axOonaty 20. 
 
 ^aivo), 228. 
 
 R 
 
 r. 
 
 yaXa, 132. 
 ;'£>la€o, doofiat, 278 
 ^lyvofAati 15. 
 
 y/yi'oaaxoi), 156. 
 yofr, 20. 
 yrrjj, 15. 
 
 deiy 60. 
 deidfo, 293*. 
 divSgov, 144. 
 ^tSaaxo), 125. 
 didgdaxcx), 138. 
 5tipaw, 131, note b. 
 5o^r, 193. 
 doxs(Of 96. 
 bvvanoLiy 87. 
 5i;(o, 125. 
 
 K 
 
 £a^, 341. 
 
 cijui (i6o), 65. 
 
 fZ/rov, 60. 
 
 iXavvcHy 24. 
 
 Inaivmy gen., F. M.,60. 
 
 eTtiatafiai, 293*. 
 
 tnofiaiy 183. 
 
 f^aw, 274. 
 
 egxofJiai, 112. 
 
 £<T^iw, 144 
 
II 
 
 336 
 
 ej^co, 15. 
 
 Z, 
 
 fao), 131, note b. 
 
 H. 
 
 jxw, 206. 
 rjfiiavgy 58. 
 *HQanXrjgy 183. 
 f^QOi^riv, 73. 
 
 INDEX III. 
 
 a 
 
 0a*.ijg, 183. 
 O^yjjaxo), 125, 
 &vydiTiQ, 20. 
 
 I. 
 
 Ixpiofiatj 242, note k. 
 
 X. 
 
 K>ta/(o, 150. 
 xXeWw, F. M., 73. 
 xo^aCw, F. M., 121. 
 
 HQlfOV, 144. 
 
 xvcoi', 41. 
 
 3 afiBdvcHf 92. 
 Xay^aVco, 154. 
 liJo), 190. 
 
 M, 
 
 fiaivoftai, 125. 
 fAcixofJiciti 73. 
 uijTi;^, 20. 
 
 iV. 
 
 rat^y 125. 
 
 u 
 
 oSovg, 20. 
 SCw, 150. 
 o?da, 73, nott i. 
 oiHude, 331. 
 
 otofiCLl, 87. 
 
 o/V, 41, note , 
 olxo^al, 20Qfin\B% 
 oXlvfit, 193. 
 o^yr^/, 343, note 8. 
 ogdo), 73. 
 oQvig, 15. 
 oZff, 20. 
 ogjeaw, 206. 
 
 n. 
 
 naiXm, 343, note u. 
 aaax^Oy 168*. 
 ;if/yaa), 131, note b, 
 r^yvvfAii 193. 
 ^TiVoo, 144. 
 
 711711(0, 293*. 
 
 ^rX/o), 188. 
 nogevofiai, 24. 
 UoaeidatVy 341. 
 ;iovtf, 20. 
 ngaog, 138. 
 
 2". 
 
 (leyaco, F. M., 269*. 
 atroff, 259, note v. 
 6no7iay 336, note L 
 aieQovfiat, 168*. 
 ^roax^ar}?^, 15. 
 
 T. 
 
 Tffivw, 46, note (|. 
 rtxroo, 15. 
 7ir^(0(TxOy 269*. 
 
 INDEX III. 
 
 m 
 
 fQfX^i 65. 
 rvyjfayo), 183. 
 
 vSoaQj 15. 
 
 qp«(>«>, 60. 
 
 qi&dyo), 241. 
 
 X 
 
 jf£((>, 20. 
 X£Xid(6v,2i\, 
 X^aofiftf, 131, notftb. 
 ;f^jj, 91, note i 
 
 THE END. 
 
*\ 
 
i 
 
 I 
 
' ^ , ^*^^^''^vg^.i^^ i^y^if I - ,■ 
 
 .'-'-^-^f^. 
 

 s 
 
 4^ 
 
 
 * ' , 
 
 
 standard. 
 
 Classical 
 
 Works. 
 
 
 Arnold's First «reek Book,* on 
 
 the Flan of the First Latin 
 
 Book. 12mo. 297 pages. 
 
 Arnold's Practical Introduction to Greek Prose 
 
 (Jompusition.* lilmo. 231 pages. 
 
 Arnold's Second Part to tlie AboTe,* 
 
 pages. 
 
 12mo. 248 
 
 '^. 
 
 Arnold's Greek Reading Book. Containing the Sub- 
 stance of the Practical Introduction to Greek Construing and a 
 Treatise on the Greek Particles ; also, Copious Selections from 
 Greek Authors, with Critical and Explanatory English Notes and 
 a Lexicon. 12mo. 618 pages, 
 
 Br Arnold's Greek Courses have been oarefnlly revised, corrected, 
 and improv^l by J A. Spencek, D.D., making tUeia a thorough, prac 
 tical, and easy Greek course. 
 
 Boise's Exercises In Greek Prose Composition. 
 
 Adapted to the First Book of Xenophon's Anabasis. By James 
 K. Boise, Professor of Greek in University of Michigan. 12mo. 
 1S5 pages. 
 
 Ckamplin's Sliort and Comprehensive Greek 
 G™m"" By J. T. Ch.mplik, Professor of Greek and Latin 
 in TVaterviUe College. 12mo. 208 pages. 
 
 Pirst I^essons In Greek;* or, the Beginner's Companion- 
 bL to nrdW's Grammar. By Jahbs Moukis Whiton rector 
 ff Ckins G-mmar School, New Haven. Ct (Eecently pub- 
 lished.) 12mo. 
 
 fladley's Greek Grammar,* for Schools and Colleges. By 
 flZ IIADLET, Professor in Yale CoUege. (Recently published.) 
 12mo. 366 pages. 
 
 Herodotus, Selections Prom; Comprising Plainly such 
 porTions aVglve a Connected History of the Eas^o the Fall of 
 Babylon and the Death of Cyrus the Great. By Herman M. 
 JonNSON, D.D., Professor of Philosophy and English Literature 
 in Dickinson College. 12mo. 1S5 pages. 
 
 Kukner's Greek Grammar. Translated by Professors 
 Edw4r<b and Taylok. Large 12mo. 620 pages. 
 
 
 ArG3 
 
 COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY 
 
 0032214057 
 
 / 
 
 'i 
 1 
 
 ^N>- V'^W^^*'^*'^^ 
 
 W 
 
 ]^5^bcH^/^^0L Gxv\>X^ 
 
 7 " // // ^ *